Home

[MI 020-495] Intelligent Field Device Configurator (IFDC

1. Parameter Value Parameter Value Chem Comp Temp 4 2 0 Chem Comp Val 1 3 0 Chem Comp Val 4 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 2 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 5 2 0 Chem Comp Val 2 3 0 Chem Comp Val 5 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 3 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 6 2 0 Chem Comp Val 3 3 0 Chem Comp Val 6 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 4 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 7 2 0 Chem Comp Val 4 3 0 Chem Comp Val 7 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 5 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 8 2 0 Chem Comp Val 5 3 0 Chem Comp Val 8 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 6 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 9 2 0 Chem Comp Val 6 3 0 Chem Comp Val 9 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 7 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 10 2 0 Chem Comp Val 7 3 0 Chem Comp Val 10 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 8 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 11 2 0 Chem Comp Val 8 3 0 Chem Comp Val 11 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 9 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 12 2 0 Chem Comp Val 9 3 0 Chem Comp Val 12 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 10 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 13 2 0 Chem Comp Val 10 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 11 3 0 Temperature Units 00 Chem Comp Val 11 3 0 Temperature Mode 00 Chem Comp Temp 12 3 0 Temp Auto Mode 40 Chem Comp Val 12 3 0 Temp Manual Mode 100 Chem Comp Temp 13 3 0 Temp Type 04 Chem Comp Val 13 3 0 Damp 02 Chem Comp Temp 14 3 0 Meas Stability 01 Chem Comp Val 14 3 0 Meas Stability Time 05 Chem Comp Temp 15 3 0 Meas Stability Var 09 Chem Comp Val 15 3 0 Temp Stability 00 Chem Comp Temp 16 3 0 Temp Stability Time 00 Chem Comp Val 16 3 0 Temp Stability Var 09 Chem Comp Temp 1
2. Parameter Value Parameter Value Valve Type 0x1 High Alarm 0 Control Action 0x1 High High Alarm 0 Failsafe Config 0x0 Low Alarm 0 Failsafe Timeout 2 313824024e 041 Low Low Alarm O Fallback Position 9 422788258e 038 Cycle Count Limit 30ab6e01 Setpoint Source 0x3 Travel Deadband 0 Analog Setpoint Lo 9 219562986e 041 Travel Sum Limit 30ab6e01 Analog Setpoint Hi 1 084202302e 019 Control Diff Limit 0 Characterizer Pts 0x2 Control Diff Time 0 XO Value 0 Alarm Deadband 0 YO Value 0 Temp Lower Limit 0 X1 Value 3 201686731e 041 Temp Upper Limit 0 Y1 Value 3 201686731e 041 P Term Dec 0 X2 Value 0 Term Dec 0 Y2 Value 1 040505355e 035 D Term Dec O X3 Value 0 P Term Inc 0 Y3 Value 1 040505355e 035 Term Inc 2 727090083e 023 X4 Value 0 D Term Inc 0 Y4 Value 0 Rate Limit Inc 0 1000000015 X5 Value 0 Rate Limit Dec 0 1000000015 Y5 Value 0 Control Gap 0 X6 Value 0 Setpoint 28 Y6 Value 0 Measurement Scan 1212 X7 Value 0 Valve Position 1111 Y7 Value 0 Stem Setpoint 1313 X8 Value 0 Air Supply Pressure 1414 Y8 Value 0 Output Pressure 1515 X9 Value 0 Control Difference 0 Y9 Value 0 Travel Position 0 X10 Value 0 Travel Sum 0 Y10 Value 0 Internal Temperature 5 831554006e 039 X11 Value 0 Cycle Count 0 Y11 Value 1 016595295e 034 Analog Setpoint 2 980232239e 008 X12 Value 0 Lower Input Current 5 758085329e 039 Y12
3. digit passcode Enable Passcode 2 Similar to Enable Passcode 1 Noise Reduction J On Blank Off Empty Pipe Detection J On Blank Off Line Frequency Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz Empty Pipe Effect Select No Effect or Auto Signal Lock Display Totalizer Tab Screen IMT Device Configuration x Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer Display Preferences Dual Display On IV Default Display On Power Up Rate EGU y Display Line 1 Rate EGU v Flow Display Damping 3 0 Sec Display Line 2 Rate EGU kd Totals Totalizer Units Gal z Custom Format for Grand Total nenes y Format for Forward Reverse and Net Totals ense y Total Flow Needed to Trigger a Pulse 1 00 Gal Cancel Apply Help Figure O 9 Sample IMT96 Display Totalizer Tab Screen Field Entry Display Preferences 323 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Field Entry Dual Display On J On Blank Off Display Line 1 If Dual Display On is checked y select from menu of six choices Display Line 2 If Dual Display On is checked y select from menu of six choices Default Display Select from menu of seven choices Flow Display Damping Enter damping response time for local display between 0 00 and 99 9 seconds Totals Total On On Blank Off To
4. Tube The tube is partially Check flowmeter and process conditions Cycle power Imbalance filled and cannot run to transmitter Tube Failure There is a tube failure Check flowmeter and process conditions Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Received bad message problem contact the CSC Flow Alarm Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions a flowmeter alarm condition Density Alarm Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions a flowmeter alarm condition Temperature Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions Alarm a flowmeter alarm condition 164 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Diagnostic Error Messages Table 30 Diagnostic Error Messages Code Error Message Recommended Action 02 IOP ROM Checksum Error Press O on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while viewing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persists contact the CSC 03 IOP EEPROM Chksum Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while viewing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persists contact the CSC 06 07 13 EOP ROM Chksum EOP EEPROM Chksum IOP EEPROM Write Error Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while vie
5. 294 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Sensor Tab Screen 870CR Transmitter Configuration Electode Z oo a Figure M 8 Sample 870ITCR Sensor Tab Screen MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Sensor Configuration Applications Number of applications to be configured Select 1 2 or 3 applications Application Select Select 1 2 3 or AUTO Probe Type Specify 2 Electrode Cell Constant Specify 0 1 10 or Other Cell Factor If sensor type is Other specify cell factor between 00 00 and 99 99 Outputs mA Output Mode Select Digital or 4 20 mA Damping Select damping response time of 1 5 10 20 40 or 120 seconds 295 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Measurement Tab Screen 870CR Transmitter Configuration x Identifier Sensor Measurement Misc App 1 Temperature Units Celsius Failure Value 40 c C Fahrenheit Manual Temperature 100 Cc Mode Automatic Manual Temperature Sensor 100K ohm y Stability Time Measurement Stabilitity MV Measurement Stabilitity Active Stability Variant p 4 Temperature Stabilitity Stability Tim 5 3 Stability Variant a 5 sec sec sec sec Cancel Help Apply Figure M 9 Sample 870IT
6. Parameter Value Parameter Value Misc Flags 70 Line Size 1 5 UNUSED 00 UNUSED 0 Database Chng Cntr 31 Meter Factor 18 6 UNUSED 2f Pulse Scale 0 UNUSED 07 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 01 UNUSED 0 UNUSED c4 mA Percent 0 1495387 UNUSED 09 mA LRV 5 447178 UNUSED cc Damping x10 5 UNUSED 39 Width 89 UNUSED 60 P1 2900 UNUSED 1 542549e 041 P2 1 UNUSED 0 Gamma 20615 UNUSED 0 Offset 0 UNUSED 0 Alpha 20538 UNUSED 0 Filter 4155 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00 UNUSED 0 Comm Turnaround 01 UNUSED 0 Diag Error Code 00 00 UNUSED 00 00 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0 N_A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED 0 EEPROM Checksum 0 127 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters 128 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the IMT25 and IMT25L Magnetic Flow transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Device Error Messages Calibration Pulse Preset Configuration Database Report NOTE Version 2 0 of the IFDC PC20 software incorporates full configuration capability for the HART IMT25 transmitters Any HART IMT25 database saved to your computer hard disk for Version 1 0 is not usable for Version 2 0 Therefore delete Version 1 0 files and save new files from your transmitter using Version 2 0 software Device D
7. Message Explanation Recommended Action HART Status Device Busy Transmitter is busy Try the command again later Device Malfunction Severe problem Check the other status bits Configuration Changed The configuration of the This flag can be reset with the menu transmitter has been changed item Reset Changed Flag Cold Start Device rebooted Check power supply 102 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 18 Transmitter Status Error Messages for a HART Transmitter Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Output Current Fixed The output current is fixed The reason might be that it is in the fail safe state The Device Specific Transmitter Status may show the reason for the fail safe state Analog Output Saturated Analog Output out of 4 to 20 mA range PV exceeds the configured range Check range limits Variable not Primary out of Limits Electronic or sensor temperature out of limits Check Device Specific Transmitter Status for more information Primary Variable out of Limits Sensor signal out of limits Check Device Specific Transmitter Status and applied process value Device Specific Transmitter Status Configured Measuring Range Invalid The measuring range exceeds the upper and or lower range limits Check range Device Temperature outside 40
8. Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Transmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this Diagnostic Error initializing on reset Indicates an active diagnostic error does not clear problem contact the CSC See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Codes to determine problem and corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the Status Error secondary status screen display Secondary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Bad Message Transmitter sent Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Sent a bad message problem contact the CSC Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Received bad message problem contact the CSC Sensor 1 Sensor 1 malfunction Check and or replace Sensor 1 and associated sensor Failed wiring Sensor 2 Sensor 2 malfunction Check and or replace Sensor 2 and associated sensor Failed wiring Electronics Fail Internal RTT 20 tests have failed Replace electronics Table 18 Transmitter Status Error Messages for a HART Transmitter
9. 325 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters 326 Index 130 Calibration 278 Configuration 266 Device Data Screen 262 140 Calibration 278 Configuration 266 Device Data Screen 262 Device Status Screen 263 Devices with I A Series Pressure Transmitter Compatibility 257 Specification Information 282 820 Calibration 74 Configuration 81 Database Report 86 Device Data Screen 71 Error Messages 72 83 Calibration 181 Configuration 186 Database Report 191 Device Data Screen 179 Error Messages 180 860 Calibration 74 Configuration 81 Database Report 86 Device Data Screen 71 Error Messages 72 870ITCR Configuration 294 Database Report 299 Device Data Screen 285 Error Messages 286 870ITEC Calibration 195 Configuration 202 Database Report 207 Device Data Screen 193 Error Messages 194 870ITPH Calibration 216 327 MI 024 495 October 2010 Configuration 220 Database Report 227 Device Data Screen 213 285 Error Messages 214 A Audit Trail Info Window 26 C Calibration 130 278 140 278 820 74 83 181 860 74 870ITEC 195 870ITPH 216 CFT10 150 CFT15 167 I A Series Pressure 74 IMT10 IMT20 121 IMT25 134 IMT96 315 RTT10 90 RTT20 103 SRD991 235 Calibration Function 51 CFT10 Calibration 150 Configuration 154 Database Report 161 Device Data Screen 147 Error Messages 148 CFT15 Calibration 167 Configuration 169 Database Report 176 Device Data
10. Tag Name Enter maximum of 16 characters Optional used for reference only Tag Date Enter a date It is possible to enter any valid future or past date For example this field may be used for storing the date of the last calibration or a future planned maintenance date Message Enter maximum of 32 characters This field can be used for company internal designations device numbers for material industry business final alignment of device startup of device or other purpose 112 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters Input Tab Screen MI 024 495 October 2010 RTT Device Configuration x Identifier Input Options Display Sensor Configuration C ThermoCouple C Special Input Input Config PT100 DIN 751 y Wire Type 2 Wire Linearization Normal y 2 Wire Dual Calculation r r Measurement Measurement Units Lower Range Value 200 00 Upper Range Value 500 00 Lower Range Limit 200 00 Upper Range Limit 850 00 Cc Secondary Measurement Units c y Cold Junction Cold Junction Configuration Disabled Cancel Apply Help Figure C 10 Sample RTT20 Input Tab Screen Field Entry Sensor Type Select RTD Sensor ThermoCouple or Special Input Input Config Select from menu of input types Wire Type For RTDs select from menu of wire types Linearization Select Normal or Dewpoint
11. Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 2d Formula Set 1 03 03 13 01 Ob 80 03 70 Oc 7c 02 02 Tag Number PC10_20_STD2 Formula Set 2 Ob 00 03 68 Oc 74 02 01 05 39 03 34 Tag Name UNIT 08 2 Formula Set 3 Oc 01 03 30 Oc 02 02 03 05 2d 03 28 Device Name DevNam Formula Set 4 Oc 01 03 24 Oc 01 03 20 03 03 Oc 02 Geo Location TEST LAB 2 Formula Set 5 02 03 05 1d 03 18 0c 01 03 14 0c 01 Meas 1 Units inH20 Formula Set 6 03 10 03 03 Oc 02 02 03 05 Od 03 08 Meas 1 Units inH20 Formula Set 7 Oc 01 03 04 Oc 01 03 00 03 03 13 00 1 Upper Range Value 100 Formula Set 8 02 03 14 01 02 01 04 01 03 01 03 03 1 Lower Range Value 0 Formula Set 9 00 61 Oc 01 02 01 14 01 03 01 02 03 Meas 1 Span 100 Formula Set 10 05 5e 03 58 Oc 02 02 02 05 55 03 02 Meas 1 Offset 0 Formula Set 11 03 50 13 01 02 02 03 03 ff Meas 2 Span 100 Formula Set 12 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff Meas 2 Offset 0 Formula Set 13 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff Serial Number Neponset Formula Set 14 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff Calib Initials jackie Formula Set 15 02 00 03 01 23 00 43 01 63 Last Calib Date 7 14 98 Formula Set 16 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff Sensor Mfg Date 9 30 93 Coef 01 0 Calibration Slope 1 Coef 02 0 Calibration Offset 0 Coef 03 0 Personality Word 0 Coef 04 0 Sensor Id Number Oc 01 Coef 05 0 Sensor MS Code 01 Coef 06 0 Device Type 00 Coef 07 0 Manufacture Date 12 21 93 Coef 08 0 Minor Revision Code 05 Coef 09 0 Major Revision Code 01 Coef 10 0 Max R
12. Entries to be typed in the Settings x for x for section Windows 95 Windows NT gap Time FoxCom IA x 14 14 receive lime FoxCom IA x 20 20 delay Time FoxCom IA x 300 300 wait lime FoxCom IA x 300 300 Meaning These are the default values depending upon the computer used with PC20 Changing the x values per the instruction below can eliminate communication failures when PC20 is communicating to a device digitally integrated to an I A Series system through a FBM If you get a lot of communication errors when connected in parallel to the I A Series FBM you may get better results by changing the gapTime either increase or decrease the gap Time by one or two digits If you still have communication failures change the 35 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation gap Time again in the same direction If you still have communication errors change the gap Time to the other side of the default setting by one or two digits If the computer is used in both the stand alone situation and with transmitters digitally integrated to an I A Series system you can modify the setting directory if necessary for both situations per B and C above Then whenever PC20 is being used in the stand alone situation manually start the fast communications by selecting File gt Workshop Environment But do not modify the Settings section to automatically start the Workshop Environment per A above because you will get communication e
13. 140 Series with HART protocol 140 Series with FoxCom protocol 140 Series with FoxCom protocol and with I A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitter compatibility The difference between the first two types is the protocol itself and some protocol specific differences The third type is a FoxCom device that is compatible with the I A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitters This means that for the calibration configuration status windows and so forth the same functions are used as for the I A Series Pressure Transmitters described in Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters The 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters are only available with HART protocol From the configuration point of view the behavior of the 130 Series and the 140 Series HART devices are identical Please refer to 140 Series with FoxCom or HART Protocol on page 262 for a detailed description of the configuration user interface 140 Series with FoxCom Protocol and with I A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitter Compatibility The transmitters delivered from the factory are in the IDP10 B compatibility mode The 140 Series FoxCom transmitter identifies itself as a IDP10 B transmitter type In this IDP10 B compatibility mode it is possible to configure and calibrate the transmitter with the PC10 the HHT and IMTW that is integrated in I A Series software V4 2 and below See the appropriate documentation for these products for more infor
14. Figure L 18 Sample Failsafe Handling Tab Screen Errors By checking the different check boxes you can configure which errors will bring the transmitter into the fail safe mode If this box is not checked a disturbance does not affect the analog output Failsafe Value In this area you can specify whether in a fail safe situation the analog output is latched at the last valid value or set to a value specified between 3 6 and 23 mA Reset Failsafe Value In this area you can specify the manner in which to reset fail safe after a fail safe condition is corrected Selecting Auto automatically clears the latched fail safe state and returns to normal measuring and corresponding analog output when the reason for the fail safe state is corrected Selecting Manual requires you to manually clear the fail safe state via the Return from Failsafe function Device Tab Screen In this screen the local display and keys may be configured 275 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters 276 E 141GP A OF x rte Protected m Local Display Keys Display Engineering Units Keys Enable hed m Frequency Rejection 50Hz C 60Hz OK Cancel Apply Help Figure L 19 Sample Device Tab Screen If the Write Protected box is checked the transmitter is write protected and the inadvertent changing of the transmitter configuration is prevented
15. Foxboro Corporation IFDC PC20 File Version 5 Transmitter Type converted Subtype 16 10 Firmware Major Revision 0 Firmware Minor Revision 5 Database Type 2 Date 02 08 2000 14 00 Comment BEGIN_INPUT TAGNME Level Device Tag Descriptor LOCATE Location 1 Geo Location SENPLT 0a 144LVD Sensor Type Code SENTYP 25 Transmitter Type TAGNMB 144LVD Tag MANUFID 3f Foxboro Eckardt Manufacture ID HDWRREV 03 Hard Rev DEVID 9300361 Device ID Number TAGDATE 09 22 1999 Tag Date END_INPUT Configuration Function The Configuration function allows editing of the device database This function is accessed via the Edit menu from the device top level menu or from the device toolbar The Configure menu contains those configurable parameters applicable to a specific product Therefore the menu differs from product to product Information on each configuration operation and how to accomplish the configuration is given in the appropriate product appendix 49 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Compare Function The Compare function allows you to compare values of various device parameters in the working database with those in the device or those in a stored database file The Compare function is accessed via the Edit menu from the device top level menu A sample of a compare screen is shown in Figure 19 All parameters whose values are different are highlighted Compare
16. 5 Select Continue Select 20 mA Output Enter the measured value and select Apply Repeat this step until the output matches the measured value Select Continue Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Configuration Identifier Tab Screen The Identifier screen for a FoxCom device is somewhat different than that for a HART device A description of each follows 110 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 FoxCom Device RTT Device Configuration Owner Tag Name Instr Location Figure C 8 Sample RTT20 Identifier Tab Screen FoxCom Device Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the default transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters HART Device RTT Device Configuration Far paras Default Configuratiorl Figure C 9 Sample RTT20 Identifier Tab Screen HART Device Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 8 characters The tag number becomes the transmitter filename
17. Chem Comp Val 2 3 Chem Comp Val 5 2 Chem Comp Temp 3 3 Chem Comp Temp 6 2 Chem Comp Val 3 3 Chem Comp Val 6 2 Chem Comp Temp 4 3 Chem Comp Temp 7 2 Chem Comp Val 4 3 Chem Comp Val 7 2 Chem Comp Temp 5 3 Chem Comp Temp 8 2 Chem Comp Val 5 3 Chem Comp Val 8 2 Chem Comp Temp 9 2 Chem Comp Temp 6 3 Chem Comp Val 6 3 Chem Comp Val 9 2 Chem Comp Temp 7 3 Chem Comp Temp 10 2 Chem Comp Val 10 2 Chem Comp Val 7 3 Chem Comp Temp 8 3 Chem Comp Temp 11 2 Chem Comp Val 8 3 Chem Comp Val 11 2 Chem Comp Temp 12 2 Chem Comp Temp 9 3 Chem Comp Val 9 3 Chem Comp Val 12 2 Chem Comp Temp 10 3 ojojojojojojojojoj joj jojojo o Ojo oO oO oO OoO O O ojojojo O joO joO O O O OJO O OOOO O OJO OJO O O OJO O OOOO O O OJO O O OJOJO O O OJO O Chem Comp Val 10 3 Output mA 3 0 0125 Chem Comp Temp 11 3 Temperature Units 00 Chem Comp Val 11 3 Temperature Mode 00 Chem Comp Temp 12 3 Temp Auto Mode 10 Chem Comp Val 12 3 Temp Manual Mode 25 Chem Comp Temp 13 3 Temp Type 04 Chem Comp Val 13 3 Damp 02 Chem Comp Temp 14 3 Meas Stability 01 Chem Comp Val 14 3 Meas Stability Time 05 Chem Comp Temp 15 3 Meas Stability Var 01 Chem Comp Val 15 3 Temp Stability 00 Chem Comp Temp 16 3 Temp Stability Time 00 Chem Comp Val 16 3 Temp Stability Var
18. Display Line 2 If Dual Display On is checked y select from menu of six choices Default Display Select from menu of seven choices Flow Display Damping Enter damping response time for local display between 0 00 and 99 9 seconds Totals Total On On Blank Off Totalizer Units If Totalizer On is checked y select Gal Lit or Custom Format for Grand Total If Totalizer On is checked y select from menu of eight choices Format for Forward Reverse and Net Totals choices Database Report NOTE If Totalizer On is checked y select from menu of eight If a parameter in the report is UNUSED the corresponding value shown has no meaning for that device Table 25 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 29 Tot 1 Alarm Set Poin 3 161953e 007 Tag Number ft102 Tot 2 Alarm On 00 Tag Name IMT25 Tot 2 Alarm Set Poin 4 215937e 007 Device Name DevNam Empty Pipe Detect Al 00 Geo Location lab Rate Response Alarm 02 Date of Manufacture 10 1 97 Display Response Ala 00 Transmitter MS Code IMT25 XMTRMSCODE Alarm Clear 01 Transmitter Serial N XMTRSERNUMO12345 Rate Response Diag 00 Tube MS Code 1 TUBEMS Display Response Dia 00 Tube MS Code 2 Contact In 2 Operati Tube Serial Number 55555 Write Protect 00 Passcode 1 On 00 Default Display 02 Pass 1 Protect 00 Dual Display On Off 00 Passcode 1 8
19. Select Model IDP10 4 Figure 15 Model Selection Dialog Box 37 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Device Selection and File Operations A major difference between the IFDC I A Series configuration and the PC20 configuration is the selection of devices and directories With the PC20 connections are made to whatever device is on the wire In the I A Series configuration case you must select the device See Figure 16 A more important distinction is for file operations In the stand alone case file operations use standard Windows File menu Open and Save operations using the standard file browsing dialog boxes When connected to an I A Series system file operations are hard wired to specific directories for each device Thus the selection for the directory to save to and the name of the file is indirectly done by selecting a device from the available device list The following table describes the various file operations and their behaviors File Menu PC20 IFDC New Displays Device List Brings up Configuration sheet Displays Device List Brings up Configuration sheet Open Brings up the standard Windows Brings up the Device Select dialog box The file Open dialog box to open any select database specifies the directory where the database file file is located The selected device block name is used as the filename New if the configuration file does not exist in the
20. Tag Number TAG NR Device Type IDP10 B Rev 3 28 TagName unknown Device Name DevNam Location GEO LOCATION Measurement 1 0 30 Measurement 2 Not Active Device Temperature 24 3 75 8 m Equivalent 4 05 For Help press F1 Measurement 1 IFD MODEM Ui Figure L 2 Sample Device Data Screen for a 140 Series Transmitter in IDP10 B Compatibility Mode 258 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 How to Change the 140 Series Compatibility Type If the 140 Series Transmitter is in the IDP10 B compatibility mode it is not possible to change the configuration to do any calibration documentation and so forth with the PC20 software With the key combination Alt Ctrl T it is possible to change the compatibility mode of the 140 Series Transmitter Pressing this key combination brings up the message box shown in Figure L 3 and then in Figure L 4 Before you call this dialog box you need to know the model code of the transmitter This information can be found on the transmitter nameplate labeled as MODEL In the successive selection dialog box shown in Figure L 5 the model can be selected Example Fora MODEL 141GP B select 1141GP B This procedure changes only the transmitter type Any configuration or calibration done in another mode is not changed Change Device Type x with this Function it is possible to change the type of the transmitt
21. similar For FoxCom and HART devices the Input tab screen is used The Profibus device uses the PV tab screen The Profibus PV tab screen contains some additional features which are described at the end of this chapter Both tabs show the relevant information for the sensor input Device Type Measurement Task and maximum Span Limit The equivalent value and unit for the Span Limit may be entered here 267 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters 268 ie 144LD 3 Profibus Figure L 12 Sample Profibus PV Tab Screen The PV unit is centrally assigned for the complete device and is automatically displayed in the Output screen according to the defined values When a different pressure unit for FoxCom or HART device is selected a recalculation of the corresponding values in the Output tab screen fields for Lower Range Value Upper Range Value and Upper Range Limit is also done For the Profibus Level device the recalculation is only done between the length or volume units Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 E 141GP A OF ES Identifier ln Characterization Output Density Failsave Handling Device Device Type fi HGP y Measurement Task Presssure F Span Limit 250 mbar equivalent 250 0000 mbar OK Cancel Apply Help Figure L 13 Sample Input Tab Screen Devic
22. 1141GP B Rev 3 28 TagName unknown Device Name DevNam Location GEO LOCATION Measurement 1 z 0 30 Measurement 2 Not Active Device Temperature 24 3 75 8 m Equivalent 4 05 For Help press F1 Measurement 1 IFD MODEM L Figure L 6 Sample Device Data Screen for a 140 Series Transmitter in the 140 Series Mode Using the PC20 to calibrate and configure the 140 Series transmitters is much easier because the software recognizes the model specific differences The model specific parameters can be written to the transmitter by selecting the menu item Calibration gt Restore Default NOTE This function should not be used when the transmitter is preconfigured and calibrated by the factory or someone else for specific usage It resets the device to the default calibration and range settings If the PC20 is used to do the initial configuration and calibration steps the model specific parameters must be written to the transmitter by calling the menu item Calibration gt Restore Default When the 140 Series transmitter is specifically identified for example 1141GP B the transmitter can be calibrated and configured as described for the I A Series Pressure Transmitters in Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters All functions and displays are the same If PC20 is only used to do the calibration and configuration steps for the device setup and afterwards the other configurators PC10 HHT
23. 3 or 5 Point Calibration Enter the desired reading you want to see reported for each calibration point enter the calibrator s initials and select Continue NOIE n SSeS On 3 point and 5 point calibrations the end points are fixed Therefore you only need to enter the mid point values Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 N Point Calibration Ed To do the N Point calibration 1 Set the number of points to be calibrated 2 Enter the Desired Reading you want to see reported for each calibration point 3 Press Continue to automatically measure and calibrate each Points E Range 200 00 to 850 00 C Desired Reading T 200 2 625 3193 Calibrator s Initials stb 4 587 5 Calibrated 1124 97 5 850 Cancel i Help Figure C 2 Sample RTT20 N Point Calibration Screen qe Select Continue when you are ready to set input for Calibration Point 1 yi Select Continue again when ready to set input to desired reading 6 When the displayed measurement is stable for Calibration Point 1 select Continue again 7 Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for each point 8 Select Continue to save the calibration to the transmitter The current calibration date is automatically displayed 9 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Custom Input Curve The Custom Input Curve screen func
24. Disable error messages ATC Short ATC Open Compensation Range mA Range Measurement Range Enable All Enables all messages listed above Disable All Disables all messages listed above Local Display Major Passcode Enter 4 digit passcode Minor Passcode Enter 4 digit passcode 205 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Field Entry Display Timeout Enter timeout between 0 and 999 seconds Application Tab Screen Identifier Sensor Measurement Misc App 1 Display Custom Units Primary Scale Full Scale Temp Linear Temp Compensation naci Dilute y fable Primary Units fms y Tables 50 00 mS y Full Scale Limit 50 fo Secondary Display fi Temperature y m Output Max Min Output Measurement Y Failsafe Application Switch Triggers Mode or y Low fo High 50 Last Calibration Date January 1 1996 OK Cancel Apply Help Figure I 12 Sample 870ITEC App1 Tab Screen Field Entry Display Custom Units y Custom Blank Not Custom Primary Units If not Custom select uS em mS cm or If Custom select g l ppm oz gal ppt S m or NONE Temp Compensation Select from menu of choices Primary Scale Select from menu of choices Full Scale Enter value up to full scal
25. Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring Select mA Output from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output Set the Step Size 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown on the screen display Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 When finished select Continue 9 The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurement m Calibration Ea This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by setting the adjustment amount and pressing the Apply button When finished press Continue Calibrate 4m Output Step Size 0 5 H m C 20m4 Output Cumulative Change O m Apply Cancel Help Figure E 2 Sample IMT25 mA Calibration Screen FoxCom Device HART Device The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration on a HART device is 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output 1
26. Temperature Fail Strategy External Zero m Output Fail Safe Fail C Disable C Up Scale C Continue Enable Down Scale Cancel Apply Help Figure A 11 Sample Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen HART Device Field Entry Measurement 1 Units Select from menu of pressure units Lower Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 4 mA Must be 0 if M1 or M2 is in Square Root mode Upper Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 20 mA Mode Select Linear Square Root Cutoff lt 1 or Square Root Linear lt 4 Measurement 2 Units Select from menu of pressure units Mode Select Linear Square Root Cutoff lt 1 or Square Root Linear lt 4 Digital Offset Span Enter Span or Offset Span on screen provided Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters Field Entry Damping Select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds Temperature Fail Strategy Select Fail or Continue External Zero Not Applicable mA Output Fail Safe Select Down Scale or Up Scale MI 024 495 October 2010 85 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters Database Report Table 14 Sample Database Report
27. The automatic generation of such files is only possible when the tag number can be used as a valid filename It should not contain special characters such as V P or To import the audit trail information into other programs select the appropriate ASCII import function within the other program Example for Microsoft Excel Software In Microsoft Excel choose File gt Open For the file type select Text Files to list all files and select the desired file with the ending _ADT txt The Excel Import Assistant guides you through the definition of the import format 1 Start the import with line number 1 2 The fields are separated by tabs 3 Select General for all columns 4 Import the file It is now possible to use the Excel functions for example sorting and store this file in the Excel format The imported information is displayed in several columns The first row shows the headings for each column For each parameter written to the device you have an additional row The first column contains the date and time when the change occurred The second column shows the 27 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation unique identifier of each parameter within a device The third column shows the parameter description The last column contains the parameter value The value might be a real integer date string and so forth Example for Microsoft Access Software In Microsoft Access open your database Choose Fil
28. User Defines up to nine user applications to add to User menu Save as Default Saves the current configuration as the default template for File gt New Change Security Level Provides password access 44 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 7 Device Top Level Menu Description of Functions Continued Top Level Menu Pick Submenu Pick Description Window New window Opens another window for the active document Cascade Arranges windows so they overlap Tile Arranges windows as nonoverlapping tiles Arrange icons Arranges icons at the bottom of the window Help Index Lists Help topics Using Help Displays instructions about how to use Help About Displays the software version number of the configurator Workshop Environment Workshop Environment enables faster communication with optimized timing It is accessed via the File menu from the device top level menu Do not use this function when the PC20 is connected in parallel to another configurator or to an I A Series FBM If you have communication problems while using this function switch it off by selecting the menu item again Trend Dialog Box Trend dialog box is accessed via the View menu from the device top level menu The Trend dialog box displays important measurement data of a device The measurement data are dynamically retrieved from the device and displayed The trending is only active as long as
29. Yes Yes If battery powered PC turn on the Yes Yes ac power to computer Repeat Step 2 Do both LEDs illuminate Is there at least 200 2 between the power supply and where the cable attaches to the loop wiring See Note 2 Is there more than Add at least 200 2 350 2 between to loop wiring at the device and power supply where the cable Repeat Step 2 attaches to the loop Do you get the wiring same messages Move leads to acceptable position Repeat Step 2 Do Corrected you still get the same messages See Note 1 Do you still get Repeat Step 3 Do the same messages both LEDs illuminate shown in Step 1 Attach Foxboro HHT to Is voltage at device No Yes No the cable connections Yes field terminals at Can you communicate least 16 V dc Does other device mouse f Fault Corrected with the device etc attached to the same Ni No 2 Yes No COM port work correctly Fix computer Is there continuity on both No ove ee ee xand Do you have an optional Foxboro power P i supply attached to the modem See Note 3 No Yes No Yes i Is there continuity on both Replace i ees ne i leads of cable and mini box and or ls power converter plugged still get fs sam a ha grabbers converter into live 120 V ac outlet g ges Yes Is red lead of cable pe No attached to terminal Yes Replace Replace cable of device black to modem or minigrabbers Yes No Switch leads
30. FoxCom Devices cccooccconncnconcnnnoncnncancnncnncnncnncnnons 130 Transmitter Status Error Messages HART Devices coconooccconnononncnnnononacnncnncnnanacnn canon 132 sample Database Repon e ds se Ulli 144 Status Error Messages a A A A Sas i 148 Dissnostie Error Wlessases A A A ota 149 Sample Database Report ia in o ds 161 Status Error Messages crisi ia is 164 Diagnostic Error Messages ini ii it ii 165 sample Database Report nr ies 176 Status Error Messages ii ai 180 Diagnostic Error Messages ito ii a tan 181 Sample Database Report ic la 191 Transmitter Status Error ea AR 194 Sample Database Report sinio nE a aR O a EE 207 Transmitter Status Error Messages esssessseeseesrsreereresrssrsrreresenresrestertnsrsresresenresreseeest 214 Sample Database ep denise dao eos SSE 227 Field Device Status Error Messages veritat 233 Sample Database Reports dd as 253 HART Transmitter Status iaa 263 Device Specific Transmitter Status ete 264 Transmitter Status Error Messages esesesseeseessesreersreerssrerrereserrestesterensrsresresesresreseerese 286 xix MI 024 495 October 2010 Tables 45 46 47 48 XX Sample Database Report cc cated e ea bo ete led eL 299 Universal Commands traido A AA di 310 Common a Oe 311 Transmitter Status Error Messages 2 5 is lt cges sts severaavcesasioascgsundenseabnaptersuasssaesorseusereetaesvayess 313 Sample Database Report iii id ta 324 Preface This manual on the Intelligent Field D
31. If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Indicates an active See diagnostic error message to determine problem and Error diagnostic error corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the Status Error secondary status screen display Secondary Status Fields Tube The tube is partially Check flowmeter and process conditions Cycle power Imbalance filled and cannot run to transmitter Tube Failure There is a tube failure Check flowmeter and process conditions Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Received a bad message problem contact the CSC Flow Alarm Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions a flowmeter alarm condition Density Alarm Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions a flowmeter alarm condition Temperature Indicates presence of Check flowmeter and process conditions Alarm a flowmeter alarm condition 148 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Diagnostic Error Messages Table 27 Diagnostic Error Messages Code Error Message Recommended Action 02 ROM Checksum Error Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while viewing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persi
32. Level fao 00 kg m3 Hysteresis 5 0000 Cancel Aol Help Figure F 8 Sample CFT10 Alarms Tab Screen Field Entry Alarm 1 Type Select Preset Off Preset On Mass Flow High Mass Flow Low Density High Density Low Temp High Temp Low Volume Flow High Volume Flow Low Solids High Solids Low Pulse Overrun or Fault Only Alarm on Faults Enable Blank Disable Power Select to power alarm contact on alarm or when no alarm exists Level Enter value if Alarm Type is Mass Flow High Mass Flow Low Density High Density Low Temp High Temp Low Volume Flow High Volume Flow Low Solids High or Solids Low Hysteresis Enter value if Alarm Type is Mass Flow High Mass Flow Low Density High Density Low Temp High Temp Low Volume Flow High Volume Flow Low Solids High or Solids Low Alarm 2 Similar to Alarm 1 158 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters Solids Configuration Tab Screen CFT Device Configuration Ed Identifier Units Pulse Output m Mode Alarms Solids Configuration Flow tube Parameters r Component 4 Tag Density Thermal Expansion fo kg m3 Thermal Expansion fo kg m3 r Component B COMP A Tag COMP B 800 kg m3 Density fi 200 kg m3 m Mode Settings Solids Mass Flow Volume Flow Total General Settings Z amp by Mass Flow Direction Fowad iy Comms Slug Time feo
33. New Password Confirm Password EE E Apply Password Cancel Apply Help Figure 12 Sample Password Security Options Screen 31 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 32 PC20 Security Protection Each time PC20 is started you are asked for the security level and the password for this level PC20 also allows you to switch off the password protection If you do not want the password dialog box at startup select the menu item Options gt Settings gt Startup Options see Startup Options below IFDC Security Protection on I A Series Platforms The security concept for IFDC is based on the I A Series security concept The standard I A Series system provides security access privilege through configuration of environments These environments provide security on a per application basis providing the plant with controlled access to these environments These environments are password protected and configured by the user At startup IFDC checks the access level settings from the FoxView Display Manager access lock information FoxView sets a string variable named lt dmname gt ACL length 255 to reflect the current state of the FoxView access lock information lt dmname gt stands for the name of the Display Manager This string variable is only set by FoxView not by the Display Manager If you use the Display Manager and need that variable to be set you must set it in the respective environment In a configurati
34. Operation and Maintenance 131GP 132AP EMP 0510 A 133DP EMP 0530 A 134FP EML 2510 A 134LD EML 0510 A 134LVD EML1510 A MI 024 495 October 2010 1 Introduction Table 3 Reference Documents Continued Device Type Description Instruction 140 Series Pressure and Level Installation Configuration Operation and Transmitters Maintenance 141GP 142AP EMP 0610 A 143DP EMP 0630 A 144FP EML 2610 A 144LD EML 0610 A 144LVD EML 1610 A 2 Installation PC20 Hardware Installation warning The FoxCom and HART modems shipped with the PC20 are not intrinsically safe and should not be connected directly to an intrinsically safe circuit It is permissible to connect these modems to the safe side of an intrinsically safe barrier The HHT FoxCom protocol or Model 275 HART protocol hand held configurator used in an area for which it is certified can be connected to an intrinsically safe circuit for which it is rated The MOD991 modem used with the PC20 in a safe area can be connected to intrinsically safe circuits for which it is rated CAUTION EEEa You can potentially damage an SRD991 Intelligent Positioner by attaching a dc power supply to its 4 to 20 mA input terminals Refer to MI EVE 0105 for detailed wiring connections NOTE LH HSH AA K All hardware used with the PC10 configurator can be used with the PC20 Just load the PC20 software into your person
35. Process Temp Low Process temperature below lower flowmeter limit Adjust process temperature 385 Process Temp High Process temperature exceeds upper flowmeter limit Adjust process temperature 386 Process Dens Low Process density below lower flowmeter limit Adjust process density 387 Process Dens High Process density exceeds upper flowmeter limit Adjust process density 388 Flow Over Rev Lim Flow exceeds calibration limit in the reverse direction Adjust process or calibration limit as required 389 Flow Over Fwd Lim Flow exceeds calibration limit in the forward direction Adjust process or calibration limit as required 166 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an CFT15 Mass Flowmeter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurators ReZero Transmitter Startup Zero Zero Total ReZero Transmitter This function permits you to reset the zero point for the transmitter at zero flow conditions To set the zero on initial installation of your transmitter see Startup Zero on page 168 The transmitter samples 300 flow readings during the procedure Prior to beginning the procedure connect the transmitter to the flowtube and fill the flowtube with the fluid to be measured Then flush out the flowtube for approximately five minutes to eliminate air in th
36. Temp Comp Temp 12 1 Temp Comp Val 9 2 Temp Comp Val 12 1 Temp Comp Temp 13 1 Temp Comp Temp 10 2 Temp Comp Val 10 2 Temp Comp Val 13 1 Temp Comp Temp 11 2 Temp Comp Temp 14 1 Temp Comp Val 14 1 Temp Comp Val 11 2 Temp Comp Temp 12 2 Temp Comp Temp 15 1 Temp Comp Val 12 2 Temp Comp Val 15 1 Temp Comp Temp 16 1 Temp Comp Temp 13 2 Temp Comp Val 13 2 Temp Comp Val 16 1 Temp Comp Temp 14 2 Temp Comp Temp 17 1 Temp Comp Val 17 1 Temp Comp Val 14 2 Temp Comp Temp 15 2 ojojojo o ojo OoO O OJO O OJO O OJO O O OJO JO O O ojojojo o o joO O O O OJO O O O OJO O OOOO O O OJO JO O OOOO O O JOJO O Temp Comp Temp 18 1 Temp Comp Val 15 2 0 Temp Comp Val 18 1 Temp Comp Temp 16 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 19 1 Temp Comp Val 16 2 0 Temp Comp Val 19 1 Temp Comp Temp 17 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 20 1 Temp Comp Val 17 2 0 Temp Comp Val 20 1 Temp Comp Temp 18 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 21 1 Temp Comp Val 18 2 0 Temp Comp Val 21 1 Temp Comp Temp 19 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 1 2 Temp Comp Val 19 2 0 Temp Comp Val 1 2 Temp Comp Temp 20 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 2 2 Temp Comp Val 20 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 21 2 Temp Comp Val 18 3 0 Temp Comp Val 21 2 Temp Comp Temp 19 3 0 Temp Comp Temp 1 3 Temp Comp Val 19 3 0 Temp Comp Val 1 3 Temp Comp Temp 20 3 0 Temp Comp Temp 2 3 Temp Comp Val 20 3 0 Temp Comp Val 2 3 Te
37. and clone databases Capability to upload and download device databases Capability to print out device databases User configurable measurement data graphical trend display PC20 only Both the PC20 and IFDC are functionally equivalent but there are a few differences regarding the features and use as shown in Table 1 Table 1 PC20 and IFDC Feature and Use Differences Subject PC20 IFDC Support for FoxCom protocol devices See Field Device See Field Device Restrictions Restrictions on page 7 on page 7 Support for Foxboro HART devices _ Yes Yes Support for non Foxboro HART devices Yes Yes universal and common practice commands MI 024 495 October 2010 1 Introduction Table 1 PC20 and IFDC Feature and Use Differences Continued Subject PC20 IFDC Trending display Yes No use the I A Series system trending package Modem External modem attaches Integral in the Intelligent to serial port of PC FBM Attachment to field device Clip wires onto leads Automatic connection through the Intelligent FBMs 18 39 43 44 46 243 246 214 215 216 218 Field Devices Supported The configurators support the devices shown in Table 2 Table 2 Devices Supported Version Protocol Devices Supported PC20 FoxCom HART Pressure 140 820 860 and I A Series system Pressure Temperature RTT10 RTT20 and T120 Se
38. are part of the user database and will be downloaded Therefore when you open a PC10 database file in PC20 you can only download the user database which does not contain the calibration information But once you have downloaded that PC10 file using PC20 you can just resave the device database back to the file and it then includes any specific calibration information previously stored in the device CAUTION a A A The PC10 database format will no longer be supported after IFDC PC20 Rev 2 2 Please resave all device database files with the IFDC PC20 Rev 2 2 release HART Model 275 Hand Held Configurator to PC20 FDC All database files created with a HART Model 275 hand held configurator are not compatible with PC20 IFDC HHT to PC20 There is a database file transfer function in PC10 that allows direct upload of databases from a HHT when the HHT and PC10 are physically connected to each other That function is not implemented in PC20 PC20 to PC10 ABO991 The Windows based PC20 database files are not backward compatible with the older MS DOS based PC10 and ABO991 software 23 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Import Export PC20 Database Files to Popular Database Software Programs IFDC PC20 has an Import Export function to exchange database files with popular database software programs See more details about the Import Export format in ASCII Format for Import and Export on page 48 Device Outpu
39. reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 202 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Sensor Tab Screen BE 870EC1 Figure I 9 Sample 870ITEC Sensor Tab Screen Field Entry Sensor Configuration Applications Number of applications to be configured Select 1 2 or 3 applications Application Select Select 1 2 3 or AUTO Sensor Type Select type of sensor from menu of choices Cell Factor If sensor type is OTHER specify cell factor between 00 00 and 99 99 Outputs mA Output Mode Select Digital or 4 20 mA Damping Select damping response time of 1 5 10 20 40 or 120 seconds 203 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Measurement Tab Screen E 870EC1 OL Identifier Sensor Measurement Mise App 1 Temperature Units Celsius 25 E Fahrenheit Failure Value Automatic C Manual gt Mode Temperature Sensor 1000 ohm 2 wire y Manual Temperature 25 E Stability Time Measurement Stabilitity J Measurement Stabilitity Active Stability Variant j Temperature Stabilitity J Temperature Stabilitity Active Stability Time 3 4 St
40. y Solution Value fo Range 0 00 to 9999 00 Calibrator s Initials aw Calibrated Date 09 12 2001 Cancel Continue Help __ Cancel te Figure M 2 Sample 870ITCR Solution 1 Point Offset Screen Enter the solution value and the calibrator s initials and select Continue Wait while the device is reinitializing Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Solution 1 Point Span This option permits you to set a calibration point 1 point span for up to three applications This is usually done to correct for a cell factor change due to installation It should be used only if you have previously performed a 2 point calibration The point selected should be at the high end of the measurement range 1 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the Configuration function See page 295 Select Solution 1 Point Span from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 289 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters 290 a es One Point Span Calibration Application 1 y Figure M 3 Sample 870ITCR Solution 1 Point Span Screen Enter the solution value and the calibrator s in
41. 0 10 Figure L 10 Sample Raw Input Value Screen Return from Fail Safe State This function clears a latched fail safe state and returns the device to normal measurements and corresponding analog output if the reason for the fail safe state is corrected It is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu It is only present if Reset Failsafe was configured as Manual Reset Change Flag This function clears the Configuration Changed flag and the historical status information of the device It is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu Master Reset The execution of this function causes the transmitter to do a master reset This takes about four seconds During this time the device is not able to respond to any command until the execution is 265 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters complete and the transmitter latches the output on the last value The Master Reset function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu Write Protect This function enables or disables write protection for the transmitter If Write Protect is enabled the transmitter is write protected and the inadvertent changing of transmitter configuration data is prevented Configuration The Configuration function is accessed via the Edit menu from the device top level menu or from the Configuration icon on the device toolbar NOTE Whenever you change an
42. 01 Continue Help Figure L 21 Sample ReZero Calibration Screen Point Calibration This function enables you to calibrate the transmitter to your standards by applying reference values to the input NOTE Calibration of the lower point does not affect span Calibration of the upper point does not affect zero 279 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Point Calibration Ed Lower User Calibration Point will be calibrated with the entered value if you press Apply If you want to leave or skip the calibration point press Continue If you want to abort the calibration press Cancel Point s to Calibrate IV lower FT upper Apply mbar Upper Calibration Point mbar Lower Calibration Point 0 00 0 01 Measurement mbar Cancel Continue Help emea _ Ho Figure L 22 Sample Point Calibration Screen Select Point Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue To calibrate the lower point under Point to Calibrate select lower Apply the lower calibration point pressure to the input P A A a When the displayed measurement is stable enter your desired lower calibration point and select Apply 6 To calibrate the upper point perform Steps 3 through 5 applying the upper calibration point pressure and entering the upper calibration point 7
43. 024 495 October 2010 File Management It is strongly recommended that you save each device database to a file When you save the device database the default filename uses the first eight characters from the tag number of the device You may modify your database filename by using up to 256 characters which constitutes a long filename in Windows based operating systems Every time a device database is modified by using any of the configuration tools PC10 PC20 HHT ABO991 M275 and integral pushbuttons the new database should be saved When it is saved using the default first eight characters from the device tag number the old database file is overwritten by the new file If you want to save the old database file configurations you have to change the filename One suggestion would be to add the date of the database change to the electronic filename to aid tracking down the latest file File Location for PC20 When the software is installed the default location for all of the database files is C Program Files Foxboro lFDC Data This location is the default storage location unless modified during the installation of PC20 software To help locate various devices by instrument type rather than just by tag number you may want to add subdirectories to the default location such as Pressure Flow Level Electrochem Positioners Also if the plant has both FoxCom and HART devices you may want to add subdirectories of HART and FoxC
44. 09 Chem Comp Temp 17 3 Timeout 600 Chem Comp Val 17 3 Minor Passcode 800 Chem Comp Temp 18 3 Major Passcode 800 Chem Comp Val 18 3 Number Applications 02 Chem Comp Temp 19 3 Trigger 1 High 99 Chem Comp Val 19 3 Trigger 2 Low 0 Chem Comp Temp 20 3 Trigger 2 High 1000 Chem Comp Val 20 3 Trigger 3 Low 0 Chem Comp Temp 21 3 Hold Configuration 80 Chem Comp Val 21 3 mA Hold Value 0 3749999 210 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Table 36 Sample Database Report Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Analog Output 1 01 Meas 1 Hold Value 200 Analog Output 2 01 Temp Hold Value 0 Analog Output 3 01 Absolute Hold Value 999 Lower Range Value 1 90 Cal Name App 1 GTF Lower Range Value 2 0 Cal Name App 2 STD Lower Range Value 3 0 Cal Name App 3 GTF Upper Range Value 1 99 Cal Date 1 4 16 98 Upper Range Value 2 25 Cal Date 2 12 4 97 Upper Range Value 3 25 Cal Date 3 4 16 98 Output Failsafe 1 00 Sales Order Number 95F0000000010001 Output Failsafe 2 00 MS Code 870ITEC Output Failsafe 3 00 Software Version 53 56 4e 5f Output mA 1 0 0125 Low Meas Cal 1 0 Output mA 2 0 0125 Low Meas Cal 2 10 Low Meas Cal 3 25 K Ref Resistance 1958 983 High Meas Cal 1 95 TCAL1 25 High Meas Cal 2 25 Thermistor Cal 1 100722 High Meas Cal 3 35 Thermistor
45. 1000 2000 5000 or Frequency 10000 Hz Total Max If Pulse Total mode select Total Max Frequency of 10 or 100 Hz Frequency Alarms Tab Screen IMT25 Device Configuration Ea Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer For All Alarms m laining Enabled I Bink On Alm IV Clear Alarms Automatically Rate Output Response Go Downscale y Alarm Display Definition T High Flow Rate Set Point 200 0 GPM Deadband 10 0 GPM T Low Flow Rate Set Point 5 0 GPM Deadband 1 0 GPM High Forward Total 1 Set Point 31519526 g pai Turn On All I High Forward Total2 Set Point 42159372 Empty Pipe Turn Off All Cancel Apply Help Figure E 7 Sample IMT25 Alarms Tab Screen Field Entry For All Alarms Alarming Enabled J On Blank Off Clear Alarms Automatically y Auto Blank Manual Blink On Alarm y Blink Blank Don t Blink Rate Output Response Select No effect Go Downscale or Go Upscale Alarm Display Definition High Flow Rate On Blank Off If On enter Set Point and Deadband Low Flow Rate On Blank Off If On enter Set Point and Deadband 140 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry High Forward Total 1 y On Blank Off If On enter Set Point High Forward Total 2 y On Blank Off If On enter
46. 165 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters Table 30 Diagnostic Error Messages Continued Code Error Message Recommended Action 25B Cur Brd Temp High The current PWA temperature is too high Measurements are invalid Relocate the transmitter or adjust the temperature 2BC Sensor Stalled Signal received from flowtube sensors is below minimum required level Measurement invalid Contact the CSC 2BD Tube Imbalance An imbalance has been detected between sensors in the flowtube Transmitter switches off line All measurement stops Contact the CSC 2BE IPL Comms Failure Contact the CSC 320 RTD Meas Below Min Resistance for temperature measurement is below minimum required Measurements invalid Contact the CSC 321 RTD Meas Above Max Resistance for temperature measurement is above maximum allowed Measurements invalid Contact the CSC 322 Osc Freq High Flowtube driving oscillator frequency is above the maximum allowed Measurements invalid Contact the CSC 323 Osc Freq Low Flowtube driving oscillator frequency is below the minimum required Measurements invalid Contact the CSC 324 Phase Diff High Excessive signal phase difference between sensors Flow measurement and total invalid Confirm that mass flow rate does not exceed maximum mass flow rate of flowtube Contact the CSC 384
47. 1l Point Span Screen co cda 290 Sample 870ITCR Solution 2 Point Calibration Sere 291 Sample 870ITCR Temperature Calibratio dt 292 Sample 8701TCRmA Calibration Sorted iaa 293 Sample 870ITCR Identifier Tab Sere sd 294 Sample 870FICR Sensor Tab reas ennan aaia a AT S 295 Sample 870I TCR Measurement Tab Screen 296 Sample 870I TCR Misc Tab Sereen ress caskets da o cdo nod 297 Sample 870ITCR Appl Tab Serenata dtiia 298 Sample Non Foxboro Device Data Screen nidad 305 Sample Non Foxboro Identifier Tab Screen iii datada 306 Figures N 3 N 4 N 5 N 6 O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 0 7 O 8 0 9 MI 024 495 October 2010 Generic HART Input Screenin a a 307 Sample Non Foxboro Output Tab creen sees cides ee eas sii 308 Generic HART Scree sr Ai A An taonkenteasjudvesontiates 309 Generic HART Commands Dialog Box to Execute Universal and Common Practice Commands 310 Sample IM 196 Device Data rai tios 313 Sample IMT96 mA Calibration Screen sendas candela 316 Sample IMT96 Reset Totals Screen ur dd 317 Sample IMT96 Identifier Tab idad 318 Sample IMT96 Flow Tab Screen cid 319 Sample IMT96 Alarms Tab Soren tad 320 Sample IMT96 Contacts Tab Screen ante tiiicdndnauauainus ieee 321 Sample IMT96 Options Tab Sere em ra ta 322 Sample IMT96 Display Totalizer Tab Screen sde 323 xvil MI 024 495 October 2010 Figures xviii Tables 0 DOM AKRON hn BD BR BR BR G amp G YY YY Y Y Y Y Y YY NHN NH NN NHN NNN DWD mp pl pl pl pa WNR TOON D
48. 2 Wire Dual Calculation For 2 Wire Dual RTD select Redundant Average or Difference Lower Range Limit Shows value of Lower Range Limit of transmitter Upper Range Limit Shows value of Upper Range Limit of transmitter Lower Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 4 mA Upper Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 20 mA Measurement Units Select from menu of units Secondary Measurement Units Select from menu of units Cold Junction Configuration For thermocouples select Internal Sensor External Sensor Fixed Value or Disabled Cold Junction Fixed Value If fixed value enter value 113 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters Options Tab Screen FoxCom Device R RTT20 1 FoxCom Identifier Input Options Display Output Mode Analog 4 20 Digital Analog Output Failsafe M Failsafe On Range 3 6 3 8 Downscale 20 75 23 0 Upscale Value 21 DODO IV Fault Detection On D amping oo seconds Sensor Validation 0 5000 Intelligent Smoothing fi 0 0000 m Power Supply Frequency Filter C 50 Hz Standard 60Hz C High Speed Cancel Apply Help Figure C 11 Sample RTT20 Options Tab Screen FoxCom Device Field Entry Output Mode Select Analog 4 20 mA or Digital Fault Detection On J On Blank
49. 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply 6 Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown in the screen Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 96 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Configuration Identifier Tab Screen RTT Device Configuration Figure B 7 Sample RTT10 Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 97 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters Transmitter Parameters Tab Screen RTT Device Configuration x Identifier Transmitter Parameters Measurement Units ae Lower Range Value 200 00 Upper Range Value 250 00 Lower Range Limit 200 00 fustom Upper Range Limit 850 00 Sensor Configuration Input Type Input Mode Wi
50. 5 and select Apply Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown on the screen display Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 When finished select Continue The screen then displays the adjustment To accept this change select Continue Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic control mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurement Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by setting the adjustment amount and pressing the Apply button When finished press Continue Calibrate J Am Output Step Size 0 5 3 m C 20m4 Output Cumulative Change 0 m Apply Cancel Help Figure H 6 Sample Vortex mA Calibration Screen FoxCom Device HART Device The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration on a HART device is l oe ee eS aS eS 10 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output Enter the value from the mA meter in the Measured Value field on your screen and select Apply Repeat Step 4 until the Measured Value equals the value on the meter Select 20 mA Output Repeat
51. 85 C The device temperature was outside the range of 40 C and 85 C Check device or the temperature of the environment Sensor Open or Short The resistance of the sensor is greater or less than the expected resistance Check sensor Refer to the Func tional Test in MI EMT 0111 A PV out of Sensor Limit or Bad PV was not between 110 of nominal range Check measurement input PROM Checksum Error The PROM may be damaged Replace transmitter EPROM Failed The EEPROM may be damaged Replace transmitter Redundant Sensor Sensor 1 failed Check sensor Failed Transmitter Failed Electronics may be damaged Replace the basic transmitter Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an RTT20 transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurators N Point Calibration Custom Input Curve ReRange mA Calibration Restore Factory mA ReZero Transmitter for HART device with RTD sensor only 103 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters 104 N Point Calibration This function enables you to perform a 1 2 3 or 5 Point Calibration The differences are explained below 1 Point Calibration The RTT20 permits you to select any temperature within the configured range that is of particular interest to you You are not required to use the LRV as the calibration point The net effect is th
52. ATC Open Compensation Range mA Range Measurement Range Enable All Enables all messages listed above Disable All Disables all messages listed above Local Display Major Passcode Enter 4 digit passcode Minor Passcode Enter 4 digit passcode Display Timeout Enter timeout between 0 and 999 seconds 297 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Application Tab Screen 870CR Transmitter Configuration x Identifier Sensor Measurement Misc App 1 r Display T Custom Units Primary Units Table Temp Compensation Absolute v ae Primary Scale 5000 y FullScaleLimit 9999 Full Scale 893 3000 Secondary Display Temp Linear 1 0000 Absolute 7 m Output Failsafe Application Switch Triggers Output Measurement y n Mode or y Low 0 0000 Max 0 2000 Min 0 0000 Value 2 8000 High 8 3330 Last Calibration Date January 1 1996 Cancel Apply Help Figure M 11 Sample 870ITCR App1 Tab Screen Field Entry Display Custom Units y Custom Blank Not Custom Primary Units If not Custom select from menu of choices If Custom select g l ppm oz gal ppt or None Temp Compensation Select from menu of choices Primary Scale Select from menu of choices Full Scale Enter value up to full scale limit Temp Linear Enter value from 0 to 100 Secondar
53. Buffer 3 Val 8 219 3 Chem Compens Abs 21 0 Buffer 3 Temp 9 0 Chem Compens New 21 227 Buffer 3 Val 9 219 3 Buffer 1 Size 02 Buffer 3 Temp 10 0 Buffer 1 Temp 1 0 Buffer 3 Val 10 219 3 Buffer 1 Val 1 219 29 Buffer 3 Temp 11 0 Buffer 1 Temp 2 0 Buffer 3 Val 11 219 29 Buffer 1 Val 2 219 29 Measurement Mapping 01 01 02 03 Buffer 1 Temp 3 0 Database Change Flag 72 Buffer 1 Val 3 219 29 Kernal Major Rev 00 Buffer 1 Temp 4 0 Kernal Minor Rev 04 Buffer 1 Val 4 219 29 SREVMAJ 01 Buffer 1 Temp 5 0 SREVMIN 01 Buffer 1 Val 5 219 3 Display Major Rev 00 Buffer 1 Temp 6 0 Display Minor Rev 00 Buffer 1 Val 6 219 3 Parameter Tbl Offset c9 Buffer 1 Temp 7 0 Parameter Table CRC 1f dd Buffer 1 Val 7 219 3 Parameter Table Type 00 Buffer 1 Temp 8 0 Parameter Table Size 00 dd Buffer 1 Val 8 219 3 Reserved 00 00 00 Buffer 1 Temp 9 0 Calibration Req d 00 Buffer 1 Val 9 219 29 Drive 0 Amp Offset 0 Buffer 1 Temp 10 0 Custom Table X Y Rd 60093 Buffer 1 Val 10 219 29 Meas 0 Amp Offset 0 Buffer 1 Temp 11 0 Meas 90 Amp Offset 0 Buffer 1 Val 11 219 29 Eng Units Name pH F Buffer 2 Size 02 Freq Conv Factor 500000 mA Correction 1 2 mA Correction 2 2 mA Correction 3 2 229 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP SE Transmitters Table 38 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value CMCL 0 CMCH 0 REV_INFO be IGN2 8 16 02 Sensor Minor Rev 14 Sensor
54. Continue again to reset the transmitter total measurement to zero 182 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 4 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic control mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Set Low Flow Cut In This function permits you to set the low flow cut in level for the transmitter You can also set a manual low flow cut in level To execute the operation use the following procedure 1 Select Low Flow Cut In from the Calibration menu or the Low Flow Cut In icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual control mode and select Continue 3 For a FoxCom device select the desired Low Flow Cut In value or select Automatic to set low flow cut in to lowest setting with no false signal detected under no flow conditions Select Continue when done For a HART device select Increment or Decrement to obtain the desired Low Flow Cut In value or select Automatic to set low flow cut in to lowest setting with no false signal detected under no flow conditions Select Continue when done NOTE Before selecting Automatic it is important that flow be stopped Low Flow Cut In Selection Ea Select the desired Low Flow Cut in value If the Automatic button is pressed the transmitter will select the optimum value and it will be displayed Press CONTINUE when done Low Flow Cutln 10 7033 x Cancel Continue Help
55. Current Database Values to Device Values Bej x Parameter Description Current Values Connected Device Tag Number RIT20R3 i Tag No Tag Name Device Name Geo Location Sensor Number Upper Range Limit Lower Range Limit Sensor Validation Failsafe Failsafe Value Local Indic Keys Local Indic Lang Local Indic Disp Output Mode Measurement Units Intel Smoothing Sensor Type Damping URY Figure 19 Sample Compare Screen The Compare function may be used as shown in Table 8 Table 8 Compare Function Possibilities Compare Compare Active Database Device Connection Status Against File Against Device Preconfiguration file open only No device connected Yes No Connected device uploaded database edited or unedited device Yes Yes connected Preconfiguration file open and device connected same type Yes No Existing database on file opened and device connected Yes No Comments Function The Comments function allows you to record comments regarding your device configuration You can use it to add comments to the data file view comments already written or copy the 50 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 comments to another data file The Comments function is accessed via the Edit menu from the device top level menu The Add Comments screen is shown in Figure 20 NOTE Comments are stored in the IFDC PC20 database file and are not stored in the device s memory Add Comment
56. E RE A E 239 SEE SEO last data aeS a E AE ET EESTE da 240 A A Sas T AA E A T 240 Reset Counters anini anaana a a a a a e A AA 240 Reboot Devices TAE 240 Write Protectii cenne AS 240 Cl E RERNE 241 Identifier Tab Screen cu ti 241 Parameters Tab Sereen capo ada 242 Cono lab A es 243 Characterization Va ds e e aseo 244 O ct ta cnet eget ck Meets ose 2 Ee a Santo ae a Ra aaa 245 Alarms I aby Scr cern e ac id de 246 BIN FeV Tab A O oR P TT ot Aa tat EP Tae 247 Pressure Mea bos Creer o do Wiel te ALO os 248 Options Tab Sa ld ao ded 249 Bin Ln Tab SEE os 250 Bin O t Tab Sereen nta asa 251 Profibus Function Block Tab Screen iii 252 Database Reporta a A E a 253 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters sseesssessresseesrsrsesesseeessereseses 257 Contents MI 024 495 October 2010 140 Series with FoxCom Protocol and with I A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitter Compatibility dci teria 257 How to Change the 140 Series Compatibility Type seesseesssessssesesssessrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsesrsesesesees 259 140 Series with FoxCom or HART Protocol is ia 262 Device Data S reeny SAA 262 Device EAU adria 263 Di e e e 264 Raw Input Value A O O 265 Return from Fail Safe State sl tias 265 Reset Chanoe la O eo A 265 Master Resettcit 2 itera o O Reh o ite ON A Oss eS a tate dele eos dts 265 WY Tite PrOtECt said AAN autiooes 266 Contar A steed feet Nga cn ce SE EE oes cane EASi ESES 266 den Wah Screen settee albino tie teat a
57. Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Zero Total Calibration x Select the device total s to reset to zero Press CONTINUE once desired measurement s to reset are selected TT Net Forward and Reverse Totals Grand Total Cancel Help Figure E 4 Sample IMT25 Reset Totals Screen 4 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Pulse Preset 1 Select Pulse Preset from the Test menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Enter a value to set as the pulse rate and select Apply 4 Select Continue when done testing 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurement Reset Change Flag This function clears the Configuration Changed flag and the historical status information of the device It is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu Master Reset The execution of this function causes the transmitter to do a master reset This takes about four seconds During this time the device is not able to respond to any command until the execution is complete and the transmitter latches the output on the last value The Master Reset function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu Acknowledge Alarms This function enables you to acknowledge an alarm It is accessed via the Test menu from the devic
58. High Forward Total 2 Empty Pipe or Any Alarm Relay Operation If Relay Function is not Off select Normally Open or Normally Closed Suppress Relay If Relay Function is not Off select Yes to suppress reactivation of an alarm or No for no suppression Relay 2 Similar to Relay 1 Options Tab Screen IMT25 Device Configuration Ed Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer r Tube Identification Model Code TUBEMS Serial Number 55555 Diagnostics Rate Response Diagnostics Go Downscale y Blink On Diagnostic Error m Functional Security at the IMT25 Keypad IV Enable Passcode 1 to Protect Setup y Passcode 1 800 J Enable Passcode 2 to Protect Totals Reset Passcode 2 feoo IV Noise Reduction Line Frequency 50 y Hz M Empty Pipe Detection Empty Pipe Effect M Cancel Apply Help Figure E 9 Sample IMT25 Options Tab Screen Field Entry Tube Identification Model Code Enter model code of flowtube Serial Number Enter serial number of flowtube Diagnostics 142 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Rate Response Select Go Downscale or Go Upscale Diagnostics Blink On Diagnostic Error y Blink Blank Dont Blink Functional Security at the IMT25 Keypad not applicable to HART device Enable Passcode 1
59. Hz Y Pulse Resolution ft3 Cancel Apply Help Figure H 12 Sample Vortex Options and Piping Tab Screen HART Device Field Entry Piping Mating Select Schedule 10 Schedule 40 Schedule 80 PN16 PN40 PN64 or PN100 Configuration Select from menu of piping configurations Upstream Distance If Configuration is not Straight enter distance in pipe diameters Options Noise Rejection Select On or Off Signal Conditioning Select On or Off Failsafe If Output Mode is Analog select Downscale or Upscale Damping Select one of nine choices from No Damping through 32 seconds Scaled Pulse Output Select Off or URV 100 Hz Output Mode FoxCom Select Digital or 4 20 mA Output Mode HART Select Analog 4 20 mA or Multidrop Polling Address If Multidrop select number from 0 through 15 Pulse Resolution Select 0 01 0 1 1 0 10 0 100 0 or 1000 0 190 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Database Report Table 34 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 33 REV_INFO bd Tag Number DEFAULT IGN2 1 22 23 Tag Name TAG_NAME Sensor Minor Rev 00 Device Name DevNam Sensor Major Rev 02 Geo Location LOCATION IGN3 256 Reference Number Some serno val IGN4 150 Model Code 83F D02S1SSTNZ
60. IGN5 89 Core Number 02 Oc Core Manufact Date 2 10 97 Flow Meas Units USgpm Total Meas Units USgal Upper Range Value 232 7 Lower Range Value 0 Low Flow Cut In 2 32683 Upper Range Limit 232 683 Low Flow Cut In Set 0 Reference K Factor 258 Meas 1 Damping 0 Flow Units Slope 448 83 Total Units Slope 7 48052 Pulse Resolution 3 Meas 1 EGU Type 00 Fluid Type 00 Temperature Units 00 Flowing Temperature 70 Density Units 00 Flowing Density 62 3 Base Density 62 37 Viscosity Units 00 Fluid Viscosity 0 9753 Mating Pipe 1 Added K Fac Bias 0 Piping Configuration 00 Upstream Distance 30 Piping Bias 0 Output Mode 00 Strategy Flag 08 Scaled Pulse Output 00 Noise Rejection 01 Signal Conditioning 01 Low Flow Correction 00 Flowing K Factor 34 48958 191 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters Table 34 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Lo Freq Filter 65535 Hi Freq Filter 65535 Calibrator s Initial NOTYOU Calibration Date 7 24 98 TON Count 20 mA 33600 TON Count 4 mA 8162 Measurement Mapping 01 01 02 03 Local Disp Password VORTEX Database Change Flag 62 Kernal Major Rev 01 Kernal Minor Rev 00 SREVMAJ 01 SREVMIN 0a Display Major Rev 00 Display Minor Rev 00 Parameter Tbl Offset aa cf Parameter Table CRC 2d 94 Parameter Table Type 00 Parameter Table
61. If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Unstable Meas Unstable process Check measurement sensor connection Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 870ITEC transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurators Bench Calibration Solution 1 Point Span 195 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters 196 Solution 1 Point Offset Solution 2 Point Temperature Sensor mA Calibration Bench Calibration 1 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration function See page 203 Select Bench Calibration from the Calibration menu 3 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Bench Calibration Application 1 y Figure I 2 Sample 870ITEC Bench Calibration Screen Enter the high and low solution values and the calibrator s initials and select Continue Place the clean dry sensor in air and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating 7 Runa wire through the sensor bore and connect to a decade resistance box Adjust the box to a resistance equal to the high calibration point see 870 TEC Electrodeless Conductivity Transmitters MI 611 212 for calculation of this resistance and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration
62. If all the Measured Desired fields are 0 then the number of points must be 0 prior to exiting the Custom Input Curve screen If the number of points is not zero 2 22 and no measured desired data is entered into the fields on the Custom Input Curve screen the transmitter drives its output to whatever 0 means for that sensor The transmitter does not respond to any change in input in this condition NOTE _ _ lt _ The calibration data from any of the above calibration options is stored in the custom curve memory locations Therefore if you wish to view or change a specific data point you can enter the custom curve selection and view edit or clear all values 4 In the Measured column enter the values the RTT20 displays now in the Desired column enter the values you want displayed For example if a Measured value was 100 00 but you wanted 100 25 enter 100 00 as the Measured number and 100 25 as the Desired number Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 5 Enter the calibrator s initials and select Continue The current calibration date is automatically displayed Select Continue to save the custom curve to the RTT20 transmitter Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Press Continue to resume dynamic measurements ReRange This function enables you to rerange your device without applying inputs representin
63. Level Provides password access Help Index Lists Help topics Using Help Displays instructions about how to use Help MI Displays the instruction manual About Displays the version number 30 Settings Settings is accessed via the Options menu It provides four tab screens Directories IFD Modem Setup Password Security Options and Startup Options Directories This tab allows you to identify the location of various programs used in conjunction with the Intelligent Field Device Configurator Type in the location of the executable file for each application The FoxDoc file for Field Measurement and Control is C Acrobat3 Reader AcroRd32 exe D FOXDOC ENTRY PDF if C is the drive containing the Acrobat Reader and D is the CD ROM drive The MI file for the Intelligent Field Device Configurator is C Acrobat3 Reader AcroRd32 exe D PC20 ENTRY PDF if C is the drive containing the Acrobat Reader software and D is the CD ROM drive IFD Modem Setup Follow the instructions that appear when you select this tab Password Security Options Different security levels can be set to protect the devices from unintended changes or to restrict access to certain functions to certain qualified personnel Depending on the access level certain menu items are not available grayed out or not visible The following access levels are available None Only allows viewing and documenting device data 3 Oper
64. Low Slope Limit 80 Temp Compens Temp 13 0 Hold Configuration 01 Temp Compens Val 13 227 mA Hold Value 0 4375 Temp Compens Temp 14 0 Meas 1 Hold Value 1 Temp Compens Val 14 227 Temp Hold Value 77 Temp Compens Temp 15 0 Absolute Hold Value 77 Temp Compens Val 15 227 Enable Disable Diag 84 fO ff 7f Temp Compens Temp 16 0 Clear Diagnostics 00 00 00 00 Temp Compens Val 16 227 Core Number 00 00 Temp Compens Temp 17 0 Core Manufact Date 1 1 94 Temp Compens Val 17 226 92 Output Mode 00 Temp Compens Temp 18 0 Glass Resistance 0 Temp Compens Val 18 226 92 Reference Resistance 0 Temp Compens Temp 19 0 Low Cal Point MCL 6 972867 Temp Compens Val 19 226 92 High Cal Point MCH 6 972867 Temp Compens Temp 20 0 Low Cal Point KCL 9 744641 Temp Compens Val 20 226 92 Low Cal Point VCL 46 Temp Compens Temp 21 0 High Cal Point KCH 0 02389015 Temp Compens Val 21 227 ISE Low Cal Pt MVMCL 0 Number Chem Points 02 ISE Hi Cal Pt KPPM 1000 Chem Compens Abs 1 0 Chem Compens New 1 226 92 Buffer 2 Temp 1 0 Chem Compens Abs 2 0 Buffer 2 Val 1 219 29 Chem Compens New 2 226 92 Buffer 2 Temp 2 0 Chem Compens Abs 3 0 Buffer 2 Val 2 219 3 Chem Compens New 3 227 Buffer 2 Temp 3 0 Chem Compens Abs 4 0 Buffer 2 Val 3 219 3 Chem Compens New 4 227 Buffer 2 Temp 4 0 Chem Compens Abs 5 0 Buffer 2 Val 4 219 3 Chem Compens New 5 227 Buffer 2 Temp 5 0 Chem Compens Abs 6 0 Buffer 2 Val 5 219 3 Chem Compens New 6 227 Buffer 2 Temp 6 0 Chem Compens Abs 7 0 Buffer 2 Val 6
65. Major Rev 01 IGN3 4 IGN4 150 IGN5 dd 230 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and so forth in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators See the list of all supported Intelligent Positioners all different models and protocols in Table 2 The configurations of the different Intelligent Positioner models are very similar to each other The following description shows the configuration of the Intelligent Positioners using the SRD991 as an example If there are differences between the models and protocols it will be outlined in the description This appendix contains information on Device Data Screen Status Error Messages Calibration Configuration Database Report For additional information refer to on line Help and MI EVE0105 Device Data Screen BF Device Data HART Tag Number SAD991_H SAD991 Tag Name SAD_FCM Setpoint Online 81 47 Internal Temp 26 68 C Position 81 94 Cycle Count 70 Cycles Stem Setpt 81 48 Travel Sum 14 Strokes Control Diff 0 46 Travel Position 26 63 Analog Setpt 17 05 Figure K 1 Sample SRD991 Device Data Screen 231 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Additional Profibus Data Screen For Profibus devices an additional Da
66. Messages NOTE Before following the recommended actions listed below try to clear the error message by turning off and reapplying power to the transmitter 72 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 13 Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages Input 2 gt Up Limit Code Error Message Recommended Action 01 CPU Instruct Error Replace amplifier 02 ROM Checksum Error Replace amplifier 03 EEPROM Chksum Err Make a change to the transmitter database and download to the transmitter If this does not clear the problem replace amplifier 04 RAM Error Replace amplifier 05 Power Supply Fail Replace amplifier 06 Battery Failure Replace amplifier 07 Input Range Error See status to indicate which input is out of range and make necessary correction 08 Output I O Error Replace amplifier 09 Communication Err Replace amplifier 0A Math Error Check transmitter database and correct any problems If problem persists replace amplifier OB RealTime Clock Err Replace amplifier oC Input 1 0 Sensor input bad check sensor 0D Wrong MCU Replace amplifier OE Device Failure Replace amplifier 20 Input 1 gt Up Limit Sensor input too high check sensor 21 Transmitter temperature out of range Transmitter can be configured to continue operating and use a default temperature for measurement compensation 220
67. Normally Open or Normally Closed Suppress Relay If Relay Function is not off select Yes to suppress reactivation of an alarm or No for no suppression Relay 2 Similar to Relay 1 Options Tab Screen IMT Device Configuration x Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer Tube Identification Model Code TUBEMS Serial Number TUBES N Diagnostics Rate Response Diagnostics Go Downscale y Y Blink On Diagnostic Error Functional Security at the Device Keypad M Enable Passcode 1 to Protect Setup y Passcodet 0 TT Enable Passcode 2 to Protect Passcode 2 fp Totals Reset Y Noise Reduction Line Frequency 60 y Hz Cancel Apply Help Figure O 8 Sample IMT96 Options Tab Screen Field Entry Tube Identification Model Code Enter model code of flowtube Serial Number Enter serial number of flowtube Diagnostics 322 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Rate Response Select Go Downscale or Go Upscale Diagnostics Blink On Diagnostic Error y Blink Blank Dont Blink Functional Security at the IMT96 Keypad Enable Passcode 1 y Enable Blank Disable If Enabled select Setup Totals Reset Setup amp Totals Test Mode Test Mode amp Setup Test Mode and Totals or Test Mode Setup amp Totals Then enter 4
68. Number Message 3 Message 3 ACT SERIAL NUM Actuator ias Valve VALVE SER NUM Calibration Message 5 Maintenance M essage 4 Fab Number p 140892 Hw Rev jo Cancel Apply Help Figure K 4 Sample SRD991 Parameters Tab Screen Field Entry Messages 1 2 and 3 Enter up to three messages each up to 14 characters long Model Codes Instrument Displays the factory entered positioner model code Information Calibration Enter calibration info message 14 characters maximum Maintenance Enter maintenance message 14 characters maximum Fab Number Displays a factory entered identification number HW Rev Displays the factory entered hardware revision level Serial Number Actuator Enter actuator serial number Valve Enter valve serial number 242 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Configuration Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration Es Identifier Parameters Configuration Characterization Units Travel Alarms Tuning Pressure Setpoint Tyce EAM Tce Bg T Power Up Onine Spring Type Closes y Fail Safe Valve Stem p mm Clockw i SoN H id y Movement otary Counter Clockw Config o Position 0 0000 x Control Action High ma Actuator Action Single y E 0000 ae Direct Acting C Reverse Actin
69. ORP Transmitters MI 611 211 Leak Error Resistance between Replace sensor solution ground and the RTD is greater than infinite Amp Failure Out of range error Check sensor Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Slope Error Nernst slope of Replace electrode or solution sensor is less than user set limit Cal Slope Error A slope error has occurred Check sensor and recalibrate transmitter If the as the result of the previous calibration problem persists contact the CSC Extended Status Process mA Under Range Measurement outside Reconfigure range or correct process error mA Over Range configured range Cal Required Calibration required Calibrate Comp Under Measurement outside Reconfigure compensation or correct process error Range compensation curve Comp Over Range No A2D Interrupts Unstable Temp Unstable temperature Check ATC connection Verify process temperature measurement Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Unstable Meas Unstable process Check measurement sensor connection Select Test gt measurement Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Disp Under Range Primary measurement Check sensor connection Select Test gt Go On Line Disp over Range is too low or too high If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Cal Comp Error Indicates a problem in the
70. October 2010 The Audit Trail collects all changes done with a device during a session A session starts when IFDC PC20 connects to the device and ends when the connection is closed This collection of information is very important in tracking the history of a device It also helps to control changes during configuration It is possible to configure IFDC PC20 to generate an audit trail file at the end of each session automatically To enable IFDC PC20 to do this you need to include the following statement into the INI file foxifde INI with a text editor for example Notepad The foxifde INI file is located in the system directory C WINNT for Windows NT and Window 2000 operating systems or C Windows for Windows 95 and Windows XP operating systems On the Solaris operating system the initialization file has the path and filename foxifde ini Under Directories specify the pathname where PC20 should store the audit trail files after the keyword ADT Path Example for Windows Directories operating system ADT Path C ProgramFiles Foxboro FoxIFDC data Example for Solaris Directories operating system ADT Path temp After each session in which a parameter was written to the device and only in this case IFDC PC20 writes a file into the specified directory The filename is composed of the Tag Number the date Month Day Year and time Hour Minute Second and has the extension _ADT txt Example FT101_02 18 00_17 37 52_ADT txt
71. Off Analog Output Failsafe Failsafe On Failsafe On Blank Failsafe Off Range If Failsafe is On select 3 6 3 8 Downscale or 20 75 23 0 Upscale Value Enter value within range selected Damping Select one of nine choices from No Damping to 32 seconds Sensor Validation Enter value between 0 25 and 10 seconds Intelligent Smoothing Enter value between 0 and 30 seconds Power Supply Frequency Power Supply Filter Select 50 or 60 Hz Select Standard or High Speed 114 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 HART Device RTT Device Configuration fe Store lest Value fe Substitute y le 56 36 Dowrscale 20230 Upscale 6000 fe Auta f Manual Figure C 12 Sample RTT20 Options Tab Screen HART Device Most of the fields for a HART device are the same as for an RTT 20 FoxCom device The HART device has the following additional fields Field Entry Output Mode Select Analog or Multidrop Poll Address If Multidrop select address between 1 and 15 Analog Output Failsafe Store Last Value or Select Store Last Value for last valid value or Substitute Value Substitute Value for value specified Failsafe Reset Select Auto or Manual Write Protect Read only Y Write protection Blank No write protection 115 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters Display Tab Scree
72. Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 Intelligent Automation Device Selection vevc Find Connect Contents of CP0030 CP0030_ECB Refresh CP Compound Block Block Tag Number Cancel a CPO001 Cancel EY CP0030 E CP0030_ECB Help E amp CP0040 E CP0040_ECB 1 18CHAN1 PT863DP 1 18CHAN2 TTRTT20 Options gt gt 1 39CHAN1 UNKNOWN 1 39CHAN2 UNKNOWN 1 44CHAN1 MT325CL 1 44CHAN2 UNKNOWN 1 44CHAN3 FT102A 1 44CHAN4 UNKNOWN 1 COROO1 FT102A 8 ITVLV1 PTIDP10B VLVCH3 IV37BLDG4 9 VLVCH4 IV38BLDGA Figure 16 IFDC Device Selection Screen The IFDC Device Selection screen as shown in Figure 16 displays the tag number of the device in parenthesis after the block name of the I O channel The tag number is a device parameter and stored in the device After pressing the Refresh button in the Device Selection screen select the Control Stations in the next dialog box for which the displayed information should be refreshed After the selection of one or more Control Stations the AUtil program initializes and creates the displayed tree information for the selected stations The program uses the CSA and Object Manager services to retrieve the information about the blocks compound and block name and tag number Only I O channels and blocks allowing connection of Intelligent Field Devices supported by IFDC only certain ECB types are filtered out If a device is or was connected to the channel th
73. Report iii 56 IFDC Printing on Station with Solaris Operating System ococconcconncnnncnncnnonornnncononcnnnncnnnnss 56 Panticosa idad 56 Print A tes aa tart sacti cca tas A AA i T AA dite a hee ak 58 AAA O aided a R aie 58 IFDC Printing on Station with Windows Operating System cceeseseeserseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeee 58 Profibus Configuration PC20 only chet seate id ad 58 Profibus Master Page ii a EN E AEA TE EKAS Sa aa is 59 Profibus Slave Par ios 61 A Trouble hoola ias 65 TEDC P C20 Error Messages iniesta ananena e a a nosshusbvdativoss bist 65 Device Status Error Messiaen a aR a R iia 65 Device Diagnostic Error Messages cistitis 66 PC20 Trace Function assises A AAA AAA AAA 66 IFDC Trace Function sitios 66 PC20 Fault Analysis of Communication Failures 22 Gea acess 68 POx Om POLO el strana E E E EES 68 HART Protocol elas ds esla ee 70 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters oocooconnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnnnanonacns 71 Device Data Sereen dida ii A A A A bd a tae Wis aa A E 71 Error Mess ES A A A A 72 Status Error Mesas raise 72 Diagnostic Error Messages erstes ends 72 Calibration ic A aai Ei eda A AA 74 WRG eronata O A A a E ESEN 74 Point Calibration raso A A id ria 76 MI 024 495 October 2010 Contents RENTES A cater aca haus ad Maeno 77 FoxConi DI Viet is 77 HART Device A A aida 77 Restore Default a eel eo ed eo ae 78 mA Calibration 1 A to ica das ea ea ee 79 Procedure for a FoxCom
74. Sample IMT20 Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 124 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Transmitter Parameters IMT Tab Screen MI 024 495 October 2010 IMT20 Device Configuration Ea Identifier Transmitter Parameters IMT 1 5 inches y Flow Rate Units Usgpm y Custom Line Size Ceramic y fi 8 6000 Lining Material Meter Factor Display Meas Config Engineering Units y Display Upper Range fi 70 Flow Upper Range fi 70 0000 USgpm Upper Range Limit 170 0000 USgpm 7 Pulse Damping as seconds y Comm Baud Rate 4800 Digital y Output T Damping on PowerUp Signal Lock Alarm Enabled 2000 000 Hz Pulse Scale rie Je Pa P o Pa 05 PS EAN Cancel Help Apply Figure D 5 Sample IMT20 Transmitter Parameters IMT Tab Screen Field Entry Line Size Select nominal diameter of flowtube from menu of choices Flow Rate Units Select from menu of units or Custom If Custom enter the conve
75. Tag Name CORIOLIS METER Device Name COROO1 Location DEFAULT LOCAT Mass Flow 8278 4531 kgs Density 55 7167 kg m3 Total Measurement 907513 0000 kg Solids 4107 5029 Volumetric Flow 148912 5625 l s Temperature 39262 K m Output 1 0 50 m m Output 2 gt 0 50 m m Output 3 0 50 m Pulse Dutput 5000 00 Alarm 1 State SET Alarm 2 State SET Alarm 1 Power OFF Alarm 2 Power OFF Figure G 1 Sample CFT15 Device Data Screen MI 024 495 October 2010 Error Messages Status Error Messages Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters Table 29 Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields DeviceBusy Set if EEPROM write If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this is in progress and does not clear problem contact the CSC pending Initializing Transmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Transmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Indicates an active See diagnostic error message to determine problem and Error diagnostic error corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the Status Error secondary status screen display Secondary Status Fields
76. Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 154 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Units Tab Screen CFT Device Configuration Figure F 5 Sample CFT10 Units Tab Screen Field Entry Measurement Mass Flow Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom Density Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom Temperature Units Select R F C K or Custom Volume Flow Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom Totalization Total By Select Mass or Volume Total Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom On Slug Select Run Total or Stop Total Total Select from menu of choices 155 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters Pulse Output Tab Screen CFT Device Configuration Figure F 6 Sample CFT10 Pulse Output Tab Screen Field Entry Pulse Mode Select Mass Flow Density Temperature Total Vol Flow Solids Preset or Off Lower Range Value Enter value if Pulse mode is Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids Upper Range Value Enter value if Pulse mode is Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids Damping Select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds Pulse
77. Tag Number REV B 1 Device Type IMT96 Rev 1 03 Tag Name BLANK Device Name DevNam Location i Location Model Code IMT96 PEADB102 4 Raw Flow 205 028 Forward Total Percent Range 102 9770 Reverse Total Pulse Total Not Active Net Total m Equivalent In digital Grand Total Figure O 1 Sample IMT96 Device Data Screen Error Messages Table 47 Transmitter Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields 313 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Table 47 Transmitter Status Error Messages Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Initializing is required If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Codes to Error diagnostic error determine problem and corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the Status Error secondary status screen display Secondary Status Fields Signal Lock Off External contact is off Set by user no action required Startup Test Transmitter cannot exit its boot code Correct Diag
78. The positioner allows a digital or analog setpoint depending on the configuration of the setpoint source Go Off Line This function sets the device into the off line mode where normal control is not performed The pneumatic output is frozen to the last value of the pneumatic output before performing this function Go Local This function sets the device into the local mode Local mode is similar to on line mode where normal control is performed However the positioner does not follow the digital or analog setpoint from the I A Series system It follows the digital setpoint from the IFDC PC20 configurator 239 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Set Setpoint This function allows IFDC PC20 to specify a setpoint Activating this function automatically switches the operation mode to the local mode This gives you the capability for testing step responses and so forth Leaving this function automatically switches the operation mode to the on line mode Reset Status This function resets all current and historical status fields including the Diagnostic Status fields NOTE If an underlying problem has not been corrected the failure bits will be reasserted almost immediately Reset Counters This function resets the Cycle Count and Travel Sum parameters A CAUTION This causes the device to be taken off line for a short period which can cause a process upset Reboot
79. The 1 Point Calibration procedure allows you to establish a calibration point that may or may not be the Lower Range Value LRV The 2 Point Calibration procedure allows you to specify lower and upper calibration points that may or may not be the Lower Range LRV and Upper Range Values URV Each transmitter is calibrated at the factory to a specified range If the new range is the same as the factory range you should perform only a ReZero or a 1 Point Calibration procedure If the new range changes the span by less than a 2 to 1 ratio you should perform a ReRange If you make a large change in range turndown ratio greater than 2 you may need to perform a 2 Point Calibration to obtain optimum accuracy For all calibration procedures calibration points are read from the transmitter at the start of the procedure Also note that if the transmitter is configured for a square root output the IFDC PC20 places it in linear mode during calibration and resets it to Square Root mode at the end of the procedure NOTE Transmitters must be calibrated using forward action increasing input increases output If your transmitter has reverse output action increasing input decreases output calibrate it so that calibrated LRV desired URV and calibrated URV desired LRV Then after calibration change the LRV and URV back to the correct values On an 820 Series Transmitter if LRV pressure is negative or if URV 0 calibrate the transmitter so
80. The cumulative change is shown on the screen display 7 Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 When finished select Continue 9 The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change and save the calibration to the transmitter select Continue 79 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Procedure for a HART Device 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring 2 Select the mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by entering the Measured Value and pressing the Apply button Repeat this procedure until the Measured Value equals the value to be calibrated Press Continue to change signal and when finished Calibrate AmA Output Measured Value a mA ES Zune Wotput Apply Cancel Help Figure A 7 Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen HART Device 5 Enter the measured value and select Apply Repeat this step until the output matches the measured value Select Continue Select 20 mA Output 8 Enter the measured value and select Apply Repeat this step u
81. Tube Pipe is empty See Empty Pipe Detection in JMT25 IA Series Error Magflow Transmitters MI 021 390 Electrode Error Coil Error Unreliable measure ment of electrode voltage Unreliable measure ment of coil current Extended Status Hardware See Extended Status Hardware below See Extended Status Hardware below Coils Coil Low Transmitter unable to Check coil wiring at flowtube and transmitter Coil High generate a reliable Service is required Coil Unstable incasureiie aon Coll Cycle power If the problem persists service is required Positive Coil gas Check wiring and flowtube coil Needed Negative Coil Needed Empty Pipe Unable to Unable to calibrate Verify that piping is empty Check flowtube and Calibrate transmitter wiring EPD Calibration Failed Error during calibration Verify that EPD parameter is turned on 130 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 23 Transmitter Status Error Messages FoxCom Devices Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Electrodes Electrode Low Transmitter unable to Check signal wiring between flowtube and transmitter Electrode High generate a reliable Also see Magnetic Flow Transmitters Models IMT25 D Electrode measurement of and IMT25 T with FoxCom D or HART T C
82. Units Cutoff Sec Measured T63 Time 100 0 fi 0000 Sec Upper f 00 0000 2 Cutoff Deadband 6 0059 X C mm C Inches Cutoff 0 0 0000 Degrees Stroke Deo Cancel Apply Help Figure K 7 Sample SRD991 Travel Tab Screen Field Entry Response Time Limit Measured T63 Time Displays the time it took for the valve to travel 63 of its full stroke in 0 100 the increasing direction during Autostart Measured T63 Time Displays the time it took for the valve to travel 63 of its full stroke in 100 0 the decreasing direction during Autostart Travel Stops Lower Enter lower travel stop in percent of total stroke Upper Enter upper travel stop in percent of total stroke Cutoff Cutoff Deadband Enter the amount of hysteresis in percent of travel required above the cutoff value before the valve can reopen again For example with 2 cutoff 0 5 cutoff hysteresis allows the valve to reopen at 2 5 Cutoff Enter the value in percent of travel below which the valve is fully closed For example when set at 2 any signal below 2 is treated as 0 Travel Position Units Select mm Inches or Degrees Stroke Enter the stroke in the units specified 245 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Alarms Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration x Identifier Parameters Configuration Characte
83. Write Read Write Command Capability Command Capability Device Variables R Variable Damping W Damping W Variable Sensor ID W Range Values W Unit Tag R W SPAN W Preamplifier W ZERO W Analog Range R Reset Changed Flag W Dynamic Analog R EEPROM W Analog Output R Fixed mA W Analog Information R Self Test W Analog Damp W Reset W Analog Range W PV Zero W Analog Fixed W PV Units W Trim Analog Zero W Trim Zero W Trim Analog Gain W Trim Gain W Analog Transfer W Transfer Function W Analog Endpoint R PV Serial W Burst Variables W Dynamic Variables W Burst Command W Variable Zero W Burst Mode Enable W Variable Units W Dynamic Variables R Variable Information W Calibration The standard Calibration procedures are ReRange mA Calibration and ReZero They may or may not be accessible for your device MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix N Non Foxboro Devices Using HART Test The standard Test procedures are Device Status Set mA Pulse Output Reset Self Test and Message They may or may not be accessible for your device 312 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Device Error Messages Calibration Pulse Preset Configuration Database Report Device Data Screen E Device Data Iof x
84. action a high value increases it 98 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Damping Select one of nine choices from No Damping to 32 seconds Database Report NOTE If a parameter in the report is UNUSED the corresponding value shown has no meaning for that device Table 16 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 31 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tag Number PC10_20_STD2 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tag Name TEST STD 2 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Device Name DevNam UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Geo Location TEST LAB 2 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Meas 1 Units C UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Meas 2 Units mV UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Upper Range Value 850 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Lower Range Value 200 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Upper Range Limit 850 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Lower Range Limit 200 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Noise Rejection 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED 6 894108e 041 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Last Calib Date 7 16 98 UNUSE
85. allowed in the workshop workbench environment Do not change these parameters if PC20 is connected to a device in parallel to the EBM Set mA Pulse Output Function Loop Cal When Output is configured 4 20 mA certain devices can be set to output a mA value to test or adjust other devices in the loop The Set mA Pulse Output function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu To set the mA output first select the output units in mA measurement units or and then enter the desired output value The Set mA Pulse screen Figure 23 shows the allowable output range and units If you are using a CFT10 or CFT15 transmitter you can select to set either the mA or pulse output to a desired value 53 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Set Analog 4 20mA Pulse Output x Selectthe analog output being overriden Enter an override value Press Apply Press Continue when done testing Set Output Value Measurement Type Pulse v Output Value fi 0 Hz Range 0 00 to 10100 00 Hz Cancel Continue Help Figure 23 Sample Set mA Pulse Screen Set Digital Output Function When a device is configured for FoxCom Digital Output certain devices can be set to output a digital value to test I A Series system wiring and displays I A Series Version 4 0 or later is required Both Measurement 1 and Measurement 2 outputs can be set The Set Digital Output function is accessed
86. and Field Devices Before you can configure a transmitter using the IFDC you must use the Integrated Control Configurator ICC to add an Equipment Control Block ECB or window ECB for the transmitter to the system Each type of ECB contains a set of parameters that allow normal I A Series system operation and describe the transmitter The ECB types supported in the IFDC are ECB12 With the configuration HWTYPE 243 SWTYPE 12 for FoxCom 8 Channel devices ECB13 HTG Solaris only ECB18 820 860 and I A Series system Pressure Transmitters RTT10 and RIT20 T120 Temperature Transmitters IMT10 IMT20 IMT25 IMT25L and IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters 870ITPH pH ORP ISE Transmitters 870ITEC Electrochemical Transmitters 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters 140 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters and 83 Vortex Flowmeters ECB22 CFT10 Mass Flowmeters ECB23 With the configuration HWTYPE 243 SWTYPE 23 for FoxCom 4 Channel Isolated ECB74 SRD991 Intelligent Positioner 1 Introduction MI 024 495 October 2010 ECB200 With the configuration HWTYPE SWTYPE 214 or 244 for HART transmitters With the configuration HWTYPE SWTYPE 215 or 244 for HART output devices for example SRD991 Intelligent Positioner ECB201 Child Device ECB for Parent ECB200 with the configuration HWTYPE SWTYPE 214 or 244 for HART transmitters With the configuration HWTYPE SWTYPE 215 or 244 for HAR
87. and select Continue The Output Pressure Calibration is finished 238 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Restore Valve Specific Parameter This function allows writing of valve specific parameters into the positioner By reading the data file of one positioner mounted to a valve and writing these values into a new positioner the new positioner is adopted to that valve without performing an Autostart Calibration However due to mechanical tolerances in mounting the adoption is not optimal Therefore performing a new Autostart Calibration or Endpoint Calibration is required as soon as possible NOTE This function is only allowed at workshop security level Restore Factory Settings This function resets all calibration and configuration data back to the calibration and configuration data existing at time of delivery from the factory The valve s current database is overwritten This function is useful for example when a positioner is taken from one valve and mounted to another valve NOTE This function is only allowed at workshop security level Test You can perform the following procedures on the SRD991 Intelligent Positioner using the Test menu Go On Line Go Off line Go Local Set Setpoint Reset Status Reset Counters Reboot Device and Write Protect Go On Line This function sets the device into the on line mode where normal control is performed
88. automatically changes Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required This procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does 95 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring NOTE __ Before performing a mA Calibration perform the N Point Calibration procedure described on page 91 A mA calibration may no longer be necessary The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring 2 Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by setting the adjustment amount and pressing the Apply button When finished press Continue Calibrate 4m Output Step Size 0 5 m C 20m 4 Output Cumulative Change 0 m Apply Help Cancel Figure B 6 Sample RTT10 mA Calibration Screen 5 Set the Step Size from the menu 0
89. calibration point 1 point span for up to three applications This is usually done to correct for a cell factor change due to installation It should be used only if you have previously performed a 2 point calibration 1 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration function See page 203 2 Select Solution 1 Point Span from the Calibration menu 197 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters 3 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue One Point Span Calibration Application 1 y Figure I 4 Sample 870ITEC Solution 1 Point Span Screen 4 Enter the solution value and the calibrator s initials and select Continue 5 Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated 7 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Solution 2 Point This option permits you to perform a 2 point calibration for up to three applications 1 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration function See page 203 2 Select Solution 2 Point from the Calibration menu 3 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 198 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 2 o Two Point Calibration Applicatio
90. configuration database Connect to Device Connects to a device directly or using I A Series Pass Through Print Setup Changes the printer and printing options File Names Shows most recently accessed files for quick access Exit Quits the application prompts to save documents Profibus Configuration To enable connection to a Profibus device first the Profibus master must be configured and then the slave address must be defined to connect with the slave device These tasks may be accomplished in the Profibus Configuration dialog box View Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar StatusBar Shows or hides the status bar Utilities FOX FLOW Executes the FoxFlow application CON VALVE Executes the ConValve application FOX DOC Executes the FoxDoc application 29 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Table 6 Top Level Menu Description of Functions Continued Top Level Menu Pick Submenu Pick Description User MS Word Executes MS Word MS Excel Executes MS Excel Run Runs any program User Application 1 Launches a user specified application if defined User Application 2 Launches a user specified application if defined User Application n Launches a user specified application if defined Options Settings Modifies the application settings See details below User Defines up to nine user applications to add to user menu Change Security
91. date is automatically updated Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Solution 1 Point Offset This option permits you to set a 1 point offset for up to three applications and is normally used to correct for zero shift This should be used only if you have previously performed a 2 point calibration 1 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration function See page 203 2 Select Solution 1 Point Offset from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue One Point Offset Calibration x Enter the solution value and the calibrator s initials then press Continue rm Calibrate Application Number pplication 1 y Solution Value fo Range 0 00 to 9999 00 Calibrator s Initials aw Calibrated Date 09 12 2001 Cancel Help Figure I 3 Sample 870ITEC Solution 1 Point Offset Screen 4 Enter the solution value and the calibrator s initials and select Continue Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated 7 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Solution 1 Point Span This option permits you to set a
92. desired Calibrator s Initials 270 Calibrated 11 4 97 Cancel Help Figure C 5 Sample RTT20 Restore Factory Calibration Screen 4 Enter the calibrator s initials and select Continue 5 Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required This procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring NOTE Before performing a mA Calibration perform the N Point Calibration procedure described on page 104 A mA calibration may no longer be necessary Procedure for a FoxCom Device 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring 2 Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output 108 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by setting the adjustment amount and pressing the Apply button When finished press Continue Calibrate 4m Output Step Size fos F m C 20m Output Cumulat
93. flow rate setpoint Alarm Lo Flow Flow below configured low Flag flow rate Alarm EP Flag Fluid level in the pipe is If pipe is full check electrode wiring and repeat below the flowtube electrodes AZL calibration Alarm Total 1 Total above configured High Make process change or reconfigure Tot Alm Flag Fwd Tot 1 Setpt and reset totals Alarm Total 2 Total above configured High Flag Fwd Tot 2 132 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 24 Transmitter Status Error Messages HART Devices Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action AZL Detector Reports AZL Status Off not in use Empty Pipe Not Empty normal condition Auto Zero Lock Reports AZL effect on outputs Locked output locked Not Locked normal condition Disabled not configured Signal Lock Ext contact signal lock status Locked output locked Not Locked normal condition Disabled not configured Digital Owner Reports what function has m A Owhet control of the output Pulse Owner Additional Status 1 Measurement invalid Input out of range Flow Rate above or below URV Review configuration of URV and Direction Transmitter mode invalid Transmitter is in off line condition Transmitter may have been put in off line condition via the keypad or HART communicator If not cycle power Inconsistent Configuration error exists
94. functions directly See page 41 Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar See page 25 Info Window Shows device characteristic audit trail and error trace information See page 26 Progress Shows progress of an upload or download operation Trend Displays a trend See page 45 Calibrate Options vary with type of device Test Device Status Displays status and diagnostic information from the device See page 51 Set mA Pulse Output If configured to 4 20 mA output sets output to a specific mA value to test other devices in the loop See page 53 Set Digital Output If configured to Digital output sets output to a specific digital value to test I A Series system wiring and displays See page 54 Display Raw Input Displays raw inputs for some types of device See page 54 Go Off line Places the device in Off line mode See page 55 Go On Line Places the device in On line mode See page 55 Other options vary with l type of device Utilities FOX FLOW Executes the FoxFlow application CON VALVE Executes the ConValve application FOX DOC Executes the FoxDoc application User MS Word Executes MS Word MS Excel Executes MS Excel Run Runs any program User Application 1 Launches a user specified application User Application 2 Launches a user specified application User Application n Launches a user specified application Options Settings Modifies application settings See page 30
95. information before any printing can be done To invoke the application Print Setup 1 Click File gt Print Setup and select the Properties button The dialog box which appears has a button on the bottom labeled Install Click on Install A dialog box appears where you can add or delete printers Note that the first time this dialog box appears there are no configured printers 2 Click on Add Printer A dialog box displays all valid printer types and all currently configured ports The first time this dialog box is invoked the only port is FILE 3 Click on Define New Port 4 In the dialog box select Spooler to let XPrinter go out and supply all configured printers on your system This dialog box allows you to click on a port and edit the print command supplied if you wish to do so 5 Dismiss this dialog box Notice that all the printer ports now appear in the Add Printer dialog box 6 Click on a port then scroll down and select the appropriate printer type from the long list on the left Note that only PostScript and PCL printers are available 7 Select the printer type click on Add Selected to provide that printer in the actual Print dialog box application 8 Dismiss this dialog box and the Printer Installation dialog box 9 In the Printer Setup dialog box click Save 10 You must select the correct printer type If the type of printer you have does not appear in the printer type list try Generic Pos
96. is not normally required This procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring 2 Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu 3 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 4 Select 4 mA Output 200 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 m Calibration Figure I 7 Sample 870ITEC mA Calibration Screen 5 Set the Step Size from the menu 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply 6 Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown in the screen 7 Select 20 mA Output 8 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 9 The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 201 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Configuration Identifier Tab Screen Figure I 8 Sample 870ITEC Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for
97. kg m3 Thermal Expansion fo kg m3 K Component B Tag COMP B Density 1200 kg m3 Thermal Expansion fo kg m3 K Solids AByMass Mass Flow CompA amp B E Total CompA amp B E Vol Flow Compe E Flow Direction Forward Slug Time jeo sec Ref Temp 0 K Cancel Apply Help Figure G 7 Sample CFT15 Solids Tab Screen Field Entry Component A Tag Enter maximum of six characters Density Enter value Thermal Expansion Enter value Component B Similar to Component A Mode Settings Solids Select A by Mass B by Mass A by Vol or B by Vol Mass Flow Select Comp A Only Comp B Only or Comp A B Volume Flow Select Comp A Only Comp B Only or Comp A B Total Select Comp A Only Comp B Only or Comp A B General Settings Flow Direction Select Forward Positive BiDirect Negative BiDirect or Reverse MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters Field Entry Slug Time Enter allowable time for flow slug to exist before alarm is triggered Specify in multiples of 10 seconds from 10 to 2550 seconds Ref Temp Enter value Flowtube Tab Screen CFT15 Transmitter Configuration 0 000156 0 000000173 Figure G 8 Sample CFT15 Flowtube Tab Screen Field Entry Sensor I D Enter data from flowtube data plate Density Coef 1 Densit
98. mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required This procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring 2 Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 122 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 4 Select 4 mA Output m Calibration Figure D 3 Sample IMT20 mA Calibration Screen 5 Set the Step Size from the menu 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply 6 Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown on the screen display 7 Select 20 mA Output 8 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 When finished select Continue 9 The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 123 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix D IMT10 MT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Configuration Identifier Tab Screen IMT20 Device Configuration Dewan Boiler Flow Plant 34 West Figure D 4
99. measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring NOTE From the mA Calibration screen you can also restore the factory 4 to 20 mA settings This does not require insertion of a meter in the loop wiring The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output Set the Step Size from the menu 0 2 0 02 0 002 0 002 0 02 0 2 and select Apply 6 Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown A TS on the screen display 7 Select 20 mA Output Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 8 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 9 Select Continue to save the calibration to the device 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements m Calibration Figure F 3 Sample CFT10 mA Calibration Screen 153 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters Configuration Identifier Tab Screen CFT Device Configuration TAG NUMBER COROO1 PASSED CALIB CALIB SLOT 06 Figure F 4 Sample CFT10 Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename
100. only Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Message Enter message Optional used for reference only 187 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters Flow Parameters Tab Screen VortexTransmitter Configuration x Identifier Flow Parameters Options and Piping 82 T04H1 KCRJ Flow Meter Model Reference K Factor 33 600 p ft3 Meter Serial Number 9703120001 m Measurement Fluid Type Liqud Y Measurement Units cfm Custom Upper Range Limit 128 0 cfm Upper Range Value 31 10 cfm Low Flow Correct On Low Flow cut In 9 137 v cfm Flowing Parameters o 70 choise Temperature 1175 0000 F Viscosity fo 6000 C estoke Units Base Density 55 00 Ib ft3 Base Density 59 00 Ibft3 English e A K Factor 33 765 fa AddedK Bias 050 z Metric Cancel Apply Help Figure H 10 Sample Vortex Flow Parameters Tab Screen Field Flow Meter Sensor Model Reference K Factor Entry Enter Model Number Enter Reference K Factor Meter Serial Number Shows Serial Number if HART device Measurement Fluid Type Select Liquid Gas or Steam Upper Range Limit Shows value of Upper Range Limit of the flowmeter Low Flow Correct Specify On or Off Measurement Units Select from menu of flow units or select Custom to enter user conf
101. or New NOTE After system configuration changes for example after adding new Control Stations FBMs and corresponding ECBs the tree information within the Device Selection dialog boxes needs to be updated by selecting the Refresh button to make these ECBs visible in the Device Selection screen But the Refresh button should only be used for new Control Stations because this function re initializes the tag number information and marks HART devices or preconfiguration off line device databases as UNKNOWN Since some devices can only be associated with certain ECB types the Device Selection dialog box supports the concept of filtering out invalid entries For ease of use a search capability is provided in the Device Selection dialog box When you type in a search string and press the Find button the selection tree is searched for matching substrings Once a substring is found the specified tree item is selected and displayed If the item is a parent item it is expanded Subsequent button presses on Find iterate to the next matching item IFDC Operation on Solaris with windows off IFDC runs correctly on Solaris stations with windows off However the Edit gt Configure dialog tabs are inactive Clicking the mouse on these tabs has no effect In order to bring up the next configuration page press the CTRL and TAB keys simultaneously Note that this keyboard shortcut also works with windows on This keyboard shortcu
102. press Connect Profibus Master Page In the Master page the Profibus parameters for the Profibus master stack must be configured PROFIBUS Version Ed Master Slaves File Name je Program FilestFoxboro FoxlFDC Datatproficonf_PF PBC Station Address f Name MASTER m Busparameters Baudrate 93 75 KBaud y Calculate Slot Time e000 Target Rotation Time f1oo000 Min Station delay 200 Max Station delay f 000 Gap Update Factor 1 Setup Time 200 Highest Station Addr 1268 Quiet Time f 50 Retry Limit Open L Cancel Apply Help Figure 25 Sample Profibus Master Configuration Screen 59 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Table 10 Profibus Master Configuration Screen Field Descriptions Input Field Range Unit Description Notes on user input File Name The field displays the path To change the path and and filename of the Profibus filename for the Profibus configuration file The file has configuration file press the the extension PBC Save button The File dialog box is displayed and allows you to change the path and filename Or with the Open button another Profibus configuration file can be selected Station 1 126 Address of the Profibus The user must engineer this Address Master bus parameter Station Name of the Profibus The user must engineer this Name Master bus parameter Baud rate 9 6 KB
103. representative Email support invensys com Website http support ips invensys com Invensys Foxboro FoxCom FoxView I A Series and the Invensys logo are trademarks of Invensys plc its subsidiaries and affiliates All other brand names may be trademarks of their respective owners Copyright 1999 2010 Invensys Systems Inc All rights reserved MB 100 1010
104. screen is shown in Figure 22 Diagnostic Codes Figure 22 Sample Diagnostic Codes Screen 52 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 The Diagnostic Codes list shown is only applicable to the specific product to which you are connected Therefore it differs from product to product The list of device diagnostic error codes their explanations and recommended actions are given in the appropriate product appendix Set Update Time Function In PC20 this function allows you to modify the dynamic measurement scan time Per default the sleep time between dynamic measurement cycles T1s is 2000 ms The resulting cycle time T1c is the sum of the sleep time T1s plus the retrieve time to retrieve the dynamic measurement values T1r Therefore Tlc T1s Tlr The retrieve time T1r depends on the protocol and the number of retrieved values The sleep time T1s can be changed with this function For some devices there is a secondary measurement cycle as a multiple of the first primary cycle in which the values which do not change so frequently are collected For example in the SRD991 the measurement of the internal temperature cycle count and travel sum is in this second cycle The multiplication factor Y for this cycle can also be changed The resulting secondary cycle time T2c depends on the primary cycle and the retrieve time T2r for the secondary values Therefore T2c Y T1c T2r NOTE This function is only
105. sec Comp A ande y Reference Temp fo K Cancel Apply Help Figure F 9 Sample CFT10 Solids Configuration Tab Screen MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Component A Tag Enter maximum of six characters Not configurable using IFDC Density Enter value Thermal Expansion Enter value Component B Similar to Component A Mode Settings Solids Select A by Mass B by Mass A by Vol or B by Vol Mass Flow Select Comp A Comp B or Comp A B Volume Flow Select Comp A Comp B or Comp A B Total Select Comp A Comp B or Comp A B General Settings Flow Direction Select Forward Positive Bi directional Negative Bi directional or Reverse Slug Time Enter allowable time for flow slug to exist before alarm is triggered Specify in multiples of 10 seconds from 10 to 2550 seconds Reference Temp Enter value 159 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters Flowtube Parameters Tab Screen CFT Device Configuration 0 68 0 000156 0 0000001 73 Figure F 10 Sample CFT10 Flowtube Parameters Tab Screen Field Entry Sensor I D Enter data from flowtube data plate Density Coef 1 Density Coef 2 Density Coef 3 Density Coef 4 Nominal Capacity Flow Coef 1 Flow Coef 2 Flow Coef 3 Flow Coef 4 160 Appendix F CFT10
106. tN Jie aah are e 266 Input Tab Screen Profibus PV Tab Sres tas 267 Ch racterization Tab Screen ba Dos aa 270 Qu tput Tab Sereen nto eee aea EEA E E E N RE 271 Profibus Ou t Tab Scre n A a a a a a a aa es a aa 273 Density lab Screen ienest ieo ear E e e a a E ee A AEE 274 Failsafe Handling Tab Scree a aa 274 Device Tab Screen oa do ais 275 Profib s Alarms Tab iii 276 A BAE E EIET A EE E SEE E E AE tas Roe ee i E E EST 278 NESA EE EE RTE AA P E TE A TE TOE E A A T A ETTE 278 Pole EIE DRat Ont EEE E E A EAE AEE E T EEE 279 AS 280 Restore Factory Calibration ii 281 Specification eieiei ae ean dacs ina e ee aA i aE EERS E EE a EA EEE ESAS AES 282 SENSOR oTe a E E E E SE E E ET E 282 Displacer Tab Screen A eS 282 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters ccsssssssscsesseeeseeeeeeee 285 Device Data Serec Manes uiian ld 285 o shat ii a ea a ea a edisi aeiaai 286 AUD TAU OI a atk aaa 287 Bem nce aration neea NI A 288 Calibration Pure ELO asc 288 Solution l Point Offset a a ds 288 O 289 Sonne do dll dos 290 Temp r ture SENSO tds 291 ma Cibona ns Ace ce e od at ns e den A 292 Configuration aioir tii ate co ees cee sects tesa tS ae det ace a RNS Caan ce ed Nett RERNE 294 Identifier Tab Serena as 294 E E RS A 295 rs al AN A AE E 296 Misa Tab Sn ia 297 A is isase tes cae ances teste E A Nese Standen sue sata caer NSS 298 Database Report iii ia it 299 xi MI 024 495 October 2010 Contents Appendix N No
107. that LRV 0 and URV a positive value equal to the span of the transmitter After you complete the calibration procedure reset the LRV and URV to the desired values Example To calibrate for a range of 100 to 0 inches HO first calibrate the LRV to 0 inches HzO and then calibrate the URV to 100 inches H2O Then rerange the LRV to 100 inches HO and rerange the URV to 0 inches HzO ReZero This function enables you to rezero and rerange your device at the Lower Range Value LRV The procedure follows 1 Select ReZero from the Calibration menu or the ReZero icon from the device toolbar 74 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 If your device is configured for Square Root mode select Continue to change to Linear mode for Calibration The configuration is automatically placed back in Square Root mode when leaving Calibration If your device is configured for Linear mode ignore this step 4 Ifyour LRV was not zero you are prompted to change the value if you wish and then Continue If your LRV was zero ignore this step 5 When the displayed measurement is stable select Continue The average of the last five readings is shown Select Continue again to accept this value 6 Enter the operator s initials and select Continue The current calibration date is automatically displayed See Figure A 2 7
108. this dialog is displayed and the Monitor checkbox is checked The trend dialog box is resizeable Save Trend Data With Save Data it is possible to store the measured trending data collected since the trend dialog box is displayed and the Monitor checkbox is checked You are asked for the path and filename to store the trending database This file could be displayed at later time by using the Load Data button Load Trend Data With Load Data it is possible to retrieve the stored trending database You are asked for the path and filename to retrieve the trending database The file must be written using Save Data Clear Trend Data With Clear Data it is possible to delete all the collected trending data until this point and start trending with a new database The previously collected trending data is lost unless it is stored for later use by using Save Data 45 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 46 Print Trend Data With Print the displayed portion of the trending view can be printed Before this step it is possible to choose the portion of the trend data which you want to display and print by using the functions to Manipulate the Scales or to Manipulate the Trend Monitor Trend Data With the Monitor check box being checked the dynamically retrieved data are collected within the trend dialog box and displayed If this box is unchecked the collection of the measurement data is switched off Export Trend Data With E
109. typically done on the bench and may require special tools Refer to SRD991 Intelligent Positioner MI EVE 0105 A for more information NOTE This function is only allowed at workshop security level The procedure to perform an Air Supply Pressure Calibration is Select Air Supply from the Calibration menu Regulate the air supply to the LOW supply pressure value Enter this value in the edit box on the display and select Continue Regulate the air supply to the HIGH supply pressure value OS ce Seis PY oe Enter this value in the edit box on the display and select Continue The Air Supply Pressure Calibration is finished Output Pressure Calibration Output Pressure Calibration is needed whenever the printed wiring board is replaced This operation is typically done on the bench and may require special tools Refer to SRD991 Intelligent Positioner MI EVE 0105 A for more information NOTE This function is only allowed at workshop security level The procedure to perform an output pressure calibration is 1 Select Output Pressure from the Calibration menu 2 Using the pushbuttons set the setpoint to 0 3 Check the pressure gauge attached to the output port of the positioner Enter this value in the edit box on the display and select Continue 4 Using the pushbuttons set the setpoint to 100 5 Check the pressure gauge attached to the output port of the positioner Enter this value in the edit box on the display
110. via the Test menu from the device top level menu First select the measurement and then enter the desired output value Display Raw Input Function This function reads the raw inputs for certain devices The Display Raw Input function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu The inputs displayed for various devices are shown in Table 9 Table 9 Raw Inputs Displayed for Various Devices Device Type Display 820 Frequency of Input 1 pressure input Frequency of Input 2 temperature input 860 mV Input 1 pressure input mV Input 2 temperature input I A Series mV Input 1 pressure input Pressure mV Input 2 temperature input CFT10 Tube Drive Frequency CFT15 Tube Drive Frequency 54 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 9 Raw Inputs Displayed for Various Devices Continued Device Type Display 83 Shedding Frequency Upper Limit Frequency IMT25 Electrode Voltage Positive Electrode Voltage Negative Coil Current Positive Coil Current Negative IMT96 FlowB ADC counts compensated for offsets Voltage reference in ADC counts for offsets Actual gain calculation Zero flow offset 130 Pressure input in percent 140 Pressure input in percent Go On Line Function All functions normally return to on line status unless the device was disconnected during operation However this function enables you to force the device back
111. 0 Zero Total Calibration x Select the device total s to reset to zero Press CONTINUE once desired measurement s to reset are selected T Net Forward and Reverse Totals l Grand Total Cancel Help Figure O 3 Sample IMT96 Reset Totals Screen 4 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Zero Flow This procedure causes the device to rezero the measurement when zero flow is in the flowtube 1 Select Zero Flow from the Calibration menu or the Zero Flow icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Select Continue when zero flow is present in the flowtube 4 Wait while the device is zeroing 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Restore Zero Flow Default This procedure restores the factory zero setting 1 2 3 4 Select Restore Zero Flow Default from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Wait while the factory zero setting is restored Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Pulse Preset Select Pulse Preset from the Test menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Enter a value to set as the pulse rate and select Apply MI
112. 01 Relay 2 Operation 01 REV_INFO co Relay 2 Suppression 00 UNUSED 1 10 35 Alarms On 01 Sensor Minor Revisio 02 High Alarm On 00 Sensor Major Revisio 02 High Alarm Set Point 200 UNUSED 65002 High Alarm Deadband 10 UNUSED 65002 Low Alarm On 00 UNUSED ea Low Alarm Set Point 5 Low Cost Option 00 00 Low Alarm Deadband O 1 Empty Pipe Effect 00 Tot 1 Alarm On 00 145 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters 146 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the CFT10 Mass Flowmeters in regard to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Error Messages Calibration Configuration Database Report Device Data Screen E Device Data Figure F 1 Sample CFT10 Device Data Screen 147 MI 024 495 October 2010 Error Messages Status Error Messages Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters Table 26 Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Device Busy Set if EEPROM write If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this is in progress and does not clear problem contact the CSC pending Initializing Transmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Transmitter is re
113. 024 495 October 2010 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters 4 Select Continue when done testing 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurement Configuration Identifier Tab Screen IMT Device Configuration Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totaizer Figure O 4 Sample IMT 96 Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 318 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Flow Tab Screen IMT Device Configuration x Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer r Flow Settings Engineering Units Flow Direction GPM y Custom Flow Rate Format EE BiDir Positive y Meter Factor 12 2 C Analog 4 20m4 Analog and Pulse Rate Output Damping fi 100 Sec Output Mode Digital BiDir Upper Range Value 1 200 00000 GPM BiDir Dual Range Upper Range Value 2 25 00000 GPM Upper Range Value 3 25 GPM m Pulse Output Mo
114. 1 Sample Profibus Function Tab Seres IN er 252 Identification of a 140 Series Transmitter Running in IPD10 B Compatibility Mode 258 Sample Device Data Screen for a 140 Series Transmitter in IDP10 B Compatibility Mode 258 Change Device Type Message Serena 259 Model Identification Message Screen lleida 260 Model Selection Screen artone A EN E E r A a San 260 Sample Device Data Screen for a 140 Series Transmitter in the 140 Series Mode 261 Sample Device Data Sere ei 262 Sample Device Status Sri a ia ia cias 263 Sample Diagnostic oder iii 265 Sample Raw Input Valie Sereen seirene ache i Ra Cae ea hae 265 Sample Identifier Tab Screen for a HART Transmitter ada tii 266 Sample Profibus PV Tab Serena 268 Sample Inpu t Tab Crecen eirs oa puede AATA EA aei EEN 269 Sample Characterization Tab Sarria la 271 Sample Output ab sere ett ose e as N s 272 Sample Profibus Out Tab Serra da AEEA 273 Sample Density A e ET 274 Sample Failsafe Handling Tab Sere is 275 Sample Device Tab creen iria A dt 276 Sample Profibus Alarms Tab Orea did dnd 278 Sample ReZero Calibration Screen eck 2 55 fe daceetd do ells 279 Sample Point Calibration o ia SE 280 Sample mA Calibration Screen ie anaa a aa a A aa eed sae eae naan 281 Sample Specification Sensor Tab Screen iii ad 282 Sample Specification Displacer Tab Sorento ias 283 Sample 870ITCR Device Data Soreeniinicio6n aiii 285 Sample 870ITCR Solution 1 Point Offset Screeii Gasset sa 289 Sample 870ITCR Solution
115. 195 Dual Display Line 1 00 Passcode 2 On 00 Dual Display Line 2 00 Pass 2 Protect 01 Rate EGU M1 00 Passcode 2 8195 Flow Rate Units M1 GPM Line Frequency 32 EGU Rate Factor 1 Flow Direction 00 Raw Rate Format 04 Contact In 1 Functio 00 144 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Table 25 Sample Database Report Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Rate Damping 3 1 Contact In 1 Operati 01 Totalizer On Off 01 Contact In 2 Functio 00 Rate EGU M2 00 Contact In 2 Operati 01 Total Rate Units M2 Gal Noise Reduction On 01 EGU Totals Slope 1 Empty Pipe Detection 01 Tot Net Format 05 TON Count 20 mA 29096 Grand Total Format 04 TON Count 4 mA 4800 Output Mode 01 Meter Factor Use 1 Digital Mode 00 Cal Date 10 1 97 Analog Mode 00 Cal Name DoneBy Upper Range Limit 1 20000 mA Hold Value 0 Upper Range Limit 2 50 Pulse Hold 0 Upper Range Limit 3 5 Kernal Major Revisio 00 Pulse Output Mode 01 Kernal Minor Revisio 06 Pulse Out URV 100 SREVMAJ 01 Rate Max Freq 01 SREVMIN 07 Tot Max Freq 00 Display Major Revisi 00 Rate Out Damp 3 Display Minor Revisi 2d Relay 1 Function 00 Parameter Table Offs b7 74 Relay 1 Alarm 00 Parameter Table CRC Od e5 Relay 1 Operation 01 Parameter Table Type 00 Relay 1 Suppression 00 Parameter Table Size 00 e4 Relay 2 Function 00 Reserved 00 00 00 Relay 2 Alarm
116. 2 1 Phase In Cal 3 0 Phase In Cal 4 0 Neg Phase Cal 1 0 Neg Phase Cal 2 1 Neg Phase Cal 3 0 Neg Phase Cal 4 0 RTD Res to Temp 1 0 RTD Res to Temp 2 40 RTD Res to Temp 3 0 RTD Res to Temp 4 0 Curr 1 l Pulse 1 0 Curr 1 l Pulse 2 1 177 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters 178 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the Foxboro Vortex Flowmeters in regard to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Error Messages Calibration Configuration Database Report NOTE Oa Version 2 0 of the IFDC PC20 software incorporates full configuration capability for the HART 83 Series Vortex Transmitters Any HART 83 Series database saved to your computer hard disk for Version 1 0 is not usable for Version 2 0 Therefore delete Version 1 0 files and save new files from your transmitter using Version 2 0 software Device Data Screen BF Device Data Iof x Tag Number FT102B Device Type VORTEX TagName Tag Name Device Name DevNam Location Here at Foxbor Model Code 83F DO25155TNZ Flow Measurement 103 89 USapm Total Measurement gt 42564391 USgal Device Temperature 26 13 E 79 03 F m Equivalent In digital m Figure H 1 Sample Vortex Device Data Screen FoxCom Device 179 MI 024 495 October 2010 BF De
117. 219 29 Chem Compens New 7 226 92 Buffer 2 Temp 7 0 Chem Compens Abs 8 0 Buffer 2 Val 7 219 29 Chem Compens New 8 226 92 Buffer 2 Temp 8 0 Chem Compens Abs 9 0 Buffer 2 Val 8 219 29 Chem Compens New 9 226 92 Buffer 2 Temp 9 0 Chem Compens Abs 10 0 Buffer 2 Val 9 219 29 Chem Compens New 10 226 92 Buffer 2 Temp 10 0 Chem Compens Abs 11 0 Buffer 2 Val 10 219 3 Chem Compens New 11 227 Buffer 2 Temp 11 0 Chem Compens Abs 12 0 Buffer 2 Val 11 219 3 Chem Compens New 12 227 Buffer 3 Size 01 228 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORPASE Transmitters Table 38 Sample Database Report Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Chem Compens Abs 13 0 Buffer 3 Temp 1 0 Chem Compens New 13 227 Buffer 3 Val 1 219 3 Chem Compens Abs 14 0 Buffer 3 Temp 2 0 Chem Compens New 14 227 Buffer 3 Val 2 219 3 Chem Compens Abs 15 0 Buffer 3 Temp 3 0 Chem Compens New 15 226 92 Buffer 3 Val 3 219 29 Chem Compens Abs 16 0 Buffer 3 Temp 4 0 Chem Compens New 16 226 92 Buffer 3 Val 4 219 29 Chem Compens Abs 17 0 Buffer 3 Temp 5 0 Chem Compens New 17 226 92 Buffer 3 Val 5 219 29 Chem Compens Abs 18 0 Buffer 3 Temp 6 0 Chem Compens New 18 226 92 Buffer 3 Val 6 219 29 Chem Compens Abs 19 0 Buffer 3 Temp 7 0 Chem Compens New 19 227 Buffer 3 Val 7 219 3 Chem Compens Abs 20 0 Buffer 3 Temp 8 0 Chem Compens New 20 227
118. 25 Thermistor Cal 2 2 5 High Meas Cal 3 35 Kernal Major Rev 00 Kernal Minor Rev 04 SREVMJ 01 SREVMN 14 Display Major Rev 00 Display Minor Rev 00 Parameter Tbl Offset c9 3b Parameter Table CRC bf 0e Parameter Table Type 00 Parameter Table Size 00 ff Reserved 00 00 00 Calibration Req d 06 Core Manufact Date 1 1 94 Output Mode 01 Enable Disable Diag c3 fO f0 c3 Clear Diagnostics 00 00 00 00 Low Cal Point KCL 1 0 Low Cal Point KCL 2 0 Low Cal Point KCL 3 0 High Cal Point KCH 1 1 High Cal Point KCH 2 1 High Cal Point KCH 3 1 Low Cal Point VCL 1 0 Low Cal Point VCL 2 0 Low Cal Point VCL 3 0 Temperature Offset 0 User In 0 Drive O Amp Offset 0 Drive 90 Amp Offset 0 Meas 0 Amp Offset 0 Meas 90 Amp Offset 0 303 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Table 44 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Freq Conv Factor 500000 Ohm Ref Res 140 K Ref Resistance 1960 304 Appendix N Non Foxboro Devices Using HART Communication Protocol This appendix provides information that is exclusive to HART devices in regard to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Configuration NOTE For information on any of the parameters shown on screens in this appendix refer to information from your product s
119. 35 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters 5 Enter the value from the mA meter in the Measured Value field on your screen and select Apply Repeat Step 4 until the Measured Value equals the value on the meter Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 eS A Select Continue to save the calibration to the transmitter 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements m Calibration Ed This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by entering the Measured Value and pressing the Apply button Repeat this procedure until the Measured Value equals the value to be calibrated Press Continue to change signal and when finished Calibrate 4m Output Measured Value fs m 2m Gutput Apply Help Figure E 3 Sample mA Calibration Screen HART Device Reset Totals This procedure resets the transmitter totals The Net Forward and Reverse Totals are reset as a group The Grand Total is individually reset 1 Select Reset Totals from the Calibration menu or the Reset Totals icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select the device total s to reset to zero You can select Net Forward and Reverse Totals or Grand Total Then select Continue 136 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic
120. 7 3 0 Timeout 600 Chem Comp Val 17 3 0 Minor Passcode 0 Chem Comp Temp 18 3 0 Major Passcode 0 Chem Comp Val 18 3 0 Number Applications 00 Chem Comp Temp 19 3 0 Trigger 1 High 9 999 Chem Comp Val 19 3 0 Trigger 2 Low 1e 010 Chem Comp Temp 20 3 0 Trigger 2 High 0 Chem Comp Val 20 3 0 Trigger 3 Low 0 Chem Comp Temp 21 3 0 Hold Configuration 00 Chem Comp Val 21 3 0 mA Hold Value 3 402823e 38 Analog Output 1 01 Meas 1 Hold Value 1 469368e 039 Analog Output 2 01 Temp Hold Value 0 Analog Output 3 01 Absolute Hold Value 0 Lower Range Value 1 0 Cal Name App 1 GTF 302 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Table 44 Sample Database Report Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Lower Range Value 2 0 Cal Name App 2 STD Lower Range Value 3 0 Cal Name App 3 GTF Upper Range Value 1 0 2 Cal Date 1 4 16 98 Upper Range Value 2 0 2 Cal Date 2 4 23 98 Upper Range Value 3 0 2 Cal Date 3 4 30 98 Output Failsafe 1 00 Sales Order Number 95F0000000010001 Output Failsafe 2 00 MS Code 870ITCR Output Failsafe 3 00 Software Version 53 56 4e 5f Output mA 1 0 0125 Low Meas Cal 1 0 Output mA 2 0 0125 Low Meas Cal 2 10 Output mA 3 0 0125 Low Meas Cal 3 25 High Meas Cal 1 95 Thermistor Cal 1 100000 High Meas Cal 2
121. 8 Export 48 F File Operations 38 H Hardware Installation PC20 13 Help Function 55 330 Index Index I I A Series Pressure Calibration 74 Configuration 81 Database Report 86 Device Data Screen 71 Error Messages 72 IFDC Trace Function 66 Import 48 IMT10 IMT20 Calibration 121 Configuration 124 Database Report 126 Device Data Screen 119 Error Messages 120 IMT25 Calibration 134 Configuration 138 318 Database Report 144 Device Data Screen 129 Error Messages 130 IMT96 Calibration 315 Configuration 318 Database Report 324 Device Data Screen 313 Error Messages 313 Info Window 26 L Local Function SRD991 239 M mA Pulse Output Function Set 53 Message button 28 N New Configuration Database beginning a 36 Non Foxboro Devices Configuration 306 Device Data Screen 305 O Off line Function 55 Off line Function SRD991 239 MI 024 495 October 2010 331 MI 024 495 October 2010 On line Function 55 On line Function SRD991 239 Operation 19 Overview 1 P Password Security Options 30 PC20 Trace Function 66 Preconfiguring a Device 40 Previewing a Device Database Report 56 Printing a Device Database Report 56 Protection Device Output 24 R Raw Input Function Display 54 Reading Device Data 47 Reboot Device SRD991 240 Reference Documents 10 ReRange 77 Reset Counters SRD991 240 Reset Status SRD991 240 Restore Default 78 Restore Factory Calibration RTT10 95 Restore F
122. 9 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 6 462349e 027 UNUSED 0 N_A 84 2e 41 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED 0 EEPROM Checksum 0 100 Appendix C RTT20 T120 Temperature Transmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the RTT20 and TI20 Temperature transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Status Error Messages Calibration Configuration Database Report NOTE 1 This appendix applies to RTT20 transmitters with both FoxCom and HART protocols The text applies to both devices unless specifically identified as pertaining to one or the other 2 The RTT20 and the TI20 transmitters are identical with respect to the FoxCom protocol All other references to RTT20 also apply to the TI20 transmitter Device Data Screen Device Data OF x Tag Number Owner Tag Device Type ATT20 Rev 3 TagName Owner Tag Name Device Name DevNam Location Instr Location Measurement 1 102 35 F Device Temperature 74 85 IF 23 81 E m Equivalent In digital Figure C 1 Sample RTT20 Device Data Screen 101 MI 024 495 October 2010 NOTE Appendix C RTT20 T120 Temperature Transmitters The Device Data screen for the HART transmitter does not have the Device Name and Location parameters Error Mess ages Table 17 Transmitter Status Error Messages for a FoxCom Transmitter
123. A dd AS aa aid 164 Diagnostic Error Messages at io o A EEN 165 CAU Otra ia baii 167 ReZero Transmitter cscacsdesei coe aa aT as acess ie Radeon sae aah segs 167 Startup Aero Si O OS 168 Zero otalur seiss Aei Wess caren ede 3c a E T eas Mate tat tts pis ETGEN 168 Confipuratioti aiaeei rinkose eoa vieeceisdectuetdsavhessdadeaitaaeventiad bead adectin eda ede vaedaedeaearedhlecaneiaee 169 Identifier Tab Screen inca 169 Units Tab rn A Ei aTi 170 O tp ts Tab Scree std tdi a 171 Current Tab RM A E AA 172 Solds Tab Screen tr osetia tah alae loi aegis SU iatot tak a ile ea S 173 Hlowtube Tab Screen ns ceo nats suse BaS N i eo R 174 Modbus Lab Screen reae ea ka a Dee AA RNa ON ae at ea ge O 175 Database Re pores cececessctes sors cee ct tetas hn 2 E a N N EE AE sete teenies 176 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters iicssccessinsicccsaisionestacopunsseesctoaapadnuendtsnnsorendessssddadeses 179 viii Contents MI 024 495 October 2010 Device Data Serenata ta ios 179 Error Messages doi ir tds 180 Status Error Messages nuria iaa 180 Diagnostic Error Viessa cess cesses IA 181 Calibration ia ets eect ted eck ak te ed dig eh eek ik Se ctl i pA a 181 RER AN SC seiren onini Sosa went nea eiar e ds ease a rias aaa ideas eens aed oie 182 Leer Total kae acters stetecadd a a a aE 182 Set Low Blow Girt i a tata acabadas 183 mA Calibrati on air TA E EE E T E OE E E 184 F xCom Device E AETA E A idas 184 AAR D VUE a o AER 185 Combination arne R a E a aN S
124. Bos a N SS nyeneaianas 45 Save Trend Dita A A A A A a 45 Load Prend Data astas 45 Clear Trend Dita ara ii E 45 Print ADA a e A as 46 Monitos Trend Data nia as 46 Export Ue ee ett 46 A o ORG 47 Reading Deyice I ate o ts e al uae tea e e Sal 47 Downloading Database Information to a Devices siaccsdussiesjasieces edito eat 47 ASCII Format for Import and Export tl 48 A rea RO ATL Aer et E N O a AA EE 48 Parameter List oia 48 Contents MI 024 495 October 2010 COMES A A Paes 48 IFDC PC20 Export Formats nene iaa la aaa 48 JEDCG PC20 Import Format msie nr o a a a n a E 49 Example of the IFDC PC20 ASCI Format ts Dal ic 49 Configuration PUTCO Mn e aed ha 49 Comp te Function si tae 50 Comments FUNCIO at 50 A saci somsnnsescnss secon saawvabsarssivieansbraeh vats caomsplansonsedavunennulviesnibaisunateuiondiarvatgan 51 Field Device Status Function errar 51 Set Update Time FuUnctioi O 53 Set mA Pulse Output Function Loop Cal opi 53 Set Digital Q tput Funcion rt E E EE a eie Sa cay eee 54 Display Raw Input Function ccs ites cea o RRA a nd a n Ri 54 Go On Line Function A A AAA AAA A 55 Go Off Line Fut ten na aan aie aa eas LuanSuensataees esnnteat seas ton chiands 55 E A re moro ny EI eT EA te PREP EO 55 Help Mena arene Gases te a nsec A ae a as ea aes eae a fa 55 Help Via the Toolbar iii eeedetsseeniaeddnabana tears aani ANKETAR EEES aies 55 Help Viathe F1 Fu eton Key a ai ca 56 Previewing or Printing a Device Database
125. CMCP 2 04 TON Count 4 mA 5465 Prim Scale CMCP 3 04 Meas 2 Units C Prim Scale CMRG 1 95 Temp Units 1 00 Prim Scale CMRG 2 0 Temp Units 2 00 Prim Scale CMRG 3 20 Temp Units 3 00 Display Second 1 00 Chem Size Appl 1 15 Display Second 2 00 Chem Size Appl 2 15 Display Second 3 00 Chem Size Appl 3 15 Temp Comp TPCP 1 04 Temp Comp Temp 1 1 0 Temp Comp TPCP 2 16 Temp Comp Val 1 1 0 Temp Comp TPCP 3 04 Temp Comp Temp 2 1 0 Temp Comp 1 1 Temp Comp Val 2 1 0 Temp Comp 2 1 Temp Comp Temp 3 1 0 Temp Comp 3 1 Temp Comp Val 3 1 0 22 Reference Temp 1 25 Temp Comp Temp 4 1 0 207 MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 36 Sample Database Report Continued Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Parameter Value Parameter Value Reference Temp 2 25 Temp Comp Val 4 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 5 1 0 Temp Comp Val 2 2 4 Temp Comp Val 5 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 3 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 6 1 0 Temp Comp Val 3 2 0 Temp Comp Val 6 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 4 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 7 1 0 Temp Comp Val 4 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 7 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 5 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 8 1 0 Temp Comp Val 5 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 8 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 6 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 9 1 0 Temp Comp Val 6 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 9 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 7 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 10 1 0 Temp Comp Val 7 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 10 1 0 22 Temp
126. CR Measurement Tab Screen Failure Value Manual Temperature Field Entry Temperature Units Select Celsius or Fahrenheit Mode Select Automatic follows RTD or Manual fixed point If Mode is Automatic enter temperature in case RTD fails If Mode is Manual enter temperature Temperature Sensor Select 2 wire 100 Q 2 wire 1000 Q 3 wire 100 Q or 3 wire 1000 RTD or 100 kQ thermistor Measurement Stability Measurement Stability Active y Instrument Stability Measurement Feature On Blank Instrument Stability Measurement Feature Off Stability Time If on enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5 second increments Stability Variant If on enter variant between 1 and 9 Temperature Stability Temperature Stability Active y Instrument Stability Temperature Feature On Blank Instrument Stability Temperature Feature Off Stability Time If on enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5 second increments 296 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Stability Variant If on enter variant between 1 and 9 Misc Tab Screen 870CR Transmitter Configuration x HE Figure M 10 Sample 870ITCR Misc Tab Screen Field Entry Diagnostics Leakage y Enable error messages Blank Disable error messages ATC Short
127. Cal 2 524277 8 Kernal Major Rev 00 Trigger 1 Low 1e 010 Kernal Minor Rev 04 Trigger 3 High 1e 010 SREVMJ 01 REV_INFO be SREVMN 14 IGN2 8 16 02 Display Major Rev 00 Sensor Minor Rev 14 Display Minor Rev 00 Sensor Major Rev 01 Parameter Tbl Offset c9 3b IGN3 4 Parameter Table CRC bf 0e IGN4 150 Parameter Table Type 00 IGN5 ff Parameter Table Size 00 ff Reserved 00 00 00 Calibration Req d 06 Core Manufact Date 1 1 94 Output Mode 01 Enable Disable Diag c3 f0 f0 c3 Clear Diagnostics 00 00 00 00 Low Cal Point KCL 1 143 8768 Low Cal Point KCL 2 10 Low Cal Point KCL 3 3 High Cal Point KCH 1 0 High Cal Point KCH 2 2 614450 4 High Cal Point KCH 3 3 1335957 Low Cal Point VCL 1 0 002598027 Low Cal Point VCL 2 0 00291353 Low Cal Point VCL 3 0 002883723 Temperature Offset 215 User In 0 211 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Table 36 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Drive O Amp Offset 1521 Drive 90 Amp Offset 175 Meas 0 Amp Offset 767 Meas 90 Amp Offset 632 Freq Conv Factor 500000 Ohm Ref Res 138 5662 212 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP ISE Transmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 870ITPH Transmitters in regard to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Error Messages
128. Calibration Configuration Database Report Device Data Screen BF Device Data Figure J 1 Sample 870ITPH Device Data Screen 213 MI 024 495 October 2010 Error Messages Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP SE Transmitters Table 37 Transmitter Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Transmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Error Indicates an active diagnostic error See diagnostic error message to determine problem and corrective action has been unstable Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of Status Error secondary status the screen display Secondary Status Fields Measurement Unstable process Check sensor connection Select Test gt Go On Line Error measurement If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Received a bad message problem contact the CSC Stability Error Raw measurement Check wiri
129. Comp Error Indicates a problem in Recalibrate the transmitter If problem the previous calibration persists contact the CSC Cal Slope Error A slope error has occurred as Check sensor and recalibrate transmitter If the result of the previous the problem persists contact the CSC calibration RTD Cal RTD calibration is not Recalibrate the RTD If problem persists Tolerance within tolerance contact the CSC Therm Cal Thermistor calibration Recalibrate the thermistor If problem Tolerance is not within tolerance persists contact the CSC Tune Stability Calibration measurement Check stability configuration or replace not stabilized sensor Amp Failure Overrange condition on Check sensor and transmitter connections raw measurement Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Extended Status Process measurement mA Under Range Measurement under or Reconfigure range or correct process error mA Over Range over configured range Comp Under Range Measurement under or Reconfigure compensation or correct process Comp Over Range Over compensation range error Disp Under Range Primary measurement Check sensor connection Select Test gt Go Disp Over Range is too low or too high On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Unstable Temp Unstable temperature Check ATC connection Verify process measurement temperature Select Test gt Go On Line
130. Comp Temp 8 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 11 1 0 Temp Comp Val 8 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 11 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 9 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 12 1 0 Temp Comp Val 9 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 12 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 10 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 13 1 0 Temp Comp Val 10 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 13 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 11 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 14 1 0 Temp Comp Val 11 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 14 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 12 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 15 1 0 Temp Comp Val 12 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 15 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 13 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 16 1 0 Temp Comp Val 13 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 16 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 14 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 17 1 0 Temp Comp Val 14 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 17 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 15 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 18 1 0 Temp Comp Val 15 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 18 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 16 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 19 1 0 Temp Comp Val 16 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 19 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 17 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 20 1 0 Temp Comp Val 17 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 20 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 18 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 21 1 0 Temp Comp Val 18 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 21 1 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 19 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 1 2 0 Temp Comp Val 19 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 1 2 2 Temp Comp Temp 20 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 2 2 0 Temp Comp Val 20 2 99 99 Temp Comp Temp 21 2 0 Temp Comp Temp 18 3 0 Temp Comp Val 21 2 99 99 Temp Comp Val 18 3 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 1 3 0 Temp Comp Temp 19 3 0 Temp Comp Val 1 3 0 Temp Comp Val 19 3 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 2 3 0 Temp Comp Temp 20 3 0 Te
131. D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sensor Mfg Date 1 15 90 Cal Point 1 0 UNUSED 0 Cal Offset 1 0 25 UNUSED 1 101654e 033 Cal Point 2 10000 UNUSED 0 Cal Offset 2 0 Sensor Id Number 05 00 Cal Point 3 10000 Input Type 21 Cal Offset 3 0 Device Type 00 Cal Point 4 10000 Manufacture Date 12 30 35 Cal Offset 4 0 Minor Revision Code 00 Cal Point 5 10000 Major Revision Code 01 Cal Offset 5 0 Max Request Length 18 Cal Point 6 10000 Max Reply Length 18 Cal Offset 6 0 Max Param Number 00 Cal Point 7 10000 4 mA Cal Offset 3000 Cal Offset 7 0 20 mA Cal Offset 3000 Cal Point 8 10000 Misc Flags 81 Cal Offset 8 0 Freq Strategy Flg 00 Cal Point 9 10000 Database Chng Cntr cd Cal Offset 9 0 99 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters Table 16 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value UNUSED 61 Cal Point 10 10000 UNUSED b3 Cal Offset 10 0 UNUSED 00 Cal Point 11 10000 UNUSED 01 Cal Offset 11 0 UNUSED b8 Cal Point 12 10000 UNUSED Ob Cal Offset 12 0 UNUSED b8 Damping 0 UNUSED Ob 4 mA TON Count 403 378 UNUSED cl 20 mA TON Count 8017 203 UNUSED 5 238894e 041 UNUSED 5 918636e 039 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 1 654361e 023 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 1 762151e 038 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 5 920878e 039 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00 UNUSED 0 Comm Turnaround 00 UNUSED 0 Diag Error Code 00 00 UNUSED 00 00 UNUSED 5 852216e 03
132. Device ceccccccccccesssssssncccececececsssesecaccecceecsssssenseceeseceecesssnsnacess 79 Procedure for a HART Device eeeeecesccccccececsssensccccecccecesssseacecececsessssacceceeecessssentaceseess 80 A A O 81 Identifier Tab Screen saniar a Max eSeceniace dl sash 75 toate sb aac teoud Sead a feeceden edi sibs saad ee eais 81 FOR Com Dt A a atan 81 Hartley a OR DE SET PIE ACRE SRI ED RR 82 Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen 83 FoxGom DEVICE it E A E dias 83 HART DIETE S EN A AO A AA eee ee 84 Database Report ares dee che led o el eo OY tea a asset 86 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters ocoooonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonncnnononononcnnnnrnnnncnnnnnens 89 Device Data Screen wiccicccccccsssscsccccccccssssssesccccceceesessesesccceceeseussesesccsscessessessssscsccssceuuensasscesesseuaaes 89 a A O 90 O A 90 REZErO EE casa ton cat noia setae E E ohn eet 91 N Pointe Calibration idad cess Meee Seat dace dei Nee ise Maa eee 91 RENE A unten A A A Goveuieousunoueesteeaceonenmeoeeccesys 92 Custom Input Curve a A A sakes AA A EE Ra 93 Enable Custom GCutve stein cost feet cd dal Votes et 94 Restore Factor Cab ads 95 Restore Factory MA A ini 95 mA Calibration ta cannes cen E ET E ET EE EEE A 95 SGN SUI ALOT i aesae a en det te tad aes Bist 97 Identifier Tab Screen AN 97 Transmitter Parameters Tab Screen eceeesssseccccecececssseseaccecececsesssnacceceecessnsssntnaceseceeceenes 98 Database Reporta E 99 Append
133. Device This function causes the positioner to be rebooted A CAUTION The device behaves as if the power supply were switched off and on This can cause a process upset Write Protect This function enables or disables write protection for valve parameters If Write Protect is enabled the positioner is write protected and inadvertent changing of positioner configuration data is prevented 240 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Configuration Identifier Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration Owner Tag Name Instr Location Figure K 3 Sample SRD991 Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the positioner configuration filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 241 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Parameters Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration x Identifier Parameters Configuration Characterization Travel Alarms Tuning Options m Messages Model Code Bee Message l Instrument Message 2 Message 2 m Serial
134. ETA electrode voltage MI 021 391 Positive Electrode Needed Negative Electrode Needed Setup MultiRange Setup Setup needed Check that Configuration and Contact Inputs 1 and 2 are set up properly Extended Status Process Process Problems Signal Lock Signal lock is on Check that Contact Inputs 1 and 2 are activated by an external set of contacts or switch Pulses Lag Total Totalizer putting out Reconfigure totalizer display so that each pulse pulses at the maximum represents a larger volume rate but falling behind the actual total Total Rollover Total exceeds limit of Reconfigure total format if necessary and reset totals configured format AtoD Electronics problem Service is required Calibration Failed Alarms High Flow Flow above configured Make process change or reconfigure alarm setpoint high flow rate Low Flow Flow below configured low flow rate High Forward Total above configured Make process change or reconfigure Tot Alm Setpt and Total 1 High Fwd Tot 1 reset totals High Forward Total above configured Total 2 High Fwd Tot 2 Empty Pipe Transmitter thinks Make process change or if not empty check wiring and pipe is insufficiently recalibrate full to make measurements 131 MI 024 495 October 2010 HART Device Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Table 24 Transmitter Status Error Messages HART Devices Message Explanation Recommended Action HART S
135. Error A slope error has Check sensor and recalibrate transmitter If the occurred as the result of the previous calibration problem persists contact the CSC RTD Cal Tolerance RTD calibration is not within tolerance Recalibrate the RTD If problem persists contact the CSC Therm Cal Thermistor calibration Tolerance is not within tolerance Tune Stability Calibration measurement not stabilized Amp Failure Overrange condition on raw measurement Recalibrate the thermistor If problem persists contact the CSC Check stability configuration or replace sensor Check sensor and transmitter connections Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Extended Status Process mA Under Range Measurement under or Reconfigure range or correct process error mA Over Range over configured range Comp Under Range Measurement under or Reconfigure compensation or correct process Comp Over Range over compensation range error Disp Under Range Primary measurement Check sensor connection Select Test gt Go Disp Over Range is too low or too high On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Unstable Temp Unstable temperature Check ATC connection Verify process measurement temperature Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Unstable Meas Unstable process Check measurement sensor connection Select measu
136. Figure H 4 Sample Vortex Low Flow Cut In Screen FoxCom Device 183 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters Low Flow Cut In Selection x The Increment and Decrement button will change the Low Flow Cut In value to the next legal value The Auto button will request the device to calculate the best Low Flow Cut In Value Press Continue when done Low Flow Cut In nerement Automatic l 7 88202 Dectement 1 Cancel Continue Help Caneel Come tp Figure H 5 Sample Vortex Low Flow Cut In Screen HART Device 4 Wait while the new Low Flow Cut In value is set 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic control mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required However the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the output to the output of a specific receiving device FoxCom Device The procedure to perform a mA Calibration on a FoxCom device is 1 E PA E ee A 184 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual control mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output Set the Step Size from the menu 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0
137. Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Calibration This procedure adjusts the 4 to 20mA output signal of the transmitter 280 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by entering the Measured Value and pressing the Apply button Repeat this procedure until the Measured Value equals the value to be calibrated Press Continue to change signal and when finished m Calibrate 4m Output Measured Value fs m E Zune Wotput Apply Help Figure L 23 Sample mA Calibration Screen As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required However the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the output to the output of a specific receiving device To do this insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring Perform the following procedure 1 mt ae ee ay Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output Enter the value from the mA meter in the Measured Value field on your screen and select Apply Repeat Step 4 until the Measured Value equals the va
138. For each measurement you have a row The first column contains the measurement number followed by the date and time Beginning with the fourth column the measured curve values are displayed Example for Microsoft Access In Microsoft Access open your database Choose File gt External Data gt Import For the file type select Text File and select the desired file with the ending _TRD txt The Access Import Assistant guides you through the definition of the import format The fields are separated by tabs 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 Import the file The imported information is displayed in several columns For each measurement you have a row The first column contains the measurement number followed by the date and time Beginning with the fourth column the measured curve values are displayed Save as Default Save as Default saves the current configuration as the default template for File gt New The default templates are stored in the subdirectory tables C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC tables If you changed the default template of a device and you want to restore the initial default template copy the appropriate template file of a device with the extension DAT from the directory C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC The template files are composed of the following strings def device type _H for HART only and the extension DAT Reading Device Data When the IFDC PC20 is connected to a device via File gt Co
139. Input 3 gt Up Limit Input 2 lt Low Limit Transmitter temperature out of range Transmitter can be configured to continue operating and use a default temperature for measurement compensation Transmitter temperature out of range Transmitter can be configured to continue operating and use a default temperature for measurement compensation Input 3 lt Low Limit Transmitter temperature out of range Transmitter can be configured to continue operating and use a default temperature for measurement compensation Input 2 0 Transmitter temperature out of range Transmitter can be configured to continue operating and use a default temperature for measurement compensation 2F Offline Cfg w Err Replace amplifier a Error message disappears when cause of error returns to within acceptable limits b 860 Transmitter only c 820 Transmitter only d 820 and 860 Transmitters only 73 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 820 860 or I A Series Pressure Transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurator ReZero Transmitter Point Calibration ReRange mA Calibration Restore Default The ReZero and Point Calibration procedures adjust the transmitter output The ReZero procedure zeros the transmitter at the Lower Range Value LRV
140. Instruction MI 024 495 October 2010 Intelligent Field Device Configurator IFDC For Use with I A Series Systems and PC20 for Use with Windows Based PCs AAA Invensys Foxboro MI 024 495 October 2010 Contents A cessdvesnssccoctangenies cas evennuessayacesahaeeoan cobexha easel KE EEE SPEE Eer NEE Es ESN Teer erse xiii Tables mas a tr Site ees SEARE AE AEE ENAA EE NAE E xix Preface A xxi RA bokuto a LETE To t YEE AI E ETENE EEA EA TEE 1 OVERVIEW E E E E REN AEE E TE EN E a se A 1 Field Devices Supported adria da eo nso e sa i 2 TTD EEE EEE EEA A E ore E N 3 BOO ed 5 Standard Equipment with FoxCom Modem vencidas ardilla 6 Standard Equipment with HART Modem eiii iia 6 Optional Equipment a la o 6 Field Device Restrictions ssssscccccececesessessccececececessesecaccececcsssensnacceceeecesssseseaceseececeeesseaaees 7 EDESA ogestulicoddewses apeiaapes aubeostonestehccourets 7 PDO A ee ahaa dsl come E ROO 7 Software Version 2 0 Enhancements ssssccccccececessenecccececececsssenecacceceeecsesssentcceceeceesesenaecs 8 Software Version 2 2 Enhancements ssssccccccccecessssensccececececsssssecaccecececsssssentcceseeceesssenaes 8 Software Version 2 3 Enhancements ssssccccccccecessesenccececececessssecaccecceecsesssencceceeceesseenaees 9 Software Version 3 0 ate ee eed oes e neo edo ne ote 9 Softwate Versi n Sill variety a tddi 9 Reference Documents cccccccccecesssssssccccecececesss
141. M CORON CORIOLIS METER DEFAULT LOCAT Figure G 3 Sample CFT 15 Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 169 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters Units Tab Screen CFT15 Transmitter Configuration is o TE li C Runta Figure G 4 Sample CFT15 Units Tab Screen Field Entry Measurement Mass Flow Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom Density Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom Temperature Units Select R F C K or Custom Volume Flow Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom Totalization Total By Select By Mass or By Volume Total Units Select from menu of choices or select Custom On Slug Select Run Total or Stop Total Total Format Select from menu of choices 170 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Outputs Tab Screen CFT15 Transmitter Configuration xi Identifier Units Outputs Curent Solids Flow Tube Modbus m Pulse Output Pulse Mode Pulse Trip ro kg Damping Upper Range o kg Totalize Option f
142. M125 Display Totalizer Tab Sereno ota 143 Sample CFT10 Device Data Sera A id 147 Sample CFT10 ReZero Calibration Screen iii 151 Sample CFT10 mA Calibration Screen id Ra Dd 153 sample CFT10 Identifier Tab Screen eee 154 Sample CFT10 Uns Tab e es did 155 Sample CFT10 Pulse Output Tab Sereeli cintas iaa lr ia 156 Sample CFT10 mA Mode Tab Soren 157 Sample CFT10 Alarms a o ae 158 Sample CFL 10 Solids Configuration Tab Sres 159 Sample CET 10 Flowtube Parameters Tab cren ds 160 sample CET15 Device D ta red a aTi iis 163 Sample CFT15 ReZero Calibration Screen sesesesseesesesesesesesesesesesestsrsrsrsrtrtrerrrerereeeeees 167 Sample CFT15 Identifier Tab Screen ti did bs 169 Sample CEILS Units Tab Screen aia deb 170 Figures G5 G 6 67 ES G 9 H 1 H 2 H 3 H 4 H 5 H 6 H 7 H 8 H 9 H 10 H 11 H 12 ie 122 L3 1 4 LS 16 17 L8 19 L10 I 11 1 12 J 1 J 2 J 3 J 4 J 5 J 6 J 7 J 8 J 9 J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13 K 1 K 2 K 3 K 4 K 5 K 6 MI 024 495 October 2010 Sample CET 5 Outputs lab Screens ai at Pes ve 171 Sample CELS Current Tab Sereen nrn e HS aaa 172 Sample CET15 Solids Tab Screener onea ct 173 Sample CFT15 Flowtube Tab Screen srt css 174 Sample CFT15 Modbus Tab Secreta dd 175 Sample Vortex Device Data Screen FoxCom Device ivcrciic ivan eicdcc cinc ascieta 179 Sample Vortex Device Data Screen HART Device iia 180 Sample Vortex Res menoin uian a a N eiat 182 Sample Vortex Low Flow Cut In Screen FoxCom Device c
143. Maintenance MI 021 384 Table 21 Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages Code Error Message Recommended Action 02 ROM Checksum Error Contact the CSC 0C Hardware Failure Check line frequency reference voltage per the power supply tests procedure in MI 021 384 If voltage is incorrect install a new power supply assembly If voltage is correct the electronics module may be defective 0D ShortWire BadSwitch Install new electronics module 10 Amplifier Bad Install new electronics module 11 Amplifier Bad Install new electronics module 12 Coil Amp Electrodes Check if the correct flowtube size is being used for the process flow range If correct rerange the transmitter for greater flow rate Check for a buildup of material in the flowtube If present clean inside of the flowtube 120 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 21 Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages Continued Code Error Message Recommended Action 13 Electrodes Wiring See if a buildup of material on the electrodes has occurred If so clean the inside of the flowtube If not check the electrodes and replace if defective 14 OpenWire Coil LoDrve Check the coil wire connections If the connections are OK disconnect the coil drive wires from the transmitter and measure the resistance between the wires It should be between 1 and 100 Q Also measure the resis
144. Mass Flowmeters Database Report Table 28 Sample Database Report MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 20 Neg Phase Cal 3 0 Tag Number TEST TAG NUM Neg Phase Cal 4 0 Tag Name CORIOLIS METER RTD Res to Temp 1 0 Device Name CORO01 RTD Res to Temp 2 40 Geo Location DEFAULT LOCAT RTD Res to Temp 3 0 Mass Flow Units kg s RTD Res to Temp 4 0 Density Units kg m3 l Pulse Width 1 0 Temperature Units K l Pulse Width 2 1 Total Units kg l Pulse Width 3 0 Vol Flow Units l s l Pulse Width 4 0 Comp A Label COMP A Clock Calibration 5e 007 Comp B Label COMP B Xmtr Serial Num 1 Slug Flow 10 06 Xmtr Manuf Plant la Pulse Out Slope 1 Cur Slope Trim 1 Pulse Out Offset 0 Cur Offset Trim 0 Current Out Slope 1 Dbase Chng Count ff Current Out Offset 0 Rollover Total 10000 Mass Flow Slope 1 Init Required 00 Density Slope 1 Processor Brd Temp 89 Temperature Slope 1 Current Brd Temp 88 Total Slope 1 RTD Ohms 83 31393 Vol Flow Slope 1000 Device Type 20 Mass Flow Offset 0 Xmtr Serial No 1 Density Offset 0 Plant Code la Temperature Offset 0 Major Rev Number 30 34 Total Offset 0 Minor Rev Number 30 30 Vol Flow Offset 0 Firmware Update No 30 30 30 Density Comp A 800 Diagnostic Error 00 00 Density Comp B 1200 Totalize Option 02 Density Ref Temp 0 Thermal Exp A 02 Thermal Exp B 0 Pulse O
145. N cua dha 186 Identifier Tab Serena ita 186 Flow Parameters Tab Screen oooococcccnononononnnononnnonannononcnnnnonononnonnnnnn nono nnanno nono nnnncnnnannnnnnnnnnss 188 Options and Piping Tab Sres 189 Database Report art dal nal hte tl de 191 Appendix I 8701 TEC Transmitters ii io 193 Device Data Sctee iaa 193 Error Messages tn aa 194 Calibrationtooins is tots das re ne de at ales med tata dedo e ta aa 195 Bench Galibration ta ed oe dean a a E E E AE 196 Solution T PointOfk tuia ii aiada 197 a A Bc te es Pe nen Care 197 Soltitioit 2 Pointe sc sse eae As re ee o e e he on ee OE ae 198 Temperature Sensor Galibratiaitess tania o io 199 mA Galabration scada 200 Configuration A as 202 Identifier Tab Screen idas 202 Sensor Tab Sereno daa 203 Measurement Tab Screen eeeesessccccccecessssensccececececseseseaccecececssssnenacesceeecsssesentceeeseeeeeneeeas 204 Mise Tab O NT 205 Application Tab Screen a O 206 Database Reportar tina dd E reaa AEAEE EEI Sa 207 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORDP ISE Transmitters seeeeseseeeeseeesseseressresesreeseeresesrereseseees 213 Device Data Screen x izes NA AA SOE EE OS UE oe 213 Error Messages A AA A AAA ves Asta AAA 214 Calibrationessashet A iets A e ttt E EE a ee 216 1 Point Manual Calibration eececccceeeesesseseccccecececsssssccccceccecesssseaacceceeecessssenaceceseeesenseeas 216 2 Point Manual Calibration eeceecesccccccececsessnsccccecececesssecccecececsesssenancceeeceecesssntncec
146. On Fault y Activates when fault condition occurs Blank Does not activate when fault condition occurs Alarm 2 Similar to Alarm 1 Current Tab Screen CFT15 Transmitter Configuration Ed Identifier Units Outputs Current Solids Flow Tube Modbus Preset y Lower Range m 4 20 m4 Output 1 m Mode Upper Range Damp y v Lower Range Preset fs 4 20 m Dutput 2 m Mode Upper Range Damp f0 00sec Preset 0 5 r 4 20 m Dutput 3 m Mode Preset y Upper Range Lower Range Ty Damp 0 00 sec Preset 10 5 Cancel Epp Help Figure G 6 Sample CFT15 Current Tab Screen Field Entry 4 20 mA Output 1 mA Mode Select Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow Solids Preset or Off Upper Range Enter value if mA Mode is not Off or Preset Lower Range Enter value if mA Mode is not Off or Preset Damp If mA Mode is not Off or Preset select one of eight choices from no damping to 16 seconds Preset Enter value if mA Mode is Preset 172 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 4 20 mA Output 2 Similar to 4 20 mA Output 1 4 20 mA Output 3 Similar to 4 20 mA Output 1 Solids Tab Screen CFT15 Transmitter Configuration x Identifier Units Outputs Current Solids Flow Tube Modbus m Component 4 Tag COMP 4 Density 800
147. Optional used for reference only Tag Date Enter a date It is possible to enter any valid future or past date For example this field may be used for storing the date of the last calibration or a future planned maintenance date Message Enter maximum of 32 characters This field can be used for company internal designations device numbers for material industry business final alignment of device startup of device or other purpose 82 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen FoxCom Device 860 Transmitter Configuration x Identifier Transmitter Parameter Configuration r Measurement 1 Square root mode Units inH20 Lower Range Value Custom e r Measurement 2 Swap JA Square root mode Measures 1and2 Units inH20 Lower Range Value pa SES MV Turn Off custom Upper Range Value fi D0 Upper Range Value fi 00 Upper Range Limit 100 Upper Range Limit 100 Sqroot Low Flow Mode External Zero Output Mode m Output Fail Safe Active Cl Enable Digital Down Scale 10 ot Flav Disable C 4 20 mA C Up Scale Output Damping 16 0 sec Temperature Fail Strategy C Fail Cont inue Cancel Apply Help Figure A 10 Sample Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen FoxCom D
148. PROFIBUS Version SAD991 140Series Figure 26 Sample Profibus Slave Configuration Screen 63 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 64 4 Troubleshooting NOTE For IFDC check the latest Intelligent Field Device Configurator IFDC Release Notes B0400QL for the list of known problems IFDC PC20 Error Messages If a problem occurs during IFDC PC20 operation an error message is usually displayed that can help you localize the fault and take appropriate action If this does not work use the following general troubleshooting procedure and the flowcharts in Figure 27 or Figure 28 1 Check the loop wiring and verify that power is present on all devices and that all devices are connected properly Check the LEDs on the FoxCom modem to determine the modem status When the Listen light is on the modem is in the receive mode ready to accept incoming data When the IFDC PC20 attempts to communicate with the device the modem is in the Send mode and the Talk light blinks on and off If the Listen light is not on make sure you are set to the correct communication port To determine whether the problem is a communication failure a computer failure or a device failure substitute an HHT for the computer and see if the problem persists If the computer is OK and communication is OK use the IFDC Test Diagnostic functions to check device status If a FAIL condition is present take action to correc
149. Readback instead of the real position of the actuator valve This set of parameters is intended only for commissioning and maintenance reasons Database Report Table 40 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Device Type 0x24 X16 Value 0 Geographic Location INSTR LOCATION X17 Value 0 Manufacturing Date 00 20 2104 Y17 Value 2 802596929e 045 Firmware Revision 0x1 X18 Value 0 Device Name DevNam Y18 Value 0 Sensor Number Oxff X19 Value 0 Tag Number FT103A Y19 Value 9 248569865e 044 Calibration Date 08 20 2087 X20 Value 0 Instrument S N INSTR SER NU Y20 Value 0 Actuator S N ACT SERIAL N X21 Value 0 Valve S N VALVE SER NU Y21 Value 0 Message 1 MESSAGE1 Flow Characteristic 0x0 Message 2 MESSAGE2 Travel Pos Units Oxf2 Message 3 MESSAGE3 Temperature Units 0x21 Maintenance Info MESSAGE4 Air Supply Pressure Ox7 Calibration Info MESSAGE5 Outlet Pressure Unit 0x7 Device Options 0x0 Lower Travel Stop 0 Fabrication Number 0 Upper Travel Stop 0 Hardware Revision 0x2 Cutoff 0 Mounting Compensation 0x3 Cutoff Hyst 0 Power Up Action 0x1 Stroke 73556496 Spring Type 0x1 Response Time Inc 0 Actuator Action 0x1 Response Time Dec 0 253 MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 40 Sample Database Report Continued Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and
150. Recalibrate the transmitter If problem persists previous calibration contact the CSC RTD Cal Tolerance RTD calibration is Recalibrate the RTD If problem persists contact the not within tolerance CSC 215 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP SE Transmitters Table 37 Transmitter Status Error Messages Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Cal Comp Error Indicates a problem Recalibrate the transmitter If problem persists in the previous contact the CSC calibration Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 870ITPH transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurators 1 Point Manual Calibration 2 Point Manual Calibration Automatic Calibration Temperature Sensor mA Calibration 1 Point Manual Calibration This option permits you to set a calibration point 1 point offset using a known reference solution buffer 1 Select 1 Point Calibration from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 870pH Manual One Point Calibration x Enter the solution value and the calibrator s initials then press Continue Calibrate Solution Value fo Range 2 00 to 16 00 pH Calibrator s Initials Rw Calibrated Date 08 20 2003 Cancel Help Figure J 2 Sample 870ITPH 1 Point Manual Calibration Screen 3 Enter the solution v
151. Review configuration for error messages and configuration make required changes Coil problem Transmitter unable to Check coil wiring at flowtube and transmitter generate a reliable Cycle power measurement of coil current If the problem persists service is required Loop problem Transmitter Transmitter error Cycle power If problem still exists service is failed required Novram error Novram error Cycle power If problem still exists service is required Additional Status 2 Alarms exist An alarm exists See Device Specific Status Signal Locked Signal lock is on Check that Contact Inputs 1 and 2 are activated by an external set of contacts or switch AZL Active 133 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Table 24 Transmitter Status Error Messages HART Devices Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Total Rollover Total exceeds limit of Reconfigure total format if necessary and reset configured format totals Pulses Lag Totalizer putting out pulses Reconfigure totalizer display so that each pulse Total at the maximum rate but represents a larger volume falling behind the actual total Electrode Error Unreliable measurement of electrode voltage Check signal wiring between flowtube and transmitter Also see MI 020 391 Analog Output Fixed Analog Output Fixed Calibration You can
152. Screen 163 Error Messages 164 Comments Function 50 Compare Function 50 Configuration 130 266 140 266 820 81 83 186 328 Index Index 860 81 870ITCR 294 870ITEC 202 870ITPH 220 CFT10 154 CFT15 169 I A Series Pressure 81 IMT10 IMT20 124 IMT25 138 318 IMT96 318 Non Foxboro Devices 306 RTT10 97 RTT20 110 SRD991 241 Configuration Function 49 Connecting to a Device 41 Custom Curve Enable RTT10 94 D Database Report 820 86 83 191 860 86 870ITCR 299 870ITEC 207 870ITPH 227 CFT10 161 CFT15 176 I A Series Pressure 86 IMT10 IMT20 126 IMT25 144 IMT96 324 RTT10 99 RTT20 117 SRD991 253 Device Characteristic Info Window 26 Device Data Screen 130 262 140 262 820 71 83 179 860 71 870ITCR 285 870ITEC 193 870ITPH 213 285 CFT10 147 CFT15 163 MI 024 495 October 2010 329 MI 024 495 October 2010 I A Series Pressure 71 IMT10 IMT20 119 IMT25 129 IMT96 313 Non Foxboro Devices 305 RTT10 89 RTT20 101 SRD991 231 Device Selection 38 Device Status Screen 140 263 Device Toolbar 41 44 Digital Output Function Set 54 Downloading Database Information to a Device 47 E Enhancements Version 2 0 8 Version 2 2 8 Version 2 3 9 Error Messages 820 72 83 180 860 72 870ITCR 286 870ITEC 194 870ITPH 214 CFT10 148 CFT15 164 Device Diagnostic 66 Device Status 65 I A Series Pressure 72 IFDC PC20 65 IMT10 IMT20 120 IMT25 130 IMT96 313 RTT20 102 SRD991 233 Error Trace Info Window 2
153. Select ReRange to change the current range settings or Continue to complete the operation 8 If reranging enter the new LRV and URV on the ReRange screen and select Continue The ReZero screen reappears Select Continue to complete the operation 9 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Pressure Re Zero Calibration Figure A 2 Sample ReZero Screen 75 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters Point Calibration This function enables you set the Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value and to calibrate the device using points that may or may not be these values The procedure follows 1 Select Point Calibration from the Calibration menu or the Calibration icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 If your device is configured for Square Root mode select Continue to change to Linear mode for Calibration The configuration is automatically placed back in Square Root mode when leaving Calibration If your device is configured for Linear mode ignore this step 4 Select 1 Point or 2 Point Calibration and Continue 860 Transmitter Configuration Boiler Flow Plant 3B West pos Figure A 3 Sample Point Calibration Screen 5 Enter your desired Lower Calibration Point apply the lower calibration point pressure to the device a
154. Set Point Empty Pipe y On Blank Off Turn On All Turns all alarms on Turn Off All Turns all alarms off Contacts Tab Screen IMT25 Device Configuration x Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer Contacts Contact 1 Function Jack Alarm y Contact 1 Operation Normally Open y Contact 2 Function M Contact 2 Operation N ormally Open gt Relay 1 Relay Function Off v Relay Operation n ormally Open y Relay Alarm High Rate v Suppress Relay Yes Ho Relay 2 Relay Function Alarm y Relay Operation Normally Open y Relay Alarm Low Rate y Suppress Relay C Yes No Cancel Apply Help Figure E 8 Sample IMT25 Contacts Tab Screen Field Entry Contacts Contact 1 Function Select Off Ack Alarm Reset Net Total Reset Gr Total Reset All Total Multi range or Signal Lock Contact 1 Operation If Contact 1 Function is not Off select Normally Open or Normally Closed Contact 2 Function Similar to Contact 1 Function Contact 2 Operation Similar to Contact 1 Operation Relay 1 141 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Field Entry Relay Function Select Off Alarm Alarm amp Diag Diagnostics Flow Direction or Test Mode Relay Alarm If Relay Function is not Off select High Rate Low Rate High Forward Total 1
155. Size 00 85 Reserved 00 00 00 Manifold Setting 1 Slave Revision Numbe 259 192 Appendix I 870ITEC Transmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 870ITEC transmitters in regard to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Error Messages Calibration Configuration o Database Report Device Data Screen BE Device Data Figure I 1 Sample 870ITEC Device Data Screen 193 MI 024 495 October 2010 Error Messages Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Table 35 Transmitter Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Transmitter is re If problem persists select initializing on reset Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Error Indicates an active diagnostic error See diagnostic error message to determine problem and corrective action Secondary Status Error Secondary Status Fields Indicates an error in secondary status The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the screen display Measurement Unstable process Check sensor connection Select Test gt Error measurement Go On Line If this does not clear problem
156. Steps 4 and 5 Select Continue to save the calibration to the transmitter Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 185 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters m Calibration 9 E Zimne Gotu Figure H 7 Sample mA Calibration Screen HART Device Configuration Identifier Tab Screen YortexTransmitter Configuration Figure H 8 Sample Vortex Flowmeter Identifier Tab Screen FoxCom Device 186 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters with a FoxCom device NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only with FoxCom device VortexTransmitter Configuration Flow Parameters Options and Piping Figure H 9 Sample Vortex Flowmeter Identifier Tab Screen HART Device Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Date Enter maximum of 10 characters Optional used for reference
157. T output devices for example SRD991 Intelligent Positioner For Redundant Parent ECB202 with the configuration HWTYPE SWTYPE 216 or 245 for HART transmitters and with the configuration HWTYPE SWTYPE 218 or 245 for HART output devices for example SRD991 Intelligent Positioner ECB202 For redundancy with the configuration HWTYPE SWTYPE 216 or 245 for HART transmitters For redundancy with the configuration HWTYPE SWTYPE 218 or 245 for HART output devices for example SRD991 Intelligent Positioner NOTE For more information on the ICC refer to Integrated Control Configurator B0193AV and Integrated Control Block Description B0193AX If you make any changes in the field with a Hand Held Terminal HHT PC10 Configurator or PC20 Configurator always upload the changes to the I A Series system database Then compare the I A Series system and the device database See Compare Function on page 50 PC20 The PC20 Configurator hardware software package is designed to run from a PC with a Windows NT Windows 95 Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating system It does not run with a Windows 3 1 or Windows CE operating system NOTE Windows 98 or Windows ME is not a Foxboro approved corporate software operating system However problems are not expected when using PC20 with the Windows 98 or Windows ME operating system The package includes an external modem that allows operation with any Windows compat
158. T96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Set the Step Size 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply 6 Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown on the screen display 7 Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 When finished select Continue The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurement m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by setting the adjustment amount and pressing the Apply button When finished press Continue Calibrate 4m Output Step Size 0 5 m C 20m4 Output Cumulative Change 0 m Apply Help Cancel Figure O 2 Sample IMT96 mA Calibration Screen Reset Totals This procedure resets the transmitter totals The Net Forward and Reverse Totals are reset as a group The Grand Total is individually reset 1 Select Reset Totals from the Calibration menu or the Reset Totals icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Select the device total s to reset to zero You can select Net Forward and Reverse Totals or Grand Total Then select Continue 316 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 201
159. There is an option of displaying the measured value on the local indicator of the transmitter With the Display selection you can specify whether the indicator displays the measured value in the standard or user defined special units Engineering Units or displays the analog output in mA Analog Output or as 0 to 100 Percent of Range If a local indicator is not used configure None The Keys selection controls the possibility of enabling and disabling the keys for URV and LRV independently of each other This prevents unintentional change of URV and LRV The Damping and Zero trim functions are always active via the keys With Frequency Rejection it is possible to adapt the trouble suppression to the line frequency Profibus Alarms Tab Screen For a Profibus device it is possible to define alarm conditions for the Out signal Four alarms can be defined Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Hystheresis When a measurement value is residing around a measurement limit that is HIGH Data Limit it is possible that the alarm indicator will trigger excessively as the value drifts above and below the limit To prevent this from occurring a Hysteresis parameter is introduced This parameter which is defined in of measurement span allows the measurement value to pass through the trigger value but requires the measurement value to change span in the opposite
160. Trip Enter value if Pulse mode is Total Preset Value Enter value if Pulse mode is Preset Totalize Option Select 5 Hz 10 Hz 15 Hz or Off 156 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 mA Mode Tab Screen ICFT Device Configuration Figure F 7 Sample CFT10 mA Mode Tab Screen Field Entry mA Source If Pulse Current is 4 20 mA select Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow Solids Preset or Off If Pulse Current is 0 20 mA select Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids mA Range Select 4 20 mA or 0 20 mA Lower Range Value Enter value if mA Source is Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids Upper Range Value Enter value if mA Source is Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids Damping If mA Source is Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds Preset Value Enter value if mA Source is Preset 157 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters Alarms Tab Screen CFT Device Configuration x Identifier Units Pulse Output m Mode Alarms Solids Configuration Flow tube Parameters Alarm 1 T a M al Fault P while alarm off ype Mass Flow High arm on Faults Ower O Level 300 000 kg s Hysteresis sb 00000 Alarm 2 while alarm off Type Density High y Alarm on Faults A
161. Val 16 3 Chem Comp Val 13 1 Chem Comp Temp 14 1 Temp Comp Temp 17 3 Chem Comp Val 14 1 Temp Comp Val 17 3 Temp Comp Temp 18 3 Chem Comp Temp 15 1 Chem Comp Val 15 1 Chem Comp Temp 16 1 Chem Comp Val 13 2 Chem Comp Val 16 1 Chem Comp Temp 17 1 Chem Comp Temp 14 2 Chem Comp Val 14 2 Chem Comp Val 17 1 Chem Comp Temp 15 2 Chem Comp Temp 18 1 Chem Comp Val 15 2 Chem Comp Val 18 1 Chem Comp Temp 16 2 Chem Comp Temp 19 1 Chem Comp Val 16 2 Chem Comp Val 19 1 Chem Comp Temp 17 2 Chem Comp Temp 20 1 Chem Comp Val 17 2 Chem Comp Val 20 1 Chem Comp Temp 18 2 Chem Comp Temp 21 1 Chem Comp Val 18 2 Chem Comp Val 21 1 Chem Comp Temp 19 2 Chem Comp Temp 1 2 Chem Comp Val 19 2 Chem Comp Val 1 2 Chem Comp Temp 20 2 Chem Comp Temp 2 2 Chem Comp Val 20 2 Chem Comp Val 2 2 Chem Comp Temp 21 2 Chem Comp Temp 3 2 Chem Comp Val 21 2 Chem Comp Val 3 2 ojojojo O joOjOoO O O O OJO O OOOO O OJO OJO O O OJO O OOOO O O OJO O O OJOJO O O O JO O Chem Comp Temp 1 3 ojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojo o OJO O JO JO O OJO O OJOJO OJO O OJO O O OJO JO O O OJO O 301 MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 44 Sample Database Report Continued Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters
162. Value 0 Upper Input Current 5 831554006e 039 X13 Value 0 Output Cal Gain 0 Y13 Value 0 Output Cal Zero 0 X14 Value 0 Calibrate Lower Angl 1 069022572e 040 Y14 Value 0 Calibrate Upper Angl 0 X15 Value 0 Temperature Cal 2 053743029e 041 Y15 Value 0 Calibrate Air Supply 1 591403656e 023 Calibrate Air Supply 107454968 Calibrate Output Min 7 321920847e 014 Calibrate Output Max 9 108440018e 044 Primary Status 0x0 254 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others Table 40 Sample Database Report Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Secondary Status 0x0 Diagnostic Error 0x0 DB Change Count 0x3 Device Sub Type 0x1 Instrument Mode 0x1 Additional Status 0x1 Air Supply Pressure 2 350988982e 038 Air Supply Pressure 0 Output Pressure Min 8 968310172e 044 Output Pressure Max 9 248569865e 044 Auto Start Status 0x1 Reset Status 0x0 Restore Factory 0x0 Write Protect 0x0 255 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and 256 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters regarding the Intelligent Field Device Configurator There are three types of 140 Series transmitters
163. Vortex Flowmeters 870ITEC Electrodeless Conductivity Transmitters 870ITPH pH ORP ISE Transmitters SRD991 Intelligent Positioner 130 140 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Non Foxboro Devices IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters OZIZ UAT IO SHO a gt xxi MI 024 495 October 2010 Preface xxii 1 Introduction Overview The Foxboro Intelligent Field Device Configurator is a software package providing remote bidirectional communications with the Foxboro and Foxboro Eckardt Intelligent Field Devices The software is available in two different versions as follows Model PC20 which includes an external modem for use on a user supplied personal computer The Intelligent Field Device Configurator IFDC which is a software component of an I A Series system Features of the Intelligent Field Device Configurators include Accurate reranging without recalibration Unlimited device database storage on diskette or hard disk Full screen device database display Enhanced device diagnostic capability On line Help and context sensitive Help screens Direct access to Microsoft Word and Excel software if installed Field proven FSK communication RFI EMI protection Communications that do not affect output Remotely set device output to calibrate other devices in the loop Capability to reconfigure copy
164. WN KWON KH DO ON DAWKWNK OO ON OM 1 YN ONMN PC20 and IFDC Feature and Use Differences ia ai 1 Devices Supported A ie chee A ela eee ea A a NE ate ao 2 Reference Documents 1 A A aii 10 Toolbar Features and Deschptins ii A 24 Communications Toolbar Features and Descriptions cooncnccocnnnnnonconnnnoncnnnonnncnnoncnncnnos 25 Top Level Menu Description of PUN CORSA E a e a 29 Device Top Level Menu Description of Functions ccoonccccnnnnnnnnnoncnnononnonnnncnonnnnnnnonnnos 43 Compare Function Possibilities a Saha do con alo silos 50 Raw Inputs Displayed for Various Devices vitoria dr 54 Profibus Master Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ocococnocncnnonocnnnnannannncnnnannnos 60 Profibus slave Pare Actions unnist isinir a a i Ea A S Ra aa 62 Transmitter Status Error Messages 0 tii init niae aana 72 Transmitter Diagnostic Error Messages mi rnisiciinniciaicin ii 73 Sample Database Report R Re EE a 86 Transmitter Status Error Messages iia 90 Sample Database Report escorial dal dr ica 99 Transmitter Status Error Messages for a FoxCom Transmitter comoccocnnnnnnonnnnnnnoncannanancnos 102 Transmitter Status Error Messages for a HART Transmitter cccocoonnonnnnnnnnnnnninnnnannnnannnos 102 Sample Database Report a ia 117 Transmitter Status Error Messages cti A 120 Transmitter Diagnostic Error Mess cascada sdetcesteateead uattstebacotey Megacpeat eablngacsotte 120 Sample Database Report vinci ii ai 126 Transmitter Status Error Messages
165. a 21 PC20 tol IG a ceo is E E aE E A A cita 21 IEDC fo PEL a A a ee E A ER 22 ABO99 Tto PEZ0 IJEDO usos dais lid dit R 23 PC10 to PEZO A a A ransa 23 HART Model 275 Hand Held Configurator to PC20 IFDC cccnociccccnnnnonnnnonanncnananannnnos 23 HHT to PC20 ninia iia 23 PC20 to PGIVABO9IT td 23 Import Export PC20 Database Files to Popular Database Software Programs 44 24 Device Output Protection tacita a 24 A O e E T lacs tian ctedniaeahd semayctand oieade 24 Status Data Adal 25 Info Window a A AAA A AAA 26 Device Characteristic aby e a aos do 26 Aadi Deaan sa ne aaa ber Freer e creer iy erie rrr a OEE 26 Example for Microsoft Excel Software 1 o es 27 Example for Microsoft Access Software vai dci 28 Errof Trace Tab oscars o o TES 28 Top Level Menu Sereen dt ai dia 28 SEUS rd Ar 30 TOC CHOTIOS anyen asl tintin ee A odes tases E hae dren dees sera 30 A O 30 P ssword Security Opto Ns e aa ee e a Ao 30 A caceedaesedyesscasbesagasuetensassuube dis sduceususueyectiease 33 Initial Settings using the INT Plena da o ables 33 Beginning a New Configuration Database simson diia 36 Device Selection and File Operations ie ie lisa 38 IFDC Operation on Solaris with windows off s c ccccscesscsessesescusercteccesseteccessutesceoestnecvencunsess 40 Preconfieurins A ER E a ET A eeaeL 40 Connecting t a Devies da A ADS 4 Device Lop Leyel Menu Screen toss ps ae ed a hal es te era 41 Workshop Environment is Saa a nat ats 45 Trend Dialog
166. ab screen Travel Sum Allows setting alarms on total stroke for maintenance purposes Deadband 246 Enter deadband in percent of stroke Small movements below this value are not included in the travel sum Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Full Strokes Limit Enter the alarm condition in number of full strokes Partial movement larger than the deadband value are included in this total for example four 1 4 strokes are counted as one full stroke Cycle Count Limit Enter the alarm condition in number of cycles Each cycle is a change in value direction any movement up or down which exceeds sensitivity of the device Tuning Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration Figure K 9 Sample SRD991 Tuning Tab Screen Field Entry Increasing Position Proportional Enter proportional gain value Integral Enter reset time in seconds Derivative Enter derivative time in seconds Decreasing Position Proportional Enter proportional gain value Integral Enter reset time in seconds Derivative Enter derivative time in seconds 247 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Field Entry Travel Time Limits Increasing Entering values higher than the defaults slows down response Decreasing Travel time lim
167. ability Variant Z or sec sec sec sec i Cancel Apply Help Figure I 10 Sample 870ITEC Measurement Tab Screen Field Entry Temperature Units Select Celsius or Fahrenheit Mode Select Automatic follows RTD or Manual fixed point Failure Value If Mode is Automatic enter temperature in case RTD fails Manual Temperature If Mode is Manual enter temperature Temperature Sensor Select 2 wire 100 2 wire 1000 3 wire 100 Q or 3 wire 1000 Q RTD or 100 KQ thermistor Measurement Stability Measurement Stability Active y Instrument Stability Measurement Feature On Blank Instrument Stability Measurement Feature Off Stability Time If on enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5 second increments Stability Variant If on enter variant between 1 and 9 Temperature Stability Temperature Stability Active y Instrument Stability Temperature Feature On Blank Instrument Stability Temperature Feature Off Stability Time If on enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5 second increments 204 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Stability Variant If on enter variant between 1 and 9 Misc Tab Screen a a a m m m Figure I 11 Sample 870ITEC Misc Tab Screen Field Entry Diagnostics Leakage y Enable error messages Blank
168. actory mA RTT10 95 ReZero 74 RTT10 Calibration 90 Configuration 97 Database Report 99 Device Data Screen 89 RTT20 Calibration 103 Configuration 110 Database Report 117 Device Data Screen 101 Error Messages 102 Running IFDC PC20 19 S Set Setpoint SRD991 240 Set Update Time Function 53 Shortcut Toolbar 41 Software Installation IFDC 17 Software Installation PC20 17 Specification Information 140 282 SRD991 332 Index Index MI 024 495 October 2010 Calibration 235 Configuration 241 Database Report 253 Device Data Screen 231 Error Messages 233 Test 239 Status Bar 25 Status Function Field Device 51 T Test SRD991 239 Toolbar 24 Top Level Menu Screen 28 Top Level Menu Screen Device 41 Trace Function IFDC 66 Trace Function PC20 66 Trend Dialog 45 V Version 2 0 software enhancements 8 Version 2 2 software enhancements 8 Version 2 3 software enhancements 9 WwW Workshop Environment 45 Write Protect SRD991 240 333 MI 024 495 October 2010 ISSUE DATES JAN 1999 MAR 2000 MAR 2001 JUN 2002 NOV 2002 OCT 2010 Index Vertical lines to the right of text or illustrations indicate areas changed at last issue date iIinvensyss Invensys Operations Management 5601 Granite Parkway Suite 1000 Plano TX 75024 United States of America http www iom invensys com Global Customer Support Inside U S 1 866 746 6477 Outside U S 1 508 549 2424 or contact your local Invensys
169. ad Message Transmitter sent Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Sent a bad message problem contact the CSC Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Received a bad message problem contact the CSC Sensor 1 Sensor 1 malfunction Check and or replace Sensor 1 and associated sensor Failed wiring Sensor 2 Sensor 2 malfunction Check and or replace Sensor 2 and associated sensor Failed wiring Electronics Internal RTT10 tests Replace electronics Failed have failed Intelligent Field Device Configurators ReZero Transmitter N Point Calibration Custom Input Curve ReRange mA Calibration Restore Factory Calibration Restore Factory mA Enable Custom Curve RTT10 calibration allows you to correct the transmitter output for differences between the input sensor and the standard curve for sensors of that type The ReZero and N Point Calibrations 90 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 automatically calculate the temperature points and offset values The custom curve function allows you to enter up to ten sets of points but you must determine the offset values ReZero This function enables you to set your transmitter input to zero The procedure to do this is as follows l So R RS Select ReZero from the Calibration menu or the ReZero icon from the device toolbar Follow the prompt to p
170. age Explanation Recommended Action Device Busy Transmitter is busy Try the command later again Device Malfunction Severe problem Check the other status bits Configuration Changed The configuration of the This flag can be reset with the menu transmitter has been changed item Reset Changed Flag Cold Start Device rebooted Check power supply 263 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Table 41 HART Transmitter Status Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Output Current Fixed The output current is fixed The reason might be that it is in the fail safe state The Device Specific Status may show the reason for the fail safe state When the reason for the fail safe is gone with the menu item Return from Failsafe it is possible to leave this state Analog Output Analog Output out The Primary Value PV exceeds the Saturated of 4 to 20 mA range configured range Check range limits Variable not Primary Electronic or sensor temperature Check device specific status for more out of Limits out of limits information Primary Variable out of Sensor signal out of limits Limits Check device specific status and applied process value Table 42 Device Specific Transmitter Status Message Explanation Recommended Action Internal Calibration There was an error during th
171. al computer and use your existing hardware All PC20 connections between the computer the device and the modem are identical to those used with the PC10 Do not use PC10 and PC20 on the same personal computer in sequence The packages use different drivers You must reboot your system if you want to use the PC10 after using PC20 and vice versa NOTE All hardware used with the ABO991 configurator can be used with the PC20 Install the Windows operating system and load the PC20 software into your personal computer and use your existing hardware All PC20 connections between the computer the device the modem and the optional power supply are identical to those used with the ABO991 Attaching the Modem to the Serial Port Attach your modem to your computer serial port COM1 or COM2 If the computer serial port has a 25 pin connector use a 25 to 9 pin adapter NOTE nm It is possible to use COM port 3 and COM port 4 but you must determine and enter the Base Port Address hex and the Interrupt Request IRQ data MI 024 495 October 2010 2 Installation Connecting the Modem to a Field Device NOTE 1 The loop must have a minimum of 250 ohms between the power supply and the attachment of the modem 2 PC20 can communicate with devices connected in a HART multidrop loop 250 OHM RESISTOR 7 FIELD O DEVICE POWER SUPPLY RS 232 CABLE TO SERIAL PORT OF COMPUTER Figure 2 Anal
172. alue and the calibrator s initials and select Continue 4 Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue 216 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORPASE Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 2 Point Manual Calibration This option permits you to set span and offset using two known reference solutions buffers 1 Select 2 Point Calibration from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue soy ye 870pH Manual Two Point Calibration r Enter the low and high solution values and the calibrator s initials then press Continue Calibrate Low Calibration Point 0 Range 2 00to16 00 pH High Calibration Point fo Calibrator s Initials RW Calibrated Date 08 20 2003 Cancel Help Figure J 3 Sample 870ITPH 2 Point Manual Calibration Screen Enter the high and low solution values and the calibrator s initials and select Continue Immerse the sensor in the low solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating Immerse the sensor in the high solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic m
173. appropriate spot in the file system Close Checks internal copy of the device Checks IFDC internal copy of the device parameters If there are no changes parameters If no changes immediately closes the immediately closes the connection connection Otherwise asks if you wish to Save Otherwise asks if you wish to Save to Device to Device Save Saves all parameters to the existing If compound and block names are known saves filename If saving a the file preconfiguration database use Otherwise drop into Save As Save As Save As Saves the file to a different location Use Select Device dialog box to find the or filename The most popular device associated with the database Use the filename is the user tag number directory path specified for the device and use the block name as the filename Connect to Establishes communication to the Brings up the Device Select dialog box Then Device device connected to the modem connects to the selected device Save to If connected to a device saves the If connected to a device saves the configuration Device new configuration information to _ information the connected device Otherwise Otherwise not available not available Upload If connected to a device restarts If connected to a device restarts uploading the Database Juploading the configuration configuration database from the device again from Device database from the device again 38 3
174. at a constant offset is utilized over the entire sensor curve To view or change the value entered see the note in Custom Input Curve on page 105 2 Point Calibration The RTT20 permits you to select any two temperatures in the region of interest within the configured range of the transmitter You are not required to use the LRV and URV as the calibration points The temperatures must be increasing in value The resulting offsets are then straightline calculated to the LRV and URV Picture an offset line defining the correction to the standard starting from the LRV passing through the two calibration points and continuing to the URV To view or change any value entered see the note in Custom Input Curve section on page 105 3 and 5 Point Calibration The RTT20 permits you to select any three or five temperatures in the region of interest within the configured range of the transmitter The temperature must be increasing in value The resulting offsets are then straightline calculated to the LRV and URV Picture an offset line defining the correction to the standard starting from the LRV passing through the three or five calibration points and continuing to the URV To view or change any values entered see note in Custom Input Curve on page 105 N Point Calibration Procedure 1 Select N Point Calibration from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Select 1 2
175. at field terminals Repeat No Fault Corrected Step 2 Do you still get the same messages Note 1 A battery powered PC may not have enough power to the RS 232 COM port to power the modem Check your PC manual for details regarding power saving adjustments Note 2 The 200 ohms are built into FBM18 FBM39 FBM43 FBM44 FBM46 FBM243 FBM246 and PC20 optional power supply Note 3 Optional Foxboro power supply cannot be used with Coriolis or Magnetic Flow Transmitters Also cannot be used with SRD991 Intelligent Valve Positioner when configured for 4 to 20 mA input Figure 27 PC20 Fault Analysis Repeated Communication Failures FoxCom Protocol 69 MI 024 495 October 2010 4 Troubleshooting HART Protocol This fault analysis Step 1 After launching the program do you always get a message is for repeated Could not initialize the IFD Modem followed by a message after communication clicking the OK button Unable to establish connection Either no failures only modem or no device on the modem was found Fault Corrected 3 Step 2 Under the File menu click on Connect to Device 4 Do you see the same messages as in Step 1 No Increase voltage or reduce loop load Repeat Step 2 Do you still get the same messages Is voltage at device Step 3 Under the Options menu select Settings field terminals at IFD Modem Setup and change the COM port least 16 V dc Repeat Step 2 Do you see the same messages as in St
176. ata Screen Device Data Iof x Tag Number FTIMT25 Device Type IMT25 Rev 1 07 Tag Name Tag Name Device Name DevNam Location Location Model Code IMT25 pDADB10n A Raw Flow 317 53 GPM Forward Total 2797 51 Gal Percent Range 63 9943 Reverse Total 497 98 Gal Net Total 2297 97 Gal Grand Total 2296 93 Gal Figure E 1 Sample IMT25 Device Data Screen 129 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Error Messages FoxCom Device Table 23 Transmitter Status Error Messages FoxCom Devices Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Initializing is required If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Codes to Error diagnostic error determine problem and corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the Status Error secondary status screen display Secondary Status Fields Signal Lock External contact is off Set by user no action required Off Error in Transmitter cannot exit Correct Diagnostic Error or Secondary Status Error also Startup its boot code displayed Empty
177. ated in PC20 is not compatible with a Solaris or Windows version of IFDC Any PC20 database for any device is not compatible with IFDC Solaris version only IFDC to PC20 Beginning with Version 2 2 of PC20 and IFDC any IFDC Windows and Solaris version database for any device other than the Mass Flow Transmitter CFT10 and CFT15 is interchangeable with PC20 For database files generated with IFDC versions before Rev 2 2 the following restrictions have to be considered All IFDC databases for any device created with a Solaris system are not compatible with PC20 All IFDC databases for any device created with a Solaris system are not compatible with IFDC on a Windows based system All IFDC databases for any device other than a Mass Flow Transmitter created on a Windows based system are interchangeable with PC20 Any Mass Flow Transmitter database created in a Solaris or Windows version of IFDC is not compatible in PC20 NOTE IFDC and PC20 versions before Rev 2 2 have several restrictions to exchange the device database files Beginning with Version 2 2 of PC20 and IFDC Windows and Solaris versions the device database format changed to overcome these restrictions It is recommended that after the upgrade to Rev 2 2 all device database files should be stored in the new format use menu File Save This new file format will also be supported in successive versions of the Intelligent Field Device Configur
178. ation MI 024 495 October 2010 Test Allows test tasks and tasks listed under None Calibration Allows calibration tasks and tasks listed under None and Test Configuration Allows configuration changes and all tasks listed under None Test and Calibration Workshop Allows workshop and factory tasks and all tasks listed under None Test Calibration and Configuration not available for IFDC It is possible to configure a different password for each security level with the exception of None NOTE Passwords are case sensitive To enter change a password for a certain security level select the security level from the menu type in the old password if any the new password and the new password again under Confirm Password Then select Apply Password To enter no password for a level leave the New Password and Confirm Password fields blank CAUTION SAT TANA The Workshop level should be limited to the most knowledgeable people others can damage the device Application Options x Directories IFD Modem Setup Password Security Options Startup Options For each Security Level a password may be entered Please select the Security Level enter the Old and New Password Confirm the password and press Apply Password gecsossesoccsosoccseoesososescosoessoososossossesesosossesessesssossossssosssososesseg T Lock out the Run item in the User menu Security Level Configuration y Old Password
179. ators NOTE The old device database format created by IFDC or PC20 versions before Rev 2 2 will no longer be supported after Rev 2 2 Please resave all device database files with the Rev 2 2 release 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 ABO991 to PC20 IFDC HART database files created in ABO991 are not compatible with PC20 and IFDC If you are using ABO991 V3 6 it is possible to write a PC20 specific database file which can be imported to the PC20 software using File gt Import The Import menu item is only available when connected to a device or when an off line configuration dialog is open preconfiguration using File gt Open or File gt New To convert ABO991 database files into PC20 database files 1 Generate the PC20 files using ABO991 V3 6 2 Within PC20 select File gt New Select the same device type as stored in the ABO991 database file 3 Select File gt Import to import the ABO991 database file Select Override Configuration Data Only if only the configuration data should be imported Select Override Full Database if all data should be imported 4 Save the PC20 file using File gt Save PC10 to PC20 The vast majority of a PC10 database file is compatible with PC20 However the PC10 database file has no internal marker to indicate if it contains valid calibration data For example a preconfigured PC10 database file does not contain valid calibration data the calibrated range LRV and URV
180. aud Baud rate of the Profibus The user selects the Baud rate 19 2 KBaud Segment in the combo box 93 75 KBaud Note 1 187 5 KBaud 500 KBaud 1 5 MBaud 3 MBaud 6 MBaud 12 MBaud 45 45 KBaud Slot time 37 Tbit The Slot time specifies the The user must engineer this 16383 Note 2 maximum time the master bus parameter waits for a transaction The value is depending on the response baud rate Note 3 Min 11 1023 Tbit The min station delay The user must engineer this Station response time defines the bus parameter Delay minimum time to wait before generating a reply frame Max 35 1023 Tbit The max station delay The user must engineer this Station response time defines the bus parameter Delay maximum time to wait before generating a reply frame Setup time 1 279 Tbit The Setup Time defines the The user must engineer this time between an event for example timer interrupt and the necessary reaction for example enabling receiver bus parameter 60 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 201 Table 10 Profibus Master Configuration Screen Field Descriptions Continued 0 Input Field Range Unit Description Notes on user input Quiet Time 0 127 Tbit The Quiet Time specifies the The user must engineer this time a transmitting station bus parameter must wait after the end ofa frame before enabling its receiver Target 256 Tbit The Target ro
181. cess density exceeds upper flowmeter limit Adjust process density 388 Flow Over Rev Lim Flow exceeds calibration limit in the reverse direction Adjust process or calibration limit as required 389 Flow Over Fwd Lim Flow exceeds calibration limit in the forward direction Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an CFT10 Mass Flowmeter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurators ReZero Transmitter ReZero transmitter mA Calibration Adjust process or calibration limit as required Restore Factory mA Calibration Startup Zero Zero Total This function permits you to reset the zero point for the transmitter To set the zero on initial installation of your transmitter see Startup Zero on page 151 The procedure to perform the ReZero function follows I Select ReZero from the Calibration menu or the ReZero icon from the device toolbar Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Set the transmitter flow to zero and select Continue 150 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Rezero Calibration Ed Set the transmitter flow to zero then press Continue Calibrate Flow Zero Average 0 kas Number of Points 0 of 300 Cancel Figure F 2 Sample CFT10 ReZero Calibration Screen Wait while the device is calibrating When this has occurred the new flow
182. cessor Brd Temp 9c Density Slope 1 Current Brd Temp 99 Temperature Slope 1 RTD Ohms 191 9533 Total Slope 1 Totalize Option 82 Vol Flow Slope 1000 Modbus Address f7 Mass Flow Offset 0 Modbus Baudrate 03 Density Offset 0 Modbus Delay Time 00 Temperature Offset 0 Modbus Parity 02 Total Offset 0 Current 1 Control 01 Vol Flow Offset 0 Current 1 Slope 1 Density Comp A 800 Current 1 Offset 0 Density Comp B 1200 Current 1 Preset 0 5 Density Ref Temp 0 Current 2 Control 01 Thermal Exp A 0 Current 2 Slope 1 Thermal Exp B 0 Current 2 Offset 0 Pulse Out Control 01 Current 2 Preset 0 5 Alarm 1 Control 02 Current 3 Control 01 Alarm 2 Control 04 Current 3 Slope 1 Gen Func Cntrl 1 00 Current 3 Offset 0 Gen Func Cntrl 2 00 Current 3 Preset 0 5 Pulse Out Preset 0 5 Slug Recovery 0 Alarm 1 Level 300 Device Type 21 Alarm 2 Level 30 Xmtr Serial No 1 Alarm 1 Hysteresis 50 Plant Code 00 Alarm 2 Hysteresis 5 Major Rev Number 30 31 Flow Zero Offset 0 Minor Rev Number 30 35 Tube Serial No 1 Firmware Update No 30 30 30 Dens Coef 1 0 Diagnostic Error 00 00 176 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters Table 31 Sample Database Report Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Dens Coef 2 10000 Format code for TOTA 00 Dens Coef 3 0 Dens Coef 4 0 Nominal Capacity 1000 Flow Coef 1 0 Flow Coef 2 1 Flow Coef 3 0 Flow Coef 4 1 Phase In Cal 1 0 Phase In Cal
183. ch alarm activates the binary input 251 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Profibus Function Block Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration Figure K 14 Sample Profibus Function Tab Screen Fields Entries Target Mode Contains the desired mode of the function block PV SCALE Conversion of a process value in the defined engineering units to a normalized value in percent as the input value of the function block It contains the high and low scale values engineering units code and number of digits to the right of the decimal point As default PV PSCALE is configured to percent meaning that the Variables SP Readback RCAS_INf and RCAS_OUT which are depending on PV SCALE are displayed in the range 0 100 252 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Fields Entries OUT SCALE Conversion of the normalized Output Signal in percent of the function block to the OUT parameter in the defined engineering units It contains the high and low scale values engineering units code and number of digits to the right of the decimal point As default OUT SCALE is configured to percent meaning that the Variable OUT is displayed in the range 0 100 Simulation Allows definition of a value and a status When Simulation is enabled this value and status is given in
184. commands are supported on non Foxboro devices Device specific commands are not supported The Commands dialog box enables you to read and or write data on the selected command Select the menu item Edit gt Command to start the Command dialog box To view the list of Universal commands click on the symbol to the left of Universal Clicking on a specific command causes the read and or write button to be highlighted and the present information on that command to be displayed The Universal commands are listed in Table 45 Also shown is their read write capability Table 45 Universal Commands Command Read Write Capability Identifier R Primary Variable R Current Range R Dynamic Variables R Poll Address W Message R W Tag R W PV Sensor R Output R 310 Appendix N Non Foxboro Devices Using HART Communication Protocol Table 45 Universal Commands Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Command Read Write Capability Final Assembly R W To view the list of Common Usage commands click on the symbol to the left of Common Usage Clicking on a specific command causes the read and or write button to be highlighted and the present information on that command to be displayed The Common Usage commands are listed in Table 46 Also shown is their read write capability Table 46 Common Usage Commands Read
185. contact the CSC Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not Received a bad message clear problem contact the CSC Stability Error Raw measurement has Check wiring Select Test gt Go On Line If been unstable this does not clear problem contact the CSG Probe Error Problem with the sensor Replace sensor Temp Comp Error Problem in temperature Check ATC connection Verify process measurement temperature Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Amplifier Error Out of range error Check sensor Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Extended Status Hardware ATC Open Resistance of temperature Replace temperature compensator ATC Short compensation is greater or less than expected resistance of device configured Leak Error Solution leakage into sensor Replace sensor App1 Cal Req Application 1 calibration required Calibrate 194 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 35 Transmitter Status Error Messages Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action App2 Cal Req Application 2 calibration Calibrate required App3 Cal Req Application 3 calibration Calibrate required Cal
186. ction is square root A suppressed zero range is activated automatically with the square root function The selected analog output transfer function has no effect on the measurement of the PV Lower and Upper Range Value Changing the Lower Range Value LRV and the Upper Range Value URV allocates a section from the nominal range to the signal range 4 to 20 mA via the measuring range Both the Lower Range Value and the Upper Range Value must be numerical values within the nominal range of the sensor Output Damping Damping values between 0 and 32 seconds can be entered The adjustable damping corresponds to the 63 value Output Mode It is possible to change the Output Mode between Analog 4 20 mA and Multi drop for HART devices and between Analog 4 20 mA and Digital for FoxCom devices If Multi drop is selected the Polling Address must be set between 1 and 15 In Multi drop mode the analog Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 output is frozen at 4 mA IFDC PC20 is able to connect and communicate with a transmitter that is in Multi drop mode but only with one of them connected to the modem at a time Profibus Out Tab Screen The Out tab screen for the Profibus devices allows the configuration of the out signal The out signal is defined in three steps Define the Lower and Upper Range Values of the Out signal in Units of PV on the left side On the right side of t
187. de Upper Range Value Rate Max Frequency 5000 r Hz GPM Total Max Frequency 10 of Ink Cancel Apply Help Figure O 5 Sample IMT96 Flow Tab Screen MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Flow Settings Engineering Units Flow Direction Select from menu of choices or Custom Select Positive Reverse BiDir Positive or BiDir Reverse Analog and Pulse Rate Output Damp Enter damping response time from 0 0 to 99 9 seconds Flow Rate Format Select from menu of eight choices Meter Factor Enter the IMT96 Cal Fact factor or see Mounting Hardware Kits To Replace 823DB 843DB and 863DP With IDP10 Differential Pressure Transmitters MI 021 412 Output Mode Digital Select UniDirectional or BiDirectional flow Analog Select UniDirectional Unidirectional Multi Range BiDirectional Dual Range or BiDirectional Split Range Upper Range Values Enter Upper Range Values in units shown Pulse Output Mode Select Off Pulse Rate or Pulse Total 319 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Field Entry Upper Range Value If Pulse Rate Mode enter Pulse Out URV between minimum and maximum URV of the flowtube not greater than 999999 Rate Max Frequency If Pulse Rate Mode select Rate Max Frequency of 1000 2000 5000 or 10000 Hz Total Max Frequency If Pulse Total Mode se
188. des information that is exclusive to the 870ITCR transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on o Device Data Screen Error Messages Calibration Configuration Database Report Device Data Screen Device Data Figure M 1 Sample 870ITCR Device Data Screen 285 MI 024 495 October 2010 Error Messages Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Table 43 Transmitter Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Transmitter is reinitializing If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line on reset If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Error Indicates an active diagnostic error See diagnostic error message to determine problem and corrective action Secondary Status Error Secondary Status Fields Indicates an error in secondary status The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the screen display Measurement Error Unstable process measurement Check sensor connection Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem co
189. direction before the trigger is released The Hysteresis algorithm is applied to all alarm triggers and the Hysteresis value is user configurable High High Alarm Value for upper limit alarms Upper limit value for alarms with engineering unit of the OUT parameter If the measured variable is equal to or higher than the upper limit value the State Bits in the State Byte of OUT and in the Function Block parameter ALARM_SUM have to change to 1 The unit of this parameter is the same as the OUT one High Alarm Value for upper limit warnings Upper limit value for warnings with engineering unit of the OUT parameter If the measured variable is equal to or higher than the upper limit value the State Bits in the State Byte of OUT and in the Function Block parameter ALARM_SUM have to change to 1 The unit of this parameter is the same as the OUT one Low Alarm Value for lower limit warnings Lower limit value for warnings with engineering unit of the OUT parameter If the measured variable is equal to or lower than the lower limit value the State Bits in the State Byte of OUT and in the Function Block parameter ALARM_SUM have to change to 1 The unit of this parameter is the same as the OUT one Low Low Alarm Value for lower limit alarms Lower limit value for alarms with engineering unit of the OUT parameter If the measured variable is equal to or lower than the upper limit value the State Bits in the State Byt
190. e 29 Xmtr Temp High Check process temperature Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on a Vortex Transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurators ReRange 181 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters Zero Total Set Low Flow Cut In mA Calibration ReRange This function permits you to change the Flow Upper Range Value URV 1 Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual control mode and select Continue To rerange to another input span enter the desired upper range value and select Continue 4 Select Continue again to save the new range to the device Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic control mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Device Rerange Ed To rerange to another input span enter the desired upper range value and press Continue Range Settings Upper Range Value 232 USgpm Valid URY Range 3 49 to 290 85 USgpm Cancel Help Figure H 3 Sample Vortex ReRange Screen Zero Total This function permits you to reset the transmitter total to zero The procedure follows 1 Select Zero Total from the Calibration menu or the Zero Total icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual control mode and select Continue 3 Select
191. e system piping The procedure to perform the ReZero function is as follows 1 Select ReZero from the Calibration menu or the ReZero icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Set the transmitter flow to zero and select Continue Wait for the new zero flow offset to be determined When this has occurred the new value is shown Save this calibration to the transmitter by selecting Continue Rezero Calibration x Set the transmitter flow to zero then press Continue Calibrate Flow Zero Average 0 kg s Number of Points 0 of 300 Cancel Help Figure G 2 Sample CFT15 ReZero Calibration Screen 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 167 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters 168 Startup Zero This function is used to set the zero only on initial installation of the transmitter At other times use ReZero Transmitter on page 167 to reset the zero The transmitter samples 300 flow readings during the procedure Prior to beginning the procedure connect the transmitter to the flowtube and fill the flowtube with the fluid to be measured Then flush out the flowtube for approximately five minutes to eliminate air in the system piping The procedure to perform the Startup Zero function is as follows Select Startup Zero f
192. e gt External Data gt Import For the file type select and select the desired file with the extension adt The Access Import Assistant guides you through the definition of the import format Start the import with line number 1 The fields are separated by tabs The first row contains the headings for each field The fields are separated by tabs Import the file The audit trail information is imported in several fields For each parameter written to the device you have an additional row The first field contains the date and time the change occurred The second field shows the unique identifier of each parameter within a device The next column shows the parameter description The last column contains the parameter value The value can be a real integer date string and so forth Error Trace Tab The Error Trace tab lists all errors communication errors error response messages from the device and so forth in a list box Each error message starts with the date and time The Error Trace function helps you to track the history of errors during a session IFDC uses several background processes threads for example to upload or download parameters or to update the cyclic data Ifa background process displays a message error warning or information message in a dialog box the system may lock up because of thread issues Therefore an error in the background process generates a message in the Error Trace window The Tab window
193. e program retrieves the tag number from the corresponding ECB block via the Object Manager The update of the tag number is only possible for FoxCom devices because those devices are supported by ECBs which hold the tag number information For the HART devices the ECB201 and ECB202 are used This block does not hold the tag number and therefore CSA and Object Manager cannot retrieve the tag number This means that during this initialization process only the tag numbers of FoxCom field devices are displayed The other channels where HART devices are connected or preconfiguration off line device databases are stored are marked as UNKNOWN 39 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation The tag number of the device is updated in the displayed tree of the Device Selection screen through the following actions After selecting the Refresh button as described above After IFDC is connected with a device IFDC retrieves the tag number from the device and updates the tree information for the Device Selection screen After selecting File gt Save or Save As in IFDC to store the field device database at a selected I O channel the tag number for the chosen channel is updated in the tree information of the Device Selection Screen If the Save or Save As action is done from a Pre Configuration window where no device is connected the tag number is marked at the end with an asterisk A Pre Configuration window is opened using File gt Open
194. e Perform calibration again Failed calibration procedure Sensor signal exceeded There were sensor signal peaks Check sensor 150 of Nominal Range Write EEPROM The EEPROM might be damaged Replace electronics impossible PV out of sensor limits PV was not within 110 of Check measuring Nominal Range Sensor temperature out Sensor temperature was out of Check sensor temperature of limits limits Electronic temperature The electronic temperature was Check electronics out of limits outside the range of 40 C and 80 C Measuring Range Either the range configuration is Correct range configuration configuration invalid out of sensor limits or the given span Diagnostic Codes range is smaller than the minimum In the Diagnostic Codes screen the various diagnostic codes are displayed in binary hex and decimal form with no text translation 264 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Diagnostic Codes Ed Diagnostic Codes Bin Hex Dec Status Code 1 00000000 0x00 0 Status Code 2 00000000 0x00 0 Current Status 00000000 0x00 0 Historical Status 00000000 0x00 0 Help Figure L 9 Sample Diagnostic Codes Screen Raw Input Value The Raw Input Value screen shows the input signal coming from the pressure sensor in percent It is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu Raw Input Value x t Raw Input
195. e Type Device Type shows the first part of the Model Code of the transmitter Measurement Task The Measurement Task of the transmitter is displayed The different measurement tasks are Pressure Differential Pressure Flow Liquid Level Liquid Interface Liquid Density or Special Span Limit The maximum Span Limit and unit of the device type is displayed This is specific for the transmitter and cannot be changed Equivalent In the second equivalent field a different unit for the primary variable PV Unit can be specified You can select from the menu of choices or if the required unit is not on the list select Special When a different unit is selected a recalculation of the corresponding value in the first field is done If Special is selected a new Custom Unit field appears in which a unit can be freely defined with a maximum of seven characters In this case you must define a conversion as follows Example 1 The upper sensor limit of 2 5 bar corresponds to a level of 6 m in the desired application Enter for equivalent 6 and for unit meter 269 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Example 2 If you configure a square root characteristic in order to measure flow calculate the Upper Range Limit URL in flow units using the formula URL SQR nominal_range URV URV q with Nominal range in pressure units URV differential pressure URV in pressure units URV
196. e limit Temp Linear Enter value from 0 to 100 Secondary Display Select Temp Absolute or mA mA Output Output If Analog Output Mode on sensor screen specify Absolute Measurement or Temperature Max Enter 20 mA range value 206 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Min Enter 4 mA range value Failsafe Mode Specify OFF ON or PULSE Value If on enter dc mA output between 3 8 and 20 5 mA Application Switch Triggers Enter value of Low and High triggers Database Report Table 36 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 2c Reference Temp 3 25 Tag Number FT102 Temp Size App 1 15 Tag Name 870ITEC Temp Size App 2 15 Device Name DevNam Temp Size App 3 15 Geo Location Office Chem Units 1 00 Application Select 03 Chem Units 2 00 Probe 03 Chem Units 3 00 Cell Factor 2 15 Absolute Scale 1 02 Primary Units 1 02 Absolute Scale 2 02 Primary Units 2 00 Absolute Scale 3 02 Primary Units 3 01 Custom Chem Scale 1 02 Custom Units 1 00 Custom Chem Scale 2 02 Custom Units 2 00 Custom Chem Scale 3 02 Custom Units 3 00 Meas 1 Units Primary Scale 1 10 Measurement Mapping 00 10 01 38 Primary Scale 2 Of Output Range Max 1000 Primary Scale 3 04 Output Range Min 0 Prim Scale CMCP 1 13 TON Count 20 mA 26600 Prim Scale
197. e of OUT and in the Function Block parameter ALARM_SUM must change to 1 The unit of this parameter is the same as the OUT one 247 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters 140 Device Configuration Figure L 20 Sample Profibus Alarms Tab Screen Calibration NOTE Whenever you perform any calibration the Configuration Changed flag is set ReZero This function enables you to adjust the zero offset of the pressure sensor The compensation value of the zero offset of the sensor is displayed in percent It is accessed via the Calibration menu from the device top level menu NOTE Since the damping is active the delay time must be observed or damping must be reduced to 0 seconds during the calibration procedure The sensors for pressure and differential pressure can be calibrated by venting for example at the valve block For buoyancy level transmitters apply the displacer or a corresponding weight and ReZero the device The signal range of the sensors is 0 to 10 mV The displayed physical Zero value shows the active correction factor in 278 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 CAUTION The device s output will be modified during this procedure Leaving the control loop in automatic may cause a process upset ier Continue when the device is in manual mode or Cancel to abort physical Zero 0
198. e top level menu 137 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Acknowledge Prior Diagnostic This function enables you to acknowledge a diagnostic message It is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu Configuration NOTE For IMT25L devices some configuration parameters do not apply Identifier Tab Screen IMT 25 Device Configuration Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totaizer Figure E 5 Sample IMT 25 Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters Not applicable to HART device NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 138 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Flow Tab Screen IMT25 Device Configuration x Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer Flow Settings Engineering Units Flow Direction Analog and Pulse Rate Output Damping 3 000 Sec y Custom Flow Rate Format HHHH H he Positive y Meter Factor fi C Digital Output Mode Analog 4 20mAl Unib Uppe
199. eeevens 217 Automatic Calibration cscccccccccesessessccccececececsesscccccecececsssesenaccecececesssssacaecseceecsesentaacess 217 Temperature Sensor ii is 218 mA Calibration dd o cn e e e no en oh en 219 Configuration torir ie Sisco ace tein tec netted tack aca cns tot ce eee cat cae 220 Tdentifier Fab Screen a A eed acti A eet Ge 220 MI 024 495 October 2010 Contents sensor ab Screen ae ah ieee o do 221 O tp t lab Screech enanset mna Perey ar ptre Orne a Nadas 223 Measurement Fab Screen diraeta n e E aeaa E E T R Ue 224 Dira SE A A O eee 225 Database Report aaa 227 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others ocononocccnnnonnonnonornos 231 Device Data re its 231 Additional Profib s Data Screen a tn o 232 Stat s Error Messages A O 233 ESEO A e r EA A E E A 235 Autostar Calibratioras ens onei e i eld Macht A E R Ria Ware tat neal tale 235 O R E A a eaa atai 236 Analog Setpoint Calibration iia aa 236 Angle Cali btan pta lili tes 237 Temperature Calibration tii tai 237 Position Feedback Calibration AS A saveondevekowntivacstanvaveatenieers 238 Air Supply Pressure Calibration vii id cies id ida 238 Output Pressure CallbratiO astro tit 238 Restore Walve Specilic Partinicter e a A ce fa R ANR Greet tek 239 Restore Factory SEMI A A A A ds 239 A hs casSta E E an tered bate Mon kcrudhadea da vathan dele aeaneden sa E 239 Gre On Line kiiin n aaia ea EVE A RNE eE E E ESS 239 Go Off ci 239 G Local iia tha
200. el Measurement invalid Contact the CSC 2BD Tube Imbalance An imbalance has been detected between sensors in the flowtube Transmitter switches off line All measurement stops Contact the CSC 320 RTD Meas Below Min Resistance for temperature measurement is below minimum required Measurements invalid Contact the CSC 321 RTD Meas Above Max Resistance for temperature measurement is above maximum allowed Measurements invalid Contact the CSC 149 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters Table 27 Diagnostic Error Messages Continued Code Error Message Recommended Action 322 Osc Freq High Flowtube driving oscillator frequency is above the maximum allowed Measurements invalid Contact the CSC 323 Osc Freq Low Flowtube driving oscillator frequency is below the minimum required Measurements invalid Contact the CSC 324 Phase Diff High Excessive signal phase difference between sensors Flow measurement and total invalid Confirm that mass flow rate does not exceed maximum mass flow rate of flowtube Contact the CSC 384 Process Temp Low Process temperature below lower flowmeter limit Adjust process temperature 385 Process Temp High Process temperature exceeds upper flowmeter limit Adjust process temperature 386 Process Dens Low Process density below lower flowmeter limit Adjust process density 387 Process Dens High Pro
201. ep 1 Is there at least 250 Q between the power supply and where the cable Yes attaches to the loop wiring See Note 2 Is modem connection to the computer tight S Add at least 250 Q to the loop wiring at No the power supply Repeat Step 2 Do you get the same messages Tighten cable connections Repeat Step 2 Same messages Yes No Fault See Note 1 If battery powered PC turn on the ac power to the computer Repeat Step 2 Same messages No Attach HART Model 275 to the cable connections Yes Can you communicate Is voltage at device field terminals at least 16 V dc Fault corrected Does other device mouse etc attached to the same COM port work correctly No No Yes Do you have an optional Foxboro power supply attached to the modem See Note 3 Repeat Step 3 Replace Same messages box and or Yes Plug converter into 120 V ac Is power converter plugged No Yes into live 120 V ac outlet a aS Yes m d m Is red lead of cable attached to terminal with the device Is there continuity on both leads of power box and Yes No Fix Device power converter No converter of device black to Yes Fault Corrected No Switch leads at field terminals Repeat No Step 1 Do you still get the same messages Note 1 A battery powered PC may not have enough power to the RS 232 COM port to power the modem Check your PC manual for details regarding po
202. eport file on that PC Profibus Configuration PC20 only 58 For Profibus devices the File gt Connect to Device does not work the first time Before it is possible to connect to a Profibus slave device it is necessary to go though the following steps Define the Profibus Master parameters in the Masters page Define the Profibus Slaves in the Slaves page Create a connection to the slave by selecting the Connect button in the Slaves page The definitions about the Profibus master and slaves are stored in a file with the extension PBC The Profibus configuration is stored in this file if you press the Save button in the Master page 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 or press the Connect button in the Slaves page or if you leave the Profibus Configuration dialog box with the OK button If you close down PC20 and start it later again the Profibus configuration you saved last is used It is possible to store different Profibus configurations in different files with the Save button in the Master page With the Open button it is possible to read in another Profibus configuration After you created a connection to a Profibus slave by selecting the Connect button in the Slaves page the menu selection File gt Connect to Device works It connects to the same slave you selected last time in the Slaves page If you want to connect to a different slave on the Profibus you need to go back to the Slaves page select the slave and
203. equest Length 6656 Coef 11 0 Max Reply Length 5376 Coef 12 0 Max Param Number 69 Coef 13 0 TON Count 4 mA 600 Coef 14 0 TON Count 20 mA 3200 Coef 15 0 Misc Flags 01 Coef 16 0 Freq Strategy Flg 01 Coef 17 0 Database Chng Cntr cb Coef 18 0 n a 00 Coef 19 0 Scan Rate Freq 1 00 Coef 20 0 Scan Rate Freq 2 if Coef 21 Temp C1 28 7518 Scan Rate Freq 3 00 Coef 22C2 1 946529 Scan Rate Freq 4 00 Coef 23C3 115 1565 Clk Div Factor 1 00 Coef 24 1 507587 Clk Div Factor 2 00 Damping 1 Clk Div Factor 3 00 Sqroot Turndown 1 Clk Div Factor 4 00 Coef 27 F1LRV 3 155942 86 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 14 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Freq 1 Upper Rnge 32 Coef 28 0 Freq 2 Upper Rnge 241 Coef 29 F3LRV 0 6692498 Freq 3 Upper Rnge 22 Coef 30 1 F1Span 0 1595369 Freq 4 Upper Rnge 0 Coef 31 0 Freq 1 Lower Rnge 8 Coef 03 8 620579 Freq 2 Lower Rnge 96 n a 00 Freq 3 Lower Rnge 8 Comm Turnaround 01 Freq 4 Lower Rnge 0 Diag Error Code 00 00 Test S R Address ff ff Clock Cor IT1 0 Default Freq 2 134 Clock Cor IT2 0 Default Freq 3 1 Reserved 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Default Freq 4 1 EEPROM Checksum 0 87 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters 88 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature T
204. er It should only be used for a 140 Series Transmitter to change it from IDP10 B to a 140 Type After you have changed the type of the transmitter it is no longer possible to configure this transmitter with a PC10 IMTW or HHT But after you have done the configuration and calibration with the PC20 you can change the transmitter back to IDP10 B The device will be put OFFLINE for this procedure Cancel Help Figure L 3 Change Device Type Message Screen 259 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Change Device Type Figure L 4 Model Identification Message Screen Select Model IDP10 B Figure L 5 Model Selection Screen Now the transmitter is in the 140 Series mode and from now on is identified as the transmitter type corresponding to the Model Code printed on the device Figure L 6 shows the Device Data screen after changing the mode In this mode it is possible to do such tasks as configure calibrate and document the transmitter with the PC20 The other configurators PC10 HHT and IMTW are not able to identify this type and can no longer be used for these tasks 260 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Intelligent Field Device Configurator Device Data File Edit View Calibrate Test Utilities User Options Window Help o 2 m el Pla tw pd Device Data Tag Number TAG NR Device Type
205. er device with HART protocol without the need to leave and restart PC20 Furthermore Pre Configuration for devices with different protocols HART FoxCom Profibus could be done in parallel If PC20 should always connect to a device with the same protocol at startup set the prot keyword which indicates the protocol For FoxCom devices set the following protocol flag C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC foxifdc exe prot X For HART devices set the following protocol flag C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC foxifdc exe prot H For Profibus set the following protocol flag C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC foxifdc exe prot P If PC20 is not yet connected to a device the top level menu screen as shown in Figure 18 appears This top level screen has a pull down menu for selecting the various functions If PC 20 is already connected to a device the device data screen similar to that shown in Figure 18 appears Use the mouse and or cursor as you would in any standard Windows program You can move the cursor from item to item by using the mouse the arrow keys or by pressing the underlined letter of the menu item You can select the highlighted menu item by clicking the left button of the mouse or by pressing Enter Running the IFDC Program Start IFDC on the I A Series workstations one of two ways 1 Using the standard I A Series Display Manager or FoxView the default displays for the ECBs which support I
206. erature and the calibrator s initials then press Continue Calibrate Solution Temperature o Range 99 90 to 999 90 F Calibrator s Initials rw Calibrated Date 08 20 2003 Cancel Help Figure J 4 Sample 870ITPH Temperature Calibration Screen 3 Enter the solution temperature and the calibrator s initials and select Continue 4 Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue 218 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP SE Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required This procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring The procedure to perform a mA Calibration is 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring 2 Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by setting the adjustment amount and pressing the Apply button When finished press Continue Calibrate 4m4 Out
207. erization Units Travel Alarms Tuning Characterization Custom Custom Curve Current Number Pair of Values E 100 0000 0 0000 25 0000 25 0000 50 0000 50 0000 Value fo 0000 4 75 0000 75 0000 80 0000 Y Value oono Z Add Modify Delete Cancel Apply Help Figure K 6 Sample SRD991 Characterization Tab Screen Characterization Select Linear Equal Percentage 1 50 Quick Open 50 1 or Custom Custom Curve Allows you to enter a custom curve consisting of up to 22 points X Y pairs To add a new pair of values select Custom enter the X and Y Values and press Add The input value pair is sorted in increasing order of the X Values To modify a value pair select the X Value in the list box modify the values displayed in the edit boxes and press Modify To delete a value pair select the X Value in the list box and press Delete A custom curve which is stored in the device can be activated by selecting Custom or deactivated by switching to Linear Equal Percentage 1 50 or Quick Open 50 1 244 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Travel Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration x Identifier Parameters Configuration Characterization Travel Alarms Tuning Options m Response Time Measured T63 Time 0 100 fi 0000 Travel Stops Lower 0 0000 ce Limit Travel Position
208. es Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Bad Message Transmitter received Select Test gt Go On line If this does not clear Received a bad message problem cycle power and if necessary replace the electronic module Electronics Electronics cannot Select Test gt Go On line If this does not clear Error calculate correct flow problem cycle power and if necessary replace the electronic module Sensor Output High Temp Outof Transmitter temperature Check ambient and process temperature Range is less than 40 C or higher than 80 C Diagnostic Error Messages Table 33 Diagnostic Error Messages Code Error Message Recommended Action 02 ROM Checksum Error Replace electronic module 03 EEPROM Chksum Err If this does not clear problem replace electronic module 04 RAM Error Replace electronic module 0A Flowrate Math Error Check transmitter database and correct any problems If problem persists replace electronic module 0C Sensor Elec Failure Cycle power If problem persists replace electronic module OE Core Failure Cycle power If problem persists replace electronic module 20 Offline Cfg Write Error Take transmitter off line modify a parameter or mode change parameter or mode back to previous value and place transmitter on line 10 Core Failure Cycle power If problem persists replace electronic module 28 Xmtr Temp Low Check process temperatur
209. es ITA Series Intelligent Transmitters Wiring Guidelines MI 020 350 Model HHT Hand Held Operation MI 020 466 Terminal PC10 Intelligent Transmitter Installation and Operation MI 020 479 Configurator 83F and 83W Intelligent Vortex Installation Configuration MI 019 194 Flowmeters Troubleshooting and Maintenance FoxCom Protocol Installation Configuration MI 019 199 Troubleshooting and Maintenance HART Protocol 820 Series Intelligent Transmitters Operation Calibration and Configuration MI 020 467 with HHT 860 Series Intelligent Transmitters Operation Calibration and MI 020 474 Configuration with HHT ITA Series Intelligent Installation Calibration Configuration MI 020 421 Pressure Transmitters and Maintenance FoxCom Protocol MI 020 424 MI 020 428 MI 020 429 Installation Calibration Configuration MI 020 416 and Maintenance HART Protocol MI 020 417 MI 020 423 MI 020 426 Operation Calibration and MI 020 476 Configuration with HHT IMT10 IA Series Operation Calibration and Configuration MI 021 376 Magflow Transmitters IMT20 IIA Series Operation Calibration and Configuration MI 021 383 Magflow Transmitters Operation Calibration and MI 021 385 Configuration with HHT 1 Introduction MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 3 Reference Documents Continued Device Type Description Instruction IMT25 IA Series Operation Calibration and Confi
210. essnenaees 138 Plows Tab tren ls ies peta pibe Ma ao pad a pink 139 Alarms Fab Screen dona 140 vil MI 024 495 October 2010 Contents Contacts Tab Sereon ona a ds 141 Options Tab Screen menirii tese thee oeeie anor aa Mone ae stein da dense iat uated Mas 142 Display Totalizet Tab Screen rese eaa ae e an e OR E A A E E ce 143 Database Report o R 144 Appendix E CFT10 Mass Flowmeters s sesessesesesesereesesessrsesersseeseseeeesereesesseeeseseeeeseseeseseees 147 Deyice Data Screen 147 Error Messages ustedes eiii dis 148 Status Etr r MESAS A A E AEE 148 Diagnostic Error Messages ni di a is 149 Ca A A A A A d eaii 150 ReZero Transmite tdi pipes fs 150 A TT 151 PCT Ota ie itl does O E 152 Restore Factor MA nac id id 152 mA CAIDO A td 152 Configuration occas eaceets ocak eects Nakane a n a td ocak ace T ea ee tee alae 154 Identifier Tab Screen a A A A a 154 Units A O A ee eeii ei 155 Pulse Output Pap Screen aii aae e e e o RG 156 mA Mode Tab Screen rad o ts 157 Alarms Tab Screen se aonne u Ra a a a aR 158 Solids Configuration Tab Screen ce c feta teckel Cat a nea ree NIETO 159 Flowtube Parameters Tab Screen sia pects cages eke adn Ged eee eee 160 Database Reports A ia eee 161 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowimetens acido picas 163 Device Data Sereen ai siscssususcvststicsictavusvosdi sacensesatecsetatavecs vitnereedietueabas veceupespiastatabuscnroiteevend sles 163 Error Messages ari A A id 164 Status Ertor Messages rudo ias iia de
211. evice Field Entry Measurement 1 Square Root Mode y Square Root Blank Linear Units Select from menu of pressure units or select Custom to enter user configured units Lower Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 4 mA Must be 0 if M1 or M2 is in Square Root mode Upper Range Value Enter value at which transmitter outputs 20 mA Upper Range Limit Shows value of Upper Range Limit of transmitter Measurement 2 Similar to Measurement 1 Turn off Enable or Disable Measurement 2 Sqroot Low Flow Mode Select Active or 10 of Flow External Zero Not Applicable Output Mode Select Digital or 4 20 mA mA Output Fail Safe Select Down Scale or Up Scale Output Damping Select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds 83 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters 84 Field Entry Temperature Fail Strategy Select Fail or Continue HART Device 17A Pressure Device Configuration x Identifier Transmitter Parameter Configuration m Measurement 1 Measurement 2 Units Units i20 Lower Range Value fo 0000 Mode Upper Range Value 5 0000 Linear Squareroot C Squareroot Mode cutoff lt 4 flinear lt 1 f Linear Squareroot Squareroot PRES e cutoff lt 1 e flinear lt 4 Aaa JS Output Damping set Span Ssec y sec E
212. evice Configurators IFDC PC20 explains how to install operate and troubleshoot the configurator and how to operate calibrate configure and troubleshoot Foxboro Intelligent Devices using the IFDC PC20 software package Chapters 1 2 3 and 4 introduce the IFDC PC20 and explain how to install IFDC PC20 how to operate the IFDC PC20 program and how to troubleshoot the IFDC PC20 respectively This is followed by appendixes on each Foxboro Intelligent Device Each appendix shows an example of the device s data screen gives an explanation of the device s status diagnostic error messages with recommended actions explains how to calibrate and configure the device and shows a sample database report Therefore to use this manual refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to gain an understanding of the IFDC and PC20 capabilities to Chapter 2 Installation for an explanation of how to install IFDC PC20 and to Chapter 4 Troubleshooting for IFDC PC20 troubleshooting procedures Refer to Chapter 3 Operation and the appropriate appendix for procedures on how to communicate with your specific Foxboro Intelligent Device Device Appendix 820 860 and T A Series systems Pressure Transmitters RTT10 Temperature Transmitters RTT20 1120 Temperature Transmitters IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters IMT25 IMT25L Magnetic Flow Transmitters CFT10 Mass Flow Transmitters CFT15 Mass Flow Transmitters 83 Series
213. for PC20 2 Access Connect to Device via the File menu 47 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 48 3 Open the desired file via File gt Open 4 Select one of the override choices 5 Respond Yes when asked if you want to download the database to the device ASCII Format for Import and Export The IFDC PC20 ASCII format file contains two sections File header Parameter list File Header The file header identifies The version of the file format The device type The major and minor revision level of the firmware of the documented device The database type normally the database type is O for import or export files The date and time of creation of the file Comments comments can be added to the IFDC PC20 database by accessing the menu item Edit gt Comment Parameter List The Parameter List starts with BEGIN_INPUT and ends with END_INPUT There is one parameter per line The description includes the name of the parameter and then its value The two items are separated by a comma The name of a parameter is a short key identifier string The name is unique for one device The value of a parameter is written as ASCII strings Strings are not surrounded by quotation marks or The string starts after the comma and ends at the end of the line or at the beginning of a comment Comments The comment starts with the string comma slash asterisk Everything between this string unti
214. ftware Version 2 2 includes the following enhancements Full configuration support for all Foxboro and Foxboro Eckardt HART devices as listed in Table 2 Software Version 2 3 Enhancements PC20 Software Version 2 3 includes the following enhancements Support of Window 2000 and Windows XP stations Configuration support for I A Series Pressure IGP10 B Configuration support for the 140 Series 240 subtypes IFDC Software Version 2 3 includes the following enhancements Support of the Windows XP stations Support of the Solaris 8 stations Software Version 3 0 IFDC Software Version 3 0 is identical to Version 2 3 but is for use on workstations with I A Series System software V8 2 and greater The Solaris operating system is not supported in this version Software Version 3 1 IFDC Software Version 3 1 is identical to Version 3 0 but includes the following enhancements Support for HART FBM244 and FBM 245 Support for FoxCom FBM243b and FBM246b MI 024 495 October 2010 1 Introduction Reference Documents Table 3 Reference Documents Device Type Description Instruction I A Series system System Equipment Installation B0193AC Integrated Control Configurator B0193AV Integrated Control Software Concepts B0193AW Integrated Control Block Description B0193AX Measurement Integration B0193RA Intelligent Field Device Configurator B0400QL IFDC Release Not
215. g Timeout 20 0000 Sec Cancel Apply Help Figure K 5 Sample SRD991 Configuration Tab Screen Field Entry Type Select Globe Rotary Plug Butterfly Ball or Diaphragm Power Up Specify whether you want the valve to start in Failsafe mode or fully On line Actuator Action Select Single or Double Spring Type Specify whether the valve Closes or Opens with a spring or None if no spring exists Valve Stem Specify Linear Left Mounted Linear Right Mounted Movement Rotary Counterclockwise or Rotary Clockwise Control Action Specify Direct or Reverse Acting Setpoint Source Select Analog Analog High 4800 Baud or Digital High If Analog enter value at high end of mA range 20 mA max Low If Analog enter value at low end of mA range 4 mA min Fail Safe Config Failsafe occurs when no setpoint command is seen in the timeout specified below Select the fail safe condition De Energize positioner exhausts all air in the actuator Hold last valve position Fallback send to position specified in next field 243 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Field Entry Position If Fallback enter position in percent Timeout Enter Timeout in seconds 0 means none Characterization Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration x Identifier Parameters Configuration Charact
216. g temperatures The procedure to do this is as follows 1 Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Enter your desired Lower Range Value LRV and Upper Range Value URV and select Continue To rerange to another input span enter the desired upper and lower range values and press Continue m Range Settings Lower Range Value 4m4 200 E Upper Range Value 20m4 850 E Range Limits 200 00 to 850 00 C Cancel Help Figure C 4 Sample RTT20 ReRange Screen 4 Select Continue to save the new custom curve to the RTT20 transmitter 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Restore Factory mA This function restores the mA calibration factory settings The procedure to do this is as follows 1 Select Restore Factory mA from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 107 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters 3 To reconfirm that you want to restore the mA calibration factory settings select Continue The Factory Calibration is restored and the calibration date automatically changes Restore Factory Calibration xi Restore to Factory will restore m calibration to the factory settings Continue if this is
217. ght mouse button for resizing The info window can display three types of information each with its own tab Device Characteristic Audit Trail and Error Trace NOTE The info window is only displayed when a device is connected It is not available for preconfiguration Upper Range Value URW Units EGU Date of Last Calibration 100 00 GPM 10 1 97 A Device Characteristic Audit Trail 9 Error Trace 26 Figure 10 Info Window Device Characteristic Tab Under the Device Characteristic tab the info window displays the most important pieces of information which dominate the behavior of a device For a transmitter it is the lower and upper range values the units and the date of last calibration For some devices for example SRD991 it takes a while until the information is loaded from the device and displayed For other devices it is displayed immediately Audit Trail Tab Under the Audit Trail tab the info window lists all parameters which are downloaded to the device Each parameter which is written into a device is listed in a line with the date and time the parameter name and description and the value Dependent upon the protocol some parameters are written to the device with a command which writes several parameters at once In such a case not only the changed parameter is displayed in the Audit Trail box but also all the other parameters which are part of the message 3 Operation MI 024 495
218. guration MI 021 390 Magflow Transmitters Operation Calibration and Configuration MI 021 397 with HART Communications MI 021 398 IMT96 IA Series Operation Calibration and Configuration MI 021 403 Magflow Transmitters CFT10 Series Operation and Configuration with MI 019 122 Mass Flow Transmitters Integral Keypad Operation Calibration and MI 019 123 Configuration with HHT CFT15 Series Operation and Configuration with MI 019 128 Mass Flow Transmitters Integral Keypad 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Installation Configuration Operation and MI 611 216 Transmitters Maintenance 870ITEC Electrodeless Installation Configuration Operation and MI 611 212 Conductivity Transmitters Maintenance 870ITPH pH ISE ORP Installation Configuration Operation and MI 611 211 Transmitters Maintenance RTT10 Series Temperature Installation Maintenance and Wiring MI 020 459 Transmitters Operation Calibration Configuration MI 020 468 with HHT RTT20 Series Temperature Installation Configuration Operation MI 020 453 Transmitters Calibration and Maintenance Operation Configuration and MI 020 460 Calibration with HART Communicator Operation Calibration and MI 020 469 Configuration with HHT 1120 Temperature Transmitters Installation Configuration Operation and EMT 0111 A Maintenance SRD991 Intelligent Positioner Installation Configuration Operation and MI EVE 0105 A Maintenance 130 Series Pressure Transmitters Installation Configuration
219. gure J 7 Sample 870ITPH Sensor Tab Screen MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Sensor Type Select pH ISE or ORP Electrode If pH select Glass Antimony or Other If ISE select Positive or Negative Buffers If pH select American NIST European or Special see Figure J 8 Resolution Scale If pH select 0 1 pH or 0 01 pH Temp Compensation If pH select Standard Ammonia or Custom see Figure J 9 If ISE select Standard or Custom Chem Compensation If ISE select Standard or Custom see Figure J 10 221 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORPASE Transmitters Figure J 8 Custom Buffers Screen Custom Temperature Compensation 2 D E o p o AAA pp wp fp jaa lee ls pop p pb po ee po ee pop up fp x ce Figure J 9 Custom Temperature Compensation Screen Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORPASE Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Custom Chemical Compensation WN ON ATT UM Figure J 10 Custom Chemical Compensation Screen Output Tab Screen 870PH Transmitter Configuration Figure J 11 Sample 870ITPH Output Tab Screen 223 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP ISE Transmitters Field Entry mA Output Mode Select Digital or 4 20 mA Failsafe Mode If 4 20 mA Mode specify OFF ON or PULSE Failsafe Va
220. he edit box on the display 6 The screen responds with a message that the Angle Calibration has finished Temperature Calibration Temperature calibration is needed whenever the printed wiring board is replaced The function calibrates the temperature of the internal electronics module It is intended to be performed on the bench A temperature probe and other special tools are required Refer to SRD991 Intelligent Positioner MI EVE 0105 A for more information NOTE This function is only allowed at workshop security level The procedure to perform a Temperature Calibration is 1 Select Temperature from the Calibration menu 2 After selecting Continue to proceed measure the electronics temperature with a probe 3 Enter this value in the edit box on the display and select Continue The temperature calibration is finished 237 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Position Feedback Calibration This function performs calibration of the output of the position feedback option board This operation is typically done on the bench and may require special tools and special electrical connections Refer to SRD991 Intelligent Positioner MI EVE 0105 A for more information NOTE This function is only allowed at workshop security level Air Supply Pressure Calibration Air Supply Pressure Calibration is needed whenever the printed wiring board is replaced This operation is
221. he screen specify an equivalent representation of the signal from step 1 as Out signal Equivalent Unit of the Out signal Value of the Equivalent to the Upper Range Value in Units of the Out signal Value of the Equivalent to the Lower Range Value in Units of the Out signal Number of Decimal Points for the representation of the Out signal Define the Out signal characteristics The Filter Time output damping value The Target Mode Defines the desired mode 140 Device Configuration uo El 10 000 O Figure L 16 Sample Profibus Out Tab Screen 273 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Density Tab Screen Density information can be displayed and entered for certain device types This information is stored in the transmitter 144L D kg CuMtr 10 000000 20 000000 Figure L 17 Sample Density Tab Screen Failsafe Handling Tab Screen The 140 Series has an extensive fail safe management With the Failsafe Handling screen it is possible to configure which errors will cause the device to go into the fail safe state which mA value will be set on the output when it is in the fail safe state and how the device should return from fail safe automatic or by command item Return from Failsafe 274 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 E 143DP 1 FoxCom M M m m M E E o
222. ible computer with the following minimum requirements 133 MHz Pentium with 32 MB RAM or better 4x CD ROM Drive 8x recommended Hard drive with 16 MB of space for PC20 RS 232 Serial Port COM1 or COM2 Parallel Port LPT1 or LPT2 to print reports Mouse or compatible pointing device Communication with Foxboro Intelligent Devices uses proven frequency shift keying FSK techniques that do not affect the device output signal MI 024 495 October 2010 1 Introduction Standard Equipment with FoxCom Modem The PC20 with a FoxCom modem includes the following items PC20 software on one CD ROM One Foxboro external modem can be attached by Velcro strips to back side of laptop computers One 5 foot cable desktop PC to modem One 1 foot cable laptop PC to modem One 5 foot cable for connecting the modem to device loop wiring or for connecting the optional power supply to a device Velcro strips Instruction book on one CD ROM Two test clips Standard Equipment with HART Modem The PC20 with a HART modem includes the following items PC20 software on one CD ROM One HART external modem One 5 foot cable for connecting the modem to device loop wiring or for connecting the optional power supply to a device Instruction book on one CD ROM Two test clips Optional Equipment The power supply option 120 V ac to 24 V dc converter is used with devices that require a 24 V dc s
223. igured units Upper Range Value Enter Upper Range Value in measurement units shown Low Flow Cut In Select from menu of values Flowing Parameters Temperature Enter temperature in units shown Density Enter density in units shown Defaults are Liquid 62 30 Gas 0 5858 and Steam 0 2992 lb ft 188 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry K Factor Shows K Factor in units shown Viscosity If liquid enter viscosity Base Density If gas enter value in same units as Density above Added K Bias Enter value in percent Units Base Select English or Metric Options and Piping Tab Screen YortexTransmitter Configuration Schedule 40 Staion y e gt On e oi j 6 Donscale C Upscale 00 sec l for xl fo El Figure H 11 Sample Vortex Options and Piping Tab Screen FoxCom Device 189 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters VortexT ransmitter Configuration x Identifier Flow Parameters Options and Piping Piping Mating Schedule 80 y Upstream Distance 17 0 ne Configuration fi Elbow Perp y Dptions Noise Rejection Signal Conditioning Failsafe e of C On Of On Downscale Upscale m Output Mode Analog 4 20 m C Multidrop Bolling Address jo T Damping 2 50 FEZ Scaled Pulse Output URY 100
224. in the loop wiring Select mA Output from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output Set the Step Size 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown on the screen display Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 When finished select Continue Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 9 The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurement m Calibration Figure M 6 Sample 870ITCR mA Calibration Screen 293 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Configuration Identifier Tab Screen 870CR Transmitter Configuration TAG NUMBER Figure M 7 Sample 870ITCR Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with T A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only
225. into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required This procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does not agree with the value measured by an accurate mA meter installed in the loop wiring NOTE Before performing a mA Calibration perform the Point Calibration procedure described on page 76 A mA calibration may no longer be necessary Procedure for a FoxCom Device 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring 2 Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 4 mA Output m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m and 20 m output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by setting the adjustment amount and pressing the Apply button When finished press Continue Calibrate 4m Output Step Size 0 5 H m C 20m Output Cumulative Change 0 m Apply Help Cancel Figure A 6 Sample mA Calibration Screen 5 Set the Step Size from the menu 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply 6 Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output on the meter
226. ion 2 2 of the PC20 Configurator supports all devices listed in Table 2 For some devices there are restrictions in the device support as described below MI 024 495 October 2010 1 Introduction HTG PC20 does not support HTG The integral keypad and display on the device can be used for configuration functions HTG can also be configured using IFDC restrictions apply Non Foxboro Devices HART Protocol Only the Universal and Common Practice commands are supported Device specific commands are not supported Software Version 2 0 Enhancements Software Version 2 0 includes the following enhancements Full configuration capability for IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitter with HART protocol Full configuration capability for 83 Series Vortex Transmitter with HART protocol IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitter with FoxCom protocol IGP10 Gauge Pressure Transmitter with Sensor F G and H IAP20 Absolute Pressure Transmitter An updated 140 Series Buoyancy Transmitter Calibration capability and IFDC support for 870I TCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitter 130 Series Pressure Transmitter New functionality FoxCom and HART protocol Workshop Environment for faster communications Support for HART multi drop communication Info Window Device Characteristic Audit Trail and Error Trace Export function for trending Startup options Online Offline password and security level Import Export device databases to pop
227. is brought to the foreground and a yellow and white color message button is displayed This button informs you that there is a new message displayed in the Error Trace window You should read the message acknowledge the message by pressing the Message button When you acknowledge a message the Message button disappears and the Tab Window that was pushed into the background is pushed to the foreground again When a new message is generated the Message button pops up again When you disconnect a device this information is lost To help Foxboro service personnel locate an error please use the PC20 Trace Function or IFDC Trace Function described on page 66 Top Level Menu Screen The top level menu screen shown in Figure 11 is displayed when your I A Series system personal computer is not connected to a device or when no preconfiguration data is loaded onto a window 28 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 This screen has pull down menus for selecting the various functions Explanations of the menus and functions appear in Table 6 Intelligent Field Device Configurator File View Utilities User Options Help osje Alal elx Figure 11 Top Level Menu Screen Table 6 Top Level Menu Description of Functions Top Level Menu Pick Submenu Pick Description File New Ctrl N Creates a preconfiguration database using a default database as a template Open Ctrl O Edits an existing
228. isHz Lower Range o kg Preset Value fo Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Type Mass Flow High y Type Density High y Level 300 kg s Level 20 kg m3 Hysteresis 50 kg s Hysteresis 5 kg m3 0 00 sec P While Alam On J On Fault T While Alarm On I On Fault Cancel Apply Figure G 5 Sample CFT 15 Outputs Tab Screen Field Entry Pulse Output Pulse Mode Select Mass Flow Density Temperature Total Volumetric Flow Solids Preset or Off Pulse Trip Enter value if Pulse mode is Total Upper Range Enter value if Pulse mode is Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids Lower Range Enter value if Pulse mode is Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids Damping Select one of eight choices from No Damping to 16 seconds if Pulse mode is Mass Flow Density Temperature Vol Flow or Solids Totalize Option Select 5 Hz 10 Hz 15 Hz or Off Preset Value Enter value if Pulse mode is Preset Alarm 1 Type Select from menu of choices Level Enter value if Alarm Type is not Preset On Preset Off Pulse Overrun or Fault Only 171 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters Field Entry Hysteresis Enter value if Alarm Type is not Preset On Preset Off Pulse Overrun or Fault Only While Alarm On Activates when alarm condition exists Blank Does not activate when alarm condition exists
229. itials and select Continue Wait while the device is reinitializing Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Solution 2 Point This option permits you to perform a 2 point calibration for up to three applications l Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the Configuration function See page 295 2 Select Solution 2 Point from the Calibration menu 3 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 D Soe Y 10 Two Point Calibration Application 1 E Figure M 4 Sample 870ITCR Solution 2 Point Calibration Screen Enter the low and high solution values and the calibrator initials and select Continue Wait while the device is reinitializing Immerse the sensor in the low calibration solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating Immerse the sensor in the high calibration solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Temperature Sensor This optio
230. its are used to modify control valve dynamics Control Gap Control gap defines the sensitivity of the positioner so that no corrective action is taken if the control difference is less than the defined limit Pressure Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration x Identifier Parameters Configuration Characterization Travel Alarms Tuning Options Pressure m Output 1 Pressure Units Air Supply Press Units psig psig C kPa C kPa bar bar m Positioning Output 1 Pressure Scaling Air Supply Pressure Scaling Low Ea bar Low j 0 0000 bar High e 0000 bar High 10 0000 bar Lower Limit fo 5000 bar Cancel Apply Help Figure K 10 Sample SRD991 Pressure Tab Screen Field Entry Output 1 Pressure Units Select psig kPa or bar Air Supply Pressure Units Select psig kPa or bar Positioning Output Pressure Scaling Low Enter low limit for output pressure sensor Default is 0 psig High Enter high limit for output pressure sensor Default is 87 psig 6 bars Air Supply Pressure Scaling Low Enter low limit for supply pressure sensor Default is 0 psig 248 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry High Enter high limit for supply pressure sensor Default is 87 psig 6 bars Lower Limit Enter the value for supply pressure below which an alarm i
231. ive Change 0 m Apply Cancel Help Figure C 6 Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen FoxCom Device 5 Set Step Size from menu 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply 6 Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown on the screen Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 When finished select Continue 9 The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Procedure for a HART Device 1 Select the mA Calibration from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Select 4 mA Output 109 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix C RTT20 T120 Temperature Transmitters m Calibration x This procedure will adjust the 4 m4 and 20 m4 output signals of the device Calibrate a m output signal by entering the Measured Value and pressing the Apply button Repeat this procedure until the Measured Value equals the value to be calibrated Press Continue to change signal and when finished Calibrate 4m4 Output Measured Value fas m Zins Output Apply Cancel Help Figure C 7 Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen HART Device 4 Enter the measured value and select Apply Repeat this step until the output matches the measured value
232. ix C RTT20 T120 Temperature TransmitterS oooooonmomensinnonionincnnnnioninnancanonacnnenos 101 Device Data Screen ii 101 Errot Messages A A A ia 102 CADDA A ae bea et ieee 103 N2Point Calibfation ei A ie tie ai aie 104 1 Point Calibration eecececcccceccseessssncccecececeensossccccceceseesessosnecsececessessssccnscceeseesenscneess 104 2 Poitit O A TNO 2 o ed o loo ula ladle eee el 104 3 and 5 Point Calibration eceeeeeeseccccccececssssneccccecececsesssacceceeccsssssenacacceecesensnsntaaeess 104 N Point Calibration Procedure ccesssscccececeesssensccececccecssssnenacceceecesensssncceseeceessseaaes 104 Guston Input Curve sisi ie id ia A ia k aian 105 Rena rassa e re SE A A AS 107 Restore Factory M s A i 107 mA G librati n iia aro dto id 108 Procedure for a FoxCom Device eeccssecccccecesessesccccecececessssenacceceeccsssssenaceececcesssessntnacers 108 vi Contents MI 024 495 October 2010 Procedure for a HART Device eeeeessecccccccsssssensccccecececssssseaccecececsessssntceecsecesensnsntaacers 109 CONASUTO A aa Raed ue tienes 110 Identifier Tab Screen eeeeeeececccccececesssssncccccecccecsessssnccecececsssesenaccecsecesensssnsaceeesesenensnenaees 110 LOCO DEVICE td coal ig Da Ss 111 HART DD Gye ests tested A A AS es 112 Input Tab Sr send eieaa eiA aiaia reia oa Saeesbavatteonebotebetocds 113 Options Ta Se eS 114 POX COM Device sE 114 HARI Device id alot a aeia 115 Display Tab o A Ad
233. l ld ll 101 Sample RTT20 N Point Calibration Seres rd naka li ancien en Leet 105 Sample RTT20 Custom Input Curve Sereetys ii e 106 Sample RTT20 ReRange Sere oia 107 Sample RTT20 Restore Factory Calibration Seen di 108 Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen FoxCom Device cooocnccnccococnnnoncnnnanancnnnacnncnnos 109 Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen HART Device ici ct eee nsade 110 Sample RTT20 Identifier Tab Screen FoxCom Device ardid 111 Sample RTT20 Identifier Tab Screen HART Device uds 112 Sample RTT20 Input Tab Sere add oa 113 Sample RTT20 Options Tab Screen FoxCom Device sssssssssssessssesesrserrrerrrerersrereeses 114 Sample RTT20 Options Tab Screen HART Device usina ica caricias 115 Sample RF T20 Display lab screech a dolia 116 Sample IMT20 Device Data Screen ati te E h 119 Sample IMT20 ReRange Sere tac e cia ainia elas 122 Sample IMT20 mA Calibration Screen asii 123 Sample IMT20 Identifier Tab Sereno conan 124 Sample IMT20 Transmitter Parameters IMT Tab Screen sesser 125 SamplelMT25 Device Data Sereno ra a hia 129 Sample IMT25 mA Calibration Screen FoxCom Device ccoococcncnocnnonnonconconnacnnnannncnnos 135 Sample mA Calibration Screen HART Device dio 136 Sample IMT25 Reset Totals Sere 137 Sample IMT25 Identifier Tab Screen viril 138 Sample IMT25 Flow Tab Sres 139 Sample IMT25 Alarms Tab Streets ea iiaii 140 Sample IMT25 Contacts Tab Screen neitin e eee E iat 141 Sample IMT25 Options Tab Setenta ina 142 Sample I
234. l the end of the line belongs to the comment IFDC PC20 Export Format The IFDC PC20 Export function contains all parameter value pairs of a device Do not rely on any order sorting of the parameters During the Export function each parameter value pair is followed by a comment which describes the parameter You can choose any filename for the export file 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 IFDC PC20 Import Format An ASCII file which is imported by IFDC PC20 does not need to have a certain filename The format of the file however needs to have the structure described above To import an ASCII file you need to open a device database or connect to a device of the same type The import file does not need to contain all parameters of a device It is possible to import only certain parameters The parameters are identified by their names The parameters do not need to have a specific order sorting For the import the comment part describing the parameter in each line is not needed But it is possible to add comments at any place NOTE Use the import function only with files generated by IFDC PC20 for the same device Do not change the exported files The import function does not check and validate the consistency of any parameter Changing an exported file and downloading this parameter to a device may damage the device configuration Example of the IFDC PC20 ASCII Format An example of the format follows
235. lect Total Max Frequency of 10 or 100 Hz Alarms Tab Screen IMT Device Configuration x Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer For All Alarms IV Alarming Enabled Iv Clear Alarms Automatically Rate Output Response No Effect T Blink On Alarm Y High Flow Rate IV Low Flow Rate Alarm Display Definition IV High Forward Totali Set Point 100000 0 y ds Tun On Al V High Forward Total2 Set Point 1000000 Set Point Deadband 10 0 GPM o o GPM Set Point joo GPM Deadband 10 0 GPM Turn Off All Cancel Appl Help Figure O 6 Sample IMT96 Alarms Tab Screen Field Entry For All Alarms Alarming Enabled y On Blank Off Clear Alarms Automatically y Auto Blank Manual Blink On Alarm y Blink Blank Don t Blink Rate Output Response High Flow Rate Alarm Display Definition Select No effect Go Downscale or Go Upscale On Blank Off If On enter Set Point and Deadband Low Flow Rate On Blank Off If On enter Set Point and Deadband 320 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry High Forward Total 1 V On Blank Off If On enter Set Point High Forward Total 2 y On Blank Off If On enter Set Point Empty Pipe On Blank Off Turn On All Turns all alarms on Turn Off All Turn
236. lecting Continue Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 151 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters 152 Zero Total This function sets the transmitter total measurement to zero The procedure to do this is as follows 1 Select Zero Total from the Calibration menu or the Zero Total icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Select Continue again to reset the transmitter total measurement to zero 4 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Restore Factory mA This function restores the factory mA calibration to the transmitter The procedure to perform this function is as follows 1 Select mA Calibration from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Select Restore Factory 4 20 mA Settings from the mA Calibration screen see Figure F 3 and then select Continue The factory calibration is restored 4 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required This procedure should only be performed if the mA value displayed on the Device Data screen does not agree with the value
237. lectronics module 31 Invalid P1 P5 Data Check configuration Reconfigure if necessary Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an IMT10 IMT20 transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurator ReRange mA Calibration 121 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters ReRange This function permits you to change the Flow Upper Range Value URV and the Display Upper Range Value without applying flow to the transmitter 1 Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue To rerange to another input span enter the desired upper and lower range values and press Continue Upper Range Value fi 55 914 Usgpm Display Upper Range Value P5 99 Usgpm Upper Limit 170 Usgpm Mininum Span 8 5 Usgpm Cancel Help Figure D 2 Sample IMT20 ReRange Screen 3 Enter the new Upper Range Value Note that the new value cannot exceed the value shown in the bottom left corner of the window nor can it be a value that would yield a span less than the minimum span shown in the bottom right corner of the window Select Continue 4 Select Continue again to save the new range to the device 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements
238. lligent Field Device Configurator It contains information on Device Data Screen Device Error Messages Calibration Configuration Sample Database Report Device Data Screen E Device Data Figure D 1 Sample IMT20 Device Data Screen 119 MI 024 495 October 2010 Error Messages Status Er ror Messages Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Table 20 Transmitter Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Initializing Transmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Error Error diagnostic error Messages to determine problem and corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the Status Error secondary status screen display Secondary Status Fields Signal Lock Set External contact is set Set by user no action required Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Received bad message problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Error Messages For additional information see MT20 with 8000A 8300 2800 and 9300 Transmitters
239. lock information and the IFDC access levels User Access Level Setting IFDC Access Level Fox View DM Mapping in IFDC Startup Access Environment Script IFDC_Security Level don t care Configuration 0 Configuration unprotected setacl 4 access level 4 unprotected Configuration 4 protected Configuration gt lt dmname gt ACL is set to 000000 setacl 4 access level 4 protected Configuration 4 protected Configuration not enabled gt lt dmname gt ACL is set to 000100 Calibration 5 protected Calibration enabled Startup Options See Figure 13 This tab enables users with the Workshop password to Start the program always off line or on line Ask the user for a password or not during startup Select the security level for startup Application Options x Directories IFD Modem Setup Password Security Options Startup Options To change the startup behavior of the Programm you have to enter the Password for the Workshop level and select Apply Three startup Parameters may be changed 1 Start Program always offline or online Program tries to connect right away 2 Ask the user for a password or not password protection switched off 3 Select security level for startup IV Start offline IV No Password Protection at Program Start Security Level at Program Start workshop y Enter Password for workshop Level porro OK Cancel Apply Help Figure 13 Sam
240. lows you to select the print font and font size The first time Print Font is entered the default font size may be blank or have an invalid numeric value Select the desired font and size Print Preview When the station is connected to a device or is used to preconfigure a device a device database report is available Print Preview provides a window which displays what the actual printed report looks like The one item to note in Print Preview is that the font size if set too big causes only part of the report to be visible on a given page If the selected font size is the smallest size provided for the selected font then the only way to scale the font further is to invoke Print Setup and set the Scale to a smaller value For example if the default font is Times and the font size is 8 a print setup scale of 0 05 allows a 2 column report per page IFDC Printing on Station with Windows Operating System Due to the nature of the Windows operating system a printer connected to the I A Series Nodebus via a communications processor is not accessible from Windows applications Therefore to print IFDC database reports the Windows based station must have a printer connected directly to the Windows based station parallel port and this must be the printer used Another option is to print the IFDC database reports to a file then transfer the report file to a diskette and take it to a Windows PC which has a printer directly connected and print the r
241. lue If ON enter dc mA output between 3 8 and 20 5 mA mA Output If 4 20 mA Mode specify Absolute Measurement or Temperature Output Max Value If 4 20 mA Mode enter 20 mA range value Output Min Value If 4 20 mA Mode enter 4 mA range value Local Display Major Passcode Enter 4 digit passcode Minor Passcode Enter 4 digit passcode Display Timeout Enter timeout between 0 and 999 seconds Secondary Meas Select Temperature Absolute or mA Damping Select damping response time of 1 5 10 20 40 or 120 seconds AC Frequency Select 50 or 60 Hz Measurement Tab Screen 870PH Transmitter Configuration x Identifier Sensor Output Measurement Diagnostic Temperature Units i C Celsius E Fahrenhei Failure Value fr F Moda Manual Temperature 86 F C Automatic Manual Temperature Sensor 1000 ohm 3 wire Stability Indicators Measurement Stability Temperature Stability Stability Time Stability Variant fs Stability Time Stability Variant fs Cancel Apply Help Figure J 12 Sample 870ITPH Measurement Tab Screen 224 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP SE Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Temperature Units Select Celsius or Fahrenheit Mode Select Automatic or Manual Failure Value If Mode is Automatic enter temperature in case RTD fails Manual Temperature If Mode is Manual enter temperatu
242. lue on the meter Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 Select Continue to save the calibration to the transmitter Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Restore Factory Calibration This function changes the corrected values for the sensor trim done by Point Calibration back to their default values It is accessed via the Calibration menu from the device top level menu 281 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Specification Sensor Tab Screen The Sensor Tab screen displays sensor specific information which is stored in the transmitter It is accessed via the View menu from the device top level menu 140 Device Specification Figure L 24 Sample Specification Sensor Tab Screen Displacer Tab Screen The Displacer Tab screen is only displayed for the 144LVD and 144LD devices The screen displays displacer specific information which is stored in the transmitter It is accessed via the View menu from the device top level menu 282 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 140 Device Specification Figure L 25 Sample Specification Displacer Tab Screen 283 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters 284 Ap pendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters This appendix provi
243. mA 5307 Prim Scale CMCP 3 02 Meas 2 Units C Prim Scale CMRG 1 0 Temp Units 1 01 Prim Scale CMRG 2 0 Temp Units 2 01 Prim Scale CMRG 3 0 Temp Units 3 01 Display Second 1 01 Chem Size Appl 1 15 Display Second 2 00 Chem Size Appl 2 02 Display Second 3 00 Chem Size Appl 3 02 Temp Comp TPCP 1 04 Temp Comp Temp 1 1 10 Temp Comp TPCP 2 16 Temp Comp Val 1 1 0 Temp Comp TPCP 3 04 Temp Comp Temp 2 1 10 Temp Comp 1 1 Temp Comp Val 2 1 0 Temp Comp 2 0 5 Temp Comp Temp 3 1 10 Temp Comp 3 0 5 Temp Comp Val 3 1 0 Reference Temp 1 20 Temp Comp Temp 4 1 10 Reference Temp 2 0 Temp Comp Val 4 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 5 1 10 Temp Comp Val 2 2 0 Temp Comp Val 5 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 3 2 0 299 MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 44 Sample Database Report Continued Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Parameter Value Parameter Value Temp Comp Temp 6 1 10 Temp Comp Val 3 2 Temp Comp Val 6 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 4 2 Temp Comp Temp 7 1 10 Temp Comp Val 4 2 Temp Comp Val 7 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 5 2 Temp Comp Temp 8 1 10 Temp Comp Val 5 2 Temp Comp Val 8 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 6 2 Temp Comp Temp 9 1 10 Temp Comp Val 6 2 Temp Comp Val 9 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 7 2 Temp Comp Temp 10 1 Temp Comp Val 7 2 Temp Comp Val 10 1 Temp Comp Temp 8 2 Temp Comp Temp 11 1 Temp Comp Val 8 2 Temp Comp Val 11 1 Temp Comp Temp 9 2
244. manufacturer and or the HART Foundation Device Data Screen Device Data Tag Number TAG Tag Name PEPPERL FUCHS Manufacturer PEPPERL_FUCHS Device Type 238 Primary Wariable 32 9920 mbar Second Variable degC Third Variable sont Fourth Variable Current Figure N 1 Sample Non Foxboro Device Data Screen 305 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix N Non Foxboro Devices Using HART Configuration Identifier Tab Screen Generic HART Device 11 06 2001 PEPPERL FUCHS Figure N 2 Sample Non Foxboro Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Enter the device tag with a maximum of 8 characters Descriptor Enter the device descriptor with a maximum of 16 characters Date Enter the date Message Enter the message with maximum of 32 characters 306 Appendix N Non Foxboro Devices Using HART Communication Protocol MI 024 495 October 2010 Input Tab Screen Generic HART Device Figure N 3 Generic HART Input Screen Field Entry Lower Range Limit Shows the Lower Range Limit of the device Upper Range Limit Shows the Upper Range Limit of the device Primary Variable Units Enter the units of the Primary variable Minimum Span Shows the minimum span of the device 307 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix N Non Foxboro Devices Using HART Output Tab Screen Generic HART Device Figure N 4 Sample Non Foxboro Out
245. mation and the technical note TI EMP0600B for detailed information about calibration and reranging If this transmitter is in the IDP10 B compatibility mode and is connected to the IFDC PC20 it displays the message box shown in Figure L 1 during the startup phase 257 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Intelligent Field Device Configurator x fou are connected to an 1 4 Series 140 FoxCom Transmitter which identifies itself as IDP10 B With this identification it is not possible to change the configuration or do any calibration of this transmitter If you want to configure this transmitter you have to change the transmitter type 1 Call the dialog to change the transmitter type with the keys lt Alt Ctrl T gt 2 Choose the transmitter you have Figure L 1 Identification of a 140 Series Transmitter Running in IPD10 B Compatibility Mode The PC20 software recognizes that the connected device is a 140 Series transmitter running in the IDP10 B compatibility mode In this mode it is not possible to change the configuration or to do any calibration of the transmitter The measurement information from the device however is continuously read and displayed in the Device Data window as shown in Figure L 2 a Intelligent Field Device Configurator Device Data OF x File Edit View Calibrate Test Utilities User Options Window Help 8 Pld 21x eea Device Data
246. mmunication Failures FoxCom Protocol PC20 Fault Analysis Repeated Communication Failures HART Protocol Sample Device Data lll e Sample Rezero creen da e E ta teeta tas tat tA s Sample Point Calibration Screen a id Sample ReRange Screen FoxCom Device iii ia la Sample ReRange Screen HART DA pias Sample mia libration Screen daratnan na aR ele R EAA Sample RTT20 mA Calibration Screen HART Deicide Sample Identifier Tab Screen FoxCom Device ssssseeeeessissisisisisisrrrrisereresereseseses Sample Identifier Tab Screen HART Device viii tie Sample Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen FoxCom Device 0 Sample Transmitter Parameter Configuration Tab Screen HART Device cee sample RT TIO Device Data A aa sa ed nates Sample RTT10 N Point Calibration Ser iii xiii MI 024 495 October 2010 Figures B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 C 11 C 12 C 13 D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 E 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 E 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 E 10 F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 G 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 xiv Sample RECTI O ReRange Sereen da a o ho idm us 93 Sample RTT10 Custom Input Curve Screen icc oan cas he cane eee 94 RTT10 Epable Custom Curvye Screenin ocrni Sd 95 Sample RTT10 mA Calibration Er is 96 Sample RTT10 Identifier Tab Screen iii Ai 97 Sample RTT10 Transmitter Parameters Tab Screen ctra edison 98 Sample RTT20 Device Data sotehas denta
247. mp Comp Temp 21 3 0 Temp Comp Temp 3 3 Temp Comp Val 21 3 0 Temp Comp Val 3 3 Chem Comp Temp 1 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 4 3 Chem Comp Val 1 1 0 Temp Comp Val 4 3 Chem Comp Temp 2 1 0 300 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters Table 44 Sample Database Report Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Temp Comp Temp 5 3 Chem Comp Val 2 1 Temp Comp Val 5 3 Chem Comp Temp 3 1 Temp Comp Temp 6 3 Chem Comp Val 3 1 Temp Comp Val 6 3 Chem Comp Temp 4 1 Temp Comp Temp 7 3 Chem Comp Val 4 1 Temp Comp Val 7 3 Chem Comp Temp 5 1 Temp Comp Temp 8 3 Chem Comp Val 5 1 Temp Comp Val 8 3 Chem Comp Temp 6 1 Temp Comp Temp 9 3 Chem Comp Val 6 1 Temp Comp Val 9 3 Chem Comp Temp 7 1 Temp Comp Temp 10 3 Chem Comp Val 7 1 Temp Comp Val 10 3 Chem Comp Temp 8 1 Temp Comp Temp 11 3 Chem Comp Val 8 1 Temp Comp Val 11 3 Temp Comp Temp 12 3 Chem Comp Temp 9 1 Chem Comp Val 9 1 Temp Comp Val 12 3 Chem Comp Temp 10 1 Temp Comp Temp 13 3 Temp Comp Val 13 3 Chem Comp Val 10 1 Chem Comp Temp 11 1 Temp Comp Temp 14 3 Chem Comp Val 11 1 Temp Comp Val 14 3 Temp Comp Temp 15 3 Chem Comp Temp 12 1 Chem Comp Val 12 1 Temp Comp Val 15 3 Chem Comp Temp 13 1 Temp Comp Temp 16 3 Temp Comp
248. mp Comp Val 2 3 0 Temp Comp Val 20 3 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 3 3 0 Temp Comp Temp 21 3 0 208 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Table 36 Sample Database Report Continued MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Temp Comp Val 3 3 0 22 Temp Comp Val 21 3 0 22 Temp Comp Temp 4 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 1 1 0 Temp Comp Val 4 3 0 22 Chem Comp Val 1 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 5 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 2 1 0 Temp Comp Val 5 3 0 22 Chem Comp Val 2 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 6 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 3 1 0 Temp Comp Val 6 3 0 22 Chem Comp Val 3 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 7 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 4 1 0 Temp Comp Val 7 3 0 22 Chem Comp Val 4 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 8 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 5 1 0 Temp Comp Val 8 3 0 22 Chem Comp Val 5 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 9 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 6 1 0 Temp Comp Val 9 3 0 22 Chem Comp Val 6 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 10 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 7 1 0 Temp Comp Val 10 3 0 22 Chem Comp Val 7 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 11 3 0 Chem Comp Temp 8 1 0 Temp Comp Val 11 3 89041 48 Chem Comp Val 8 1 0 Custom Table X Y R W 15969 Chem Comp Temp 9 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 12 3 0 Chem Comp Val 9 1 0 Temp Comp Val 12 3 0 22 Chem Comp Temp 10 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 13 3 0 Chem Comp Val 10 1 0 Temp Comp Val 13 3 0 22 Chem Comp Temp 11 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 14 3 0 Chem Comp Val 11 1 0 Temp Comp Val 14 3 0 22 Chem Com
249. mperature Calibration Screen 218 Sample 8701TPH mA Calibration Screen iria id 219 Sample 870ITPH Identifier Fab Sereeniei ssc ecco pec A E 220 Sample 870ITPH Sensor Tab Serena A i 221 C stom Buffers Screen osese ota Ao aoa ona noe Rea ho aoe 222 Custom Temperature Compensation Jere diodes 222 Custom Chemical Compensation Ort II 223 Sample 870I PH Output Tab Screen s ssssseseeesiseereestsrsrsrsrsrsrstsrsrsrststsesestseseseseseseseses 223 Sample 870I TPH Measurement Tab Serena ia edie 224 Sample 870ITPH Diagnostic Tab Sere tl 225 Sample SRDI91 Device Data e eo 231 Standard Profibus Data rn a A COS 232 Sample SRD991 Identifier Tab Screen datada dosis 241 Sample SRD991 Parameters Tab Soren iii a 242 Sample SRD991 Configuration Tab Cree iii dd lod ca 243 Sample SRD991 Characterization Tab Screen iaa 244 XV MI 024 495 October 2010 Figures K 7 K 8 K 9 K 10 K 11 K 12 K 13 K 14 L 1 L 2 L 3 L 4 L 5 L 6 L 7 L 8 L 9 L 10 L 11 L 12 L 13 L 14 L 15 L 16 L 17 L 18 L 19 L 20 L 21 L 22 L 23 L 24 L 25 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M 8 M 9 M 10 M 11 N 1 N 2 xvi Sample oR 90d Travel Fab Sn teta et lait 245 sample sRIDI91 Alarms Labra it 246 Sample SRD991 Tuning Tab Screen wy 27 09 tee Oped aa ta Ree ON aac 247 Sample SRD991 Pressure Tab Serial Its 248 Sample SRD991 Options Tab Sereetyyiisi gests pin ii 249 Sample SRD991 Bin In Tab eS cri tin 250 Sample SRD991 Bin Out Tab srta lacs cate a ano ee ad see 25
250. n RTT Transmitter Configuration EGU and Perc Y FOXBORO Figure C 13 Sample RTT20 Display Tab Screen Field Entry Type of Display Installed Shows None One Line or Three Line indicator installed Pushbutton Enable y Enabled Blank Disabled Language Select English French German or Spanish Top Line Display Select from menu EGU Percent of Range mA EGU and Percent or EGU and mA Bottom Line Label If three line display enter maximum of seven characters 116 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters Database Report Table 19 Sample Database Report MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 32 Cal Point X3 30 Tag Number STD2 Cal Point Y3 50 Tag Name Tag Name Cal Point X4 0 Device Name DevNam Cal Point Y4 0 Geo Location Location Cal Point X5 0 Sensor Number 03 Cal Point Y5 0 Upper Range Limit 850 Cal Point X6 0 Lower Range Limit 200 Cal Point Y6 0 Sensor Validation 0 5 Cal Point X7 0 Failsafe 01 Cal Point Y7 0 Failsafe Value 21 Cal Point X8 0 Local Indic Type 02 Cal Point Y8 0 Local Indic Keys 00 Cal Point X9 0 Local Indic Lang 00 Cal Point Y9 0 Local Indic Disp 02 Cal Point X10 0 Output Mode 01 Cal Point Y10 0 Measurement Units 20 Cal Point X11 0 Intel Smoothing 10 Cal Point Y11 0 Sensor Type 01 Cal Poin
251. n 3 Figure I 5 Sample 870ITEC Solution 2 Point Calibration Screen Enter the low and high solution values and the calibrator s initials and select Continue Immerse the sensor in the low calibration solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating Immerse the sensor in the high calibration solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Temperature Sensor Calibration This option permits you to calibrate the temperature sensor to the known temperature of a solution 1 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration function See page 203 2 Select Temperature Sensor from the Calibration menu 3 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 199 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Temperature Calibration Application 1 y Figure I 6 Sample 870ITEC Temperature Calibration 4 Enter the solution temperature and the calibrator s initials and select Continue 5 Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue 6 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function
252. n Foxboro Devices Using HART Communication Protocol 305 Device Data crec aaa aia decias 305 Confpuration A A ta 306 Identifier Tab Screen uiraa n a a a nn nn nnnnnn nn nen nn nano a a A iE 306 A O 307 A A nei eens 308 HART Tab A a ee ter a 309 Commands Dil br do 310 Calibration ON AE ATS A E A RI Bae esta O Pode 311 A RT 312 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters oooococcocnncnnoninnononncnnannnnnnonnonncnncnncnnonos 313 Dice Data Screen 15 A e GE e oe la t s o SO 313 Error Messages A A 313 Calibration er its bad o La e o ca a Sas 315 mA OUtp t Aide a lr actes 315 Res t Total ona alo dial date hd eens hd bated toate Aided aah 316 A OW gee nek O EN 317 Restore Zero Flow Default c eeecceeeeecesseseccccecececessssentccececececsssssenaececeeecessssenacceceeeeeeneeeas 317 PulsesPreset ON 317 Conhe tato a A EEO EE EO TO elses 318 Identifier Tab Screen o ceeeessssscccececececsecsneccccececeesessacccceccceesssenecaccecececsesesenaceeceesenessssaaees 318 Plow TabiScreenn ii A e iia 319 Alarms Tab Seremi taa 320 Contacts Tab Sra A A A ia 321 Options Tab Screen anodino de ee id encase 322 Display Totalizer Tab Screen a en a e 323 Database Report NS 324 diia laira 327 xii Figures WN BR QDD NH 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A S A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 A 11 B 1 B 2 Relationships Among Processors and Field Devices 0 scssss
253. n frame lengt mt number of message retry cycles per token rotation RET TMC message retry cycle time Profibus Slave Page In the Profibus Slaves page you can define all slaves connected to the Profibus master For each slave to which you want to connect define The slave address 61 MI 024 495 October 2010 62 3 Operation The name of the slave The name is only for internal use and helps you identify the different slaves Table 11 Profibus Slave Page Actions Action Description Add To define a new slave enter the address and name of the slave device on the right side and press Add The new slave is added to the list of slaves in the list box Modify To modify the information of a slave select the slave in the list box edit the address or name in the edit controls on the right side and press Modify Delete To delete a slave select the slave in the list box and press Delete Connect To connect to a certain device select the slave device with the appropriate slave address in the slave list and press the Connect button The program leaves the configuration dialog box and connects to the selected device From now on PC20 will connect to this device with the menu selection File gt Connect to Device If you want to connect to a different slave enter the Profibus Configuration dialog box again and select another slave 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010
254. n or select the Back menu item in the upper left system menu and close the open dialog box Inthe center it displays the parameter currently being accessed Next if the active window is connected with the device or if it is a preconfiguration dialog box it displays the type of connection with the device Pre Config preconfiguration FoxCom Modem direct communication through the FoxCom modem PC20 only HART Modem direct communication through the HART modem PC20 only FoxCom FBM connection via the I A Series system FoxCom FBM HART FBM connection via the I A Series system HART FBM Last it displays the communication status or action being taken Online for the selected window there is a connection to the device 25 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Not connected for the selected window not device is connected Retrieving reading information from the device Storing information in the device Wait for OM IFDC is waiting for response from the I A Series Object Manager Wait for PT IPC IFDC is waiting for response from the I A Series Pass Thru Interprocess Communication Component Info Window The program is equipped with an info window at the bottom of the screen that can be shown or hidden by using the View menu It can be resized with a mouse To resize the info window move the mouse over the border the courser changes to the resizing symbol and hold down the ri
255. n permits you to calibrate the temperature sensor to the known temperature of a solution 1 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the Configuration function See page 295 Select Temperature Sensor from the Calibration menu 3 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 291 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters 292 Temperature Calibration x Enter the solution temperature and the calibrator s initials then press Continue m Calibrate Application Number Application 18 Solution Temperature fo Range 99 90 to 999 90 C Calibrator s Initials RW Calibrated Date 09 12 2001 Cancel Help Figure M 5 Sample 870ITCR Temperature Calibration Enter the solution temperature and the calibrator s initials and select Continue Immerse the sensor in the solution and select Continue Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Calibration As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required However the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the output to the output of a specific receiving device The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration is l PU Fe eS N Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor
256. nd select Continue 6 When the displayed measurement is stable select Continue The average of the last five readings is shown Select Continue again to accept this value 7 Ifyou selected a 2 Point Calibration enter your desired Upper Calibration Point apply the upper calibration point pressure to the device and select Continue 8 When the displayed measurement is stable select Continue The average of the last five readings is shown Select Continue again to accept this value 76 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 9 Enter the calibrator s initials and select Continue The current calibration date is automatically displayed 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements ReRange FoxCom Device This function enables you to rerange your device without applying calibration pressure The procedure follows 1 Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Enter your desired Lower Range Value LRV and Upper Range Value URV in either units shown and select Continue 4 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Device Rerange x Press Continue to save the calibration to the device Lower Range Value o 0
257. ng Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Probe Error Indicates an error with the probe If Coat error clean probe If Lowslope error replace buffer solution if contaminated For other problems replace probe Temp Comp Problem in temperature Check ATC connection Verify process temperature Error measurement Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Amplifier Error Out of range error Check probe Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Extended Status Hardware ATC Open Resistance of temperature compensation is less than expected resistance of device configured Replace temperature compensator ATC Short Resistance of temperature compensation is greater than expected resistance of device configured Replace temperature compensator Coat Error Reference junction resistance in relation to solution ground is less than user set limit Clean electrode 214 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP SE Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 37 Transmitter Status Error Messages Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Glass Res Error Resistance of glass Replace electrode electrode in relation to solution ground is less than user set limit Aging Error Aging glass electrode Check value of slope See 870 TPH pH ISE
258. nnect to Device the device top level menu and Device Data screen is presented This screen identifies the device and continuously reads and displays measurement information from the device as shown in Figure 18 Measurements are updated approximately once every two seconds The display also shows additional information as follows Measurement values are displayed in red if the specific measurement is out of range or the device reports an alarm for this measurement Measurement values are displayed in cyan if the value is not secure not current and the last retrieved value is displayed All measured values are cyan if there are communication problems Measurements are replaced by asterisks ifa communication error occurs during initialization or reinstallation steps Dashes indicate off line status Number signs indicate that these is an invalid measurement Downloading Database Information to a Device CAUTION 1 Before using this function it is highly recommended that you save the existing device data in your database Since the factory does not maintain the databases on every device shipped overwriting the original coefficients with different values can result in permanent loss of the accuracy and repeatability resulting from factory calibration To download working database information to a device 1 Hardwire your device to the FBM or Fieldbus for IFDC or to the modem FBM and or optional power supply unit
259. nostic Error or Secondary Status Error also displayed Electrode Test Coil Test Unreliable measure ment of electrode voltage Unreliable measure ment of coil current See Extended Status Hardware below See Extended Status Hardware below Extended Status Hardware Coils Low Coil Current Test High Coil Current Test Positive Coil Test Negative Coil Test Transmitter unable to generate a reliable measurement of coil current Check coil wiring at flowtube and transmitter Service is required Check wiring and flowtube coil Electrodes Electrode in Transmitter unable to Check signal wiring between flowtube and transmitter Range Test generate a reliable Also see MI 020 391 Positive measurement of Electrode Test _ electrode voltage Negative Electrode Test Setup MultiRange Setup needed Check that Configuration and Contact Inputs 1 and 2 Setup are set up properly Extended Status Process Process Problems 314 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 47 Transmitter Status Error Messages Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Signal Lock Signal lock is on Check that Contact Inputs 1 and 2 are activated by an Test external set of contacts or switch Pulses Lag Totalizer putting out Reconfigure totalizer display so that each
260. nt SP or RCAS_IN RCAS OUT is offered for the DCS System or other function blocks OUT Status Error Messages Output Setpoint of the function block in units of OUT SCALE with status It is valid when the function block is in mode AUTO or RCAS In mode MAN this value can be specified by the operator engineer Table 39 Field Device Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Temp High Temperature above Operation outside temperature limit may damage allowed limit positioner components and violate electrical safety Temp Low Temperature below certification requirements Stop operating positioner allowed limit Invalid Invalid configuration Correct configuration perform Restore Factory Configuration Settings rerun Autostart procedure Travel Sum Travel sum has Check valve performance and conduct maintenance if Limit exceeded limit necessary configured Cycle Count Cycle count has Check valve performance and conduct maintenance if Limit exceeded limit necessary configured Input Loop Input signal requires Perform Analog Setpoint Calibration procedure Trim calibration Feedback Feedback unit requires Perform Angle Calibration procedure Trim calibration 233 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Table 39 Field Device Status Error Messages Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action No A
261. ntact the CSC Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not Received bad message clear problem contact the CSC Stability Error Raw measurement has Check wiring Select Test gt Go On Line If been unstable this does not clear problem contact the CSC Probe Error Problem with the sensor Replace sensor Temp Comp Error Problem in temperature Check ATC connection Verify process measurement temperature Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Amplifier Error Out of range error Check sensor Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Extended Status Hardware ATC Open Resistance of temperature Replace temperature compensator ATC Short compensation is greater or less than expected resistance of device configured Leak Error Solution leakage into sensor Replace sensor App1 Cal Req Application 1 calibration Calibrate required App2 Cal Req Application 2 calibration Calibrate required 286 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 43 Transmitter Status Error Messages Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action App3 Cal Req Application 3 calibration Calibrate required Cal Comp Error Indicates a problem in Recalibrate the transmitter If problem persists the previous calibration contact the CSC Cal Slope
262. ntelligent Devices for example FoxCom HART have an IT Maint or IFDC button Selecting the IT Maint or IFDC button starts IFDC and IFDC connects directly to the displayed device MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 2 From the menu of the standard I A Series Display Manager or FoxView select Config IT_Maint to start IFDC IFDC displays the Device Selection Dialog The Device Selection dialog shows in a tree structure the CPs ECBs and channels device block names which are able to support Intelligent Devices After you select a channel and press the Connect button IFDC establishes a connection to the selected device NOTE After configuration changes for example after new FBMs and devices are added the tree information within the Device Selection dialog boxes needs to be updated by selecting the Refresh button General Information Because the programs can be connected to a variety of Foxboro Intelligent Devices and can perform a variety of functions menu items may be missing or grayed out Missing menu items are never allowed for the connected device Grayed out items are not allowed under the present condition but may be allowed under different conditions For example mA Calibration would be available for a device configured with a 4 to 20 mA output but grayed out for a device configured for a digital output Database Files 20 The tremendous benefits derived from using microprocessor based devices is well kn
263. ntil the output matches the measured value 9 Select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 80 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters Configuration Identifier Tab Screen The Identifier screen for a FoxCom device is somewhat different than that for a HART device A description of each follows FoxCom Device 820 Transmitter Configuration Boiler Flow Plant 34 Sout Figure A 8 Sample Identifier Tab Screen FoxCom Device Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the database filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with I A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only MI 024 495 October 2010 81 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters Hart Device IZA Pressure Device Configuration FOXBORO1 SAMPLE D P CEL INSTR LOCATION HOWDY Figure A 9 Sample Identifier Tab Screen HART Device Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 8 characters The tag number becomes the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 16 characters
264. ntries influence the behavior of the communications Do not change any of the other entries which are entered by the program itself The displayed values below are the default times and are in effect when no entry is in the foxifdc ini file The x values are internal times and not equivalent to seconds The PC hardware operating system connected device protocol modem barriers cable lengths and so forth can influence the settings The manual entries must match exactly wording and spaces as described below A CAUTION There can be many reasons why PC20 may not communicate with a functional device You may not have a sufficient loop load the modem could be defective the cable is attached to the wrong place on the loop wiring the device you are trying to communicate with is not a FoxCom Intelligent Device and so forth Therefore this section only applies if 1 the communication problem is intermittent PC20 works OK sometimes and sometimes you get messages such as Error in Sending a Read Request or 2 there are no problems communicating to a device in the maintenance shop but the same computer has communication problems on similar devices installed in the field or 3 When trying to communicate with a device both LEDs light up on the modem but you cannot establish communications A For automatic Workshop Environment Entry to be typed in the Settings x for x for section Windows 95 Windows NT Start with fa
265. nue again to accept this value and save it to the transmitter 7 Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for Calibration Point 2 8 Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements ReRange This function enables you to rerange your device without applying inputs representing temperatures The procedure to do this is as follows 1 Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Enter your desired Lower Range Value LRV and Upper Range Value URV and select Continue 92 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Device Rerange x To rerange to another input span enter the desired upper and lower range values and press Continue Range Settings Lower Range Value 4m 200 E Upper Range Value 20m 850 E Range Limits 200 00 to 850 00 C Cancel Figure B 3 Sample RTT10 ReRange Screen 4 At the prompt select Continue to save the new range to the transmitter 5 Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Custom Input Curve This function permits you to correct for inaccuracies in the input sensor by entering measurement and offset values for 12 points on the curve The system then calculates a smooth input curve that foll
266. o I A Series system Pressure Invensys I A Series system Pressure and Viatran I A Series system Pressure Temperature RTT10 RTT20 and T120 Series Magnetic Flow IMT25 and IMT25L Series Vortex 83 Series Buoyancy 130 and 140 Series Intelligent Positioner SRD991 SRD960 SRD970 and NAF LinkIT Non Foxboro Devices Universal and Common Practice commands only IFDC The IFDC software package enables you to communicate with Foxboro Intelligent Devices via Workstation Processors WPs and Application Workstations AWs The IFDC supports AW WP51s and AW WP70s All Intelligent Field Devices are connected to the Foxboro Fieldbus through Fieldbus Modules or interface modules The Foxboro Fieldbus in turn is connected to the system through the Control Processor CP The CP continually scans the device for its measurement and status data This data is stored in the CP database If a device is connected and on line the information in the CP always reflects the information in the device Figure 1 shows the relationships among processors and field devices MI 024 495 October 2010 1 Introduction Hard Drive AW Device Foxboro Configuration Fieldbus Database Control Processor I A Series Pressure RTT10 RTT20 TI20 IMT10 20 25 25L Download Xmtr 870ITPH EC CR Control SRD991 Database 140 Default System Display Management Display HTG Solaris only Figure 1 Relationships Among Processors
267. o service 4 Troubleshooting MI 024 495 October 2010 A CAUTION For the trace function you need enough disk space on the opt partition to generate the trace files After the trace files are generated the trace function should be switched off by deleting the file IFDC_Trace 67 MI 024 495 October 2010 4 Troubleshooting PC20 Fault Analysis of Communication Failures FoxCom Protocol 68 4 Troubleshooting MI 024 495 October 2010 This fault analysis Step 1 After launching the program do you always get a message is for repeated Could not initialize the IFD Modem followed by a message after communication clicking the OK button Unable to establish connection Either no failures only modem or no device on the modem was found Yes Step 2 Under the File menu click on Connect to Device Do both of the LEDs on the modem Talk and Listen light up at various times No before you see the messages in Step 1 Increase voltage or reduce loop load Repeat Step 2 Do you still get the same messages Is voltage at device Step 3 Under the Options menu select Settings field terminals at IFD Modem Setup and change the COM port least 16 V dc Repeat Step 2 Do both LEDs illuminate No Replace cable Are RS 232 cable connections at modem and computer tight N Yes N o 9 No Is there continuity in Tighten cable connections Repeat the RS 232 cable Step 2 Do both LED s illuminate
268. o000 inH20 T 0 00000 inH20 10 00000 inH20 Upper Range Value 100 0000 inH20 inH20 inH20 Upper Range Limit 100 00000 inH20 100 00000 inH20 Cancel Help Figure A 4 Sample ReRange Screen FoxCom Device HART Device This function enables you to rerange your device without applying calibration pressure The procedure follows MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters 78 Select ReRange from the Calibration menu or the ReRange icon from the device toolbar Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Enter your desired Lower Range Value LRV and Upper Range Value URV in units shown If a measurement is in Square Root mode enter the Span for that measurement If in Linear mode enter Span Offset for each measurement Select Continue Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Device Rerange Figure A 5 Sample ReRange Screen HART Device Restore Default This function enables you to restore all calibration parameters to their factory default settings 1 2 3 Select Restore Default from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue To reconfirm that you want to restore all calibration parameters to their default settings select Continue Follow the prompt to put the device back
269. obat Reader and enters it on the left side In this example C is the drive containing the Acrobat Reader Please correct this entry if the path entry is not correct or you want to use another version of the Acrobat Reader The second part points to the path with the Instruction Book CD ROM In this example D is the CD ROM drive Please remember that the CD ROM must be installed in the drive when accessing the instruction book via the MI icon on the toolbar 3 Operation Running the PC20 Program To run the program double click the PC20 icon or access the program from the Start menu The PC20 program may be started with different arguments To see the program arguments right click on the shortcut icon and select Properties Select the Shortcut tab The Target dialog box shows the program arguments After installation of PC20 the program arguments are defined as follows For example C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC foxifdc exe prot all This program argument causes PC20 to start in the flexible protocol mode After starting PC20 the user is asked for the protocol of the device to which a connection should be established Select the protocol for example FoxCom HART or Profibus and press OK to connect to the device Select Cancel if PC20 should not connect to a device and to do Pre Configuration In the flexible protocol mode it is possible to connect to one device with FoxCom protocol and afterwards to connect to anoth
270. ode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Automatic Calibration This option provides a buffer recognition mechanism that locks in the buffer value representing millivolts and temperature being reported from the sensor using known reference solutions The algorithm checks each buffer starting with Buffer 1 and selects the first one for which this pH is 217 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP SE Transmitters within 0 5 pH of the average pH for the buffer If not within 0 5 pH of any buffer table no buffer is selected 1 Select Automatic Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Enter the calibrator s initials and select Continue Immerse the sensor in the low solution and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating Immerse the sensor in the high solution and select Continue at oY ee ee S Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated 8 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Temperature Sensor This option permits you to calibrate the temperature sensor to the known temperature of a solution 1 Select Temperature Sensor from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 870pH Temperature Calibration x Enter the solution temp
271. og FoxCom or HART Device with Remote Power 120 V ac 24 V de TRANSFORMER RECTIFIER OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY RED ies oa DEVICE POWER series resistor BLACK CONNECTOR NOTE 250 OHM RESISTANCE INCLUDED IN POWER SUPPLY BOX RS 232 cable to serial port of computer Figure 3 FoxCom Device with Optional Power Supply 14 2 Installation MI 024 495 October 2010 120 V ac 24 V de TRANSFORMER RECTIFIER OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY _ UNIT INTELLIGENT with 250 ohm _ DEVICE POWER series resistor CONNECTOR NOTE 250 OHM RESISTANCE INCLUDED IN POWER SUPPLY BOX RS 232 CABLE TO SERIAL PORT OR COMPUTER Figure 4 HART Device with Optional Power Supply 250 ohm RESISTOR RS 232 CABLE TO SERIAL PORT OF COMPUTER Figure 5 Analog FoxCom or HART Device Connected to I A Series System FBMO1 or FBM04 15 MI 024 495 October 2010 2 Installation FBM18 39 e FIELD 43 44 46 DEVICE 243 or 246 RS 232 CABLE TO SERIAL PORT OF COMPUTER Figure 6 Digital FoxCom Device Connected to I A Series System FBM18 39 43 44 46 243 or 246 RS 232 CABLE TO SERIAL PORT OF COMPUTER POWER SUPPLY FIELD FBM43 44 OR 243 DEVICE Figure 7 Analog or Digital FoxCom Device Connected to I A Series System FBM43 44 or 243 with Remote Power Connecting a Printer If hard copy reports are required a standard text printer with a parallel interface connected to the PC printer port LPT1 o
272. oiler Flow UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Device Name DevNam UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Geo Location Plant 3A West UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Meas 1 Units Usgpm UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Meas 2 Units UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Flow Upper Range 155 914 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Flow Lower Range 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Upper Range Limit 170 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Lower Range Limit 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Last Calib Date 1 25 94 UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sensor Mfg Date 5 4 93 0 Scale Factor P1 P2 UNUSED UNUSED 0 29000 Display Upper Range 99 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0 UNUSED 0 Sensor Id Number 01 00 UNUSED 0 Sensor MS Code 2b UNUSED 0 Device Type 2a UNUSED 0 Manufacture Date 5 4 93 0 Minor Revision Code 2b 0 Major Revision Code 05 UNUSED 0 Max Request Length 8192 UNUSED 0 Max Reply Length 8192 0 Max Param Number 5b UNUSED 0 TON Count 4 mA 3640 UNUSED 0 TON Count 20 mA 16355 UNUSED 0 126 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 22 Sample Database Report Continued
273. om before or after the above suggested subdirectories Database File Compatibility PC20 to PC20 Any database file created with an earlier PC20 release for example 1 0 or 2 0 is totally compatible on any other computer running the latest PC20 revision Any database file created with PC20 BETA software may not be compatible If you were a Foxboro BETA tester we recommend that you resave all device database files PC20 to IFDC Beginning with Version 2 2 of PC20 and IFDC any PC20 database for any device other than the Mass Flow Transmitter CFT10 and CFT 15 is interchangeable with IFDC Windows and Solaris versions For database files generated with PC20 versions before Rev 2 2 the following restrictions must be considered 21 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 22 Any PC20 database for any device other than the Mass Flow Transmitter CFT 10 is interchangeable with IFDC Windows version only Any Mass Flow Transmitter CFT10 and CFT 15 database created in PC20 is not compatible with a Solaris or Windows version of IFDC e Any PC20 database for any device is not compatible with IFDC Solaris version only For database files generated with PC20 versions before Rev 2 2 the following restrictions must be considered Any PC20 database for any device other than the Mass Flow Transmitter CFT 10 is interchangeable with IFDC Windows version only Any Mass Flow Transmitter CFT10 and CFT 15 database cre
274. on file named IFDC_Security the system engineer should define a mapping between the FoxView access lock information and the IFDC access levels For each IFDC access level Configuration Calibration Test the engineer can define a mapping The Workshop access level is not applicable as an IFDC startup option Configuration is the highest access level to enter IFDC on an I A Series station The file is located under opt fox ciocfg ifdenv If this file does not exit IFDC always starts with the access level Configuration An example of the contents of the IFDC_Security file follows HHHHHHHARRARRAR Configuration 4 Calibration 5 Test 6 HH Starting with the highest access level Configuration IFDC checks if this level is enabled If this level is enabled IFDC comes up with the enabled access level If the access level is not enabled IFDC checks the next access level mapping If none of the access levels are enabled IFDC starts with access level None The access lock mapping for the different IFDC access levels can be set to a value in the range of 0 to 255 If the access level gets the lock information 0 it is unprotected enabled Example If Configuration has the value 0 IFDC always starts with the Configuration access level If Calibration has the value 0 IFDC always starts with the Calibration access level if Configuration is not enabled 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 Mapping between the FoxView access
275. oocnccncnocononononcnnnrnnnnnnnnnonnnon 183 Sample Vortex Low Flow Cut In Screen HART Device ccccoonococnconcononnnnnoncnnnanancnnnnnnnos 184 Sample Vortex mA Calibration Screen FoxCom Device coooconccociconononnnnoncnnnonancnncnnnncnnos 185 Sample mA Calibration Screen HART Device viii radica 186 Sample Vortex Flowmeter Identifier Tab Screen FoxCom Device 186 Sample Vortex Flowmeter Identifier Tab Screen HART Device o cocnccconocncnnononnnnnannnnnon 187 Sample Vortex Flow Parameters Tab Screens a lose 188 Sample Vortex Options and Piping Tab Screen FoxCom Device ocnccocccnnninccnnicnnaninonono 189 Sample Vortex Options and Piping Tab Screen HART Device cece 190 sample 870ITEC Device Data Srta 193 Sample 870ITEC Bench Cabranes 196 Sample 870ITEC Solution 1 Point Offset Creen ia dt 197 Sample 870ITEC Solution 1 Point Span Serena dali 198 Sample 870ITEC Solution 2 Point Calibration ScreCN ooncnconnnonnnnannnnonnancncannrnnnnrnnncnnos 199 Sample S701T EC Temperature Calibrador 200 Sample 870ITEC mA Calibration Serenidad 201 Sample 870ITEC Identifier Tab Serenata od et dao 202 Sample S70LTEC Sensor Tab Sort died dida 203 Samples 70 LEC Measurement Tab Serena dao a dos eed 204 sample 011 EC Misc Tab Seree nina e cet cals 205 Sample 8701TEC Appl Tab Sere rita 206 Sample 87011 PH Device Data Sri dls 213 Sample 870ITPH 1 Point Manual Calibration resina 216 Sample 870ITPH 2 Point Manual Calibration Screen lis 217 Sample 870ITPH Te
276. oolbar is given in Table 5 24 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 1 2 3 sD 4 LS Figure 9 Communications Toolbar Icons Table 5 Communications Toolbar Features and Descriptions Item Feature Description 1 Connect to Device Establishes communication to the device connected to the modem for PC20 or brings up the Device Select dialog box Then connects to the selected device 2 Save to Device If connected to a device saves the configuration information to the connected device Otherwise not available 3 Upload Database from Device If connected to a device restarts uploading the configuration database from the device again Status Bar The program is equipped with a status bar at the bottom of the screen It can be shown or hidden at any time by using the View menu The status bar displays four items of information On the left it displays a brief description of the action of menu items as you navigate through a menu with arrow keys It also displays a brief description of the action of items in the toolbar On station with Solaris operating system it displays the text An open dialog locks the main window when a dialog box is open This should help you avoid a locking situation where a dialog is open and was pushed behind the IFDC main window The main window is locked until the open dialog box is closed Resize the mainframe make it smaller so that the dialog box is accessible agai
277. or IMTW are used in the operator s 261 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters environment it is possible to change the transmitter type back to the IDP10 B mode with the same procedure as described above Any calibration and configuration done by the PC20 is not changed 140 Series with FoxCom or HART Protocol There is very little difference between these two transmitters except for the protocol itself and some protocol specific functions The user interface for the configuration calibration and so forth are the same and therefore described together in this section The FoxCom device has the same functionality as the HART device However the 140 Series FoxCom transmitter with I A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitters compatibility described in the previous section has the functionality compatible to the I A Series Pressure Transmitters Device Data Screen The Device Data display shows the static information Tag Number Tag Name and Device Type and data which is updated continuously such as Measurement 1 Primary Variable PV Electronic and Sensor Temperature and the mA Output if in analog mode as shown in Figure L 7 Intelligent Field Device Configurator Device Data OF x File Edit View Calibrate Test Utilities User Options Window Help ll Device Data Tag Number TAGNUM Device Type 143DP Tag Name TAGNAME Measurement 1 Electronic Temperature Sen
278. or writing Replace failed item or positioner positioner ROM AD Converter Converter function not Replace failed item or positioner controllable Actuator OOR Position is not within Check mechanics of actuator and valve Perform permissible range 5 105 Endpoints calibration Current Loop I P Motor Connection of I P converter to electronic board failed Replace failed item or positioner 234 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 39 Field Device Status Error Messages Continued Message Explanation Recommended Action Potentiometer Connection of Replace failed item or positioner potentiometer to electronic board failed Option Board Option board was not Check configuration or replace failed option board configured or failed Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an SRD991 Intelligent Positioner using IFDC PC20 software Autostart Endpoints Analog Setpoint only allowed at workshop security level Angle only allowed at workshop security level Temperature only allowed at workshop security level Position Feedback only allowed at workshop security level Air Supply Pressure only allowed at workshop security level Output Pressure only allowed at workshop security level Restore Valve Specific Parameter only allowed at workshop
279. own and accepted throughout the process control industries But the advantages also require the proper management of the database files The field device contains the Master database It is suggested that you also save a computer based database file of each device to help facilitate a quick and easy repair if needed If an amplifier were to fail and the database were stored in the computer the repair would be fast and easy Just replace the amplifier call up the stored database file from the computer and download it to the repaired device For most devices the repair is completed without even recalibrating the device see the device specific instruction for the detailed replacement procedure When dealing with any Intelligent Device you must remember that there are multiple database files accessed while using the IFD Configurator software The master database file stored in the EEPROM of the device A stored database in the computer which should always be updated when the device parameters are changed A temporary database file that is active in the software program while you are making parameter changes This temporary file normally would be downloaded to the connected device or stored as a database file in the computer When digitally connected to an I A Series system the system contains the complete database file in the active control software based upon the last time the database was uploaded from the device 3 Operation MI
280. ows these 12 data points NOTE After performing the Custom Input Curve procedure the custom curve must be enabled before it takes effect See Enable Custom Curve on page 94 The procedure to input a custom curve follows Select Custom Input Curve from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select the number of points you want in your custom curve 1 12 The remaining points are set to an overrange value for example 10000 93 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters Custom Curve Figure B 4 Sample RTT10 Custom Input Curve Screen 4 In the Measured column enter the values the RIT 10 now displays in the Offset column enter the offset you want For example if a Measured value was 100 00 but you wanted 100 25 enter 100 00 as the Measured number and 0 25 as the Offset number Select Continue 5 At the prompt select Continue to save the custom curve to the transmitter 6 Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Enable Custom Curve This function enables a custom input curve that you previously entered The procedure follows 1 Select Enable Custom from the Calibration menu 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 To reconfirm that you want to enable the Custom Curve select Continue The Custom Curve i
281. p Temp 12 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 15 3 0 Chem Comp Val 12 1 0 Temp Comp Val 15 3 0 22 Chem Comp Temp 13 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 16 3 0 Chem Comp Val 13 1 0 Temp Comp Val 16 3 0 22 Chem Comp Temp 14 1 0 Temp Comp Temp 17 3 0 Chem Comp Val 14 1 0 Temp Comp Val 17 3 0 22 Chem Comp Temp 15 1 0 Chem Comp Val 15 1 0 Chem Comp Temp 13 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 16 1 0 Chem Comp Val 13 2 0 Chem Comp Val 16 1 0 Chem Comp Temp 14 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 17 1 0 Chem Comp Val 14 2 0 Chem Comp Val 17 1 0 Chem Comp Temp 15 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 18 1 0 Chem Comp Val 15 2 0 Chem Comp Val 18 1 0 Chem Comp Temp 16 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 19 1 0 Chem Comp Val 16 2 0 Chem Comp Val 19 1 0 Chem Comp Temp 17 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 20 1 0 Chem Comp Val 17 2 0 Chem Comp Val 20 1 0 Chem Comp Temp 18 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 21 1 0 Chem Comp Val 18 2 0 Chem Comp Val 21 1 0 Chem Comp Temp 19 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 1 2 0 Chem Comp Val 19 2 0 Chem Comp Val 1 2 0 Chem Comp Temp 20 2 0 209 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix 870ITEC Transmitters Table 36 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Chem Comp Temp 2 2 Chem Comp Val 20 2 Chem Comp Val 2 2 Chem Comp Temp 21 2 Chem Comp Temp 3 2 Chem Comp Val 21 2 Chem Comp Val 3 2 Chem Comp Temp 1 3 Chem Comp Temp 4 2 Chem Comp Val 1 3 Chem Comp Val 4 2 Chem Comp Temp 2 3 Chem Comp Temp 5 2
282. perform the following calibration procedures on an IMT25 transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurator mA Output Reset Totals Empty Pipe Empty Pipe The empty pipe detector can be used to force the transmitter outputs to stay at zero when the flowtube is empty The empty pipe circuit must be calibrated to the fluid in the flowtube The flowtube must be full of process fluid flowing or still to use this calibration procedure The calibration procedure leaves the empty pipe detector in the ON condition The detector can be turned off in the Configuration menu 1 Select Empty Pipe from the Calibration menu or the Empty Pipe icon from the device toolbar 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Fill the flowtube and then select Continue to start the Empty Pipe Calibration process 4 Wait while the device is calibrating 5 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements mA Output As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required However the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the output to the output of a specific receiving device 134 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 FoxCom Device The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration on a FoxCom device is 1 ON 5 e Oe
283. ple Startup Options Screen Initial Settings using the INI File Many Microsoft Windows based programs use an INI file to store initial settings of the program IFDC PC20 also uses the INI file to store some initial settings This file is also used to store user and or PC specific settings 33 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 34 The name of the file is foxifdc INI It is located in the system directory C WINNT for a station with the Windows NT or Window 2000 operating system or C Windows on a station with Windows 95 or Windows XP On a Solaris station the initialization file has the path and filename foxifdc ini It may be edited with a normal text editor for example Notepad on PC or vi on Solaris The foxifde INI file may have three different sections Settings Directories and Recent File List In the Directories section after the keyword ADT Path specify the pathname where IFDC PC20 should store the audit trail files If this entry is in the foxifde ini file IFDC PC20 generates an audit trail file in the specified path when parameters are written to the device See Audit Trail Tab on page 26 for more details Example for Windows Directories ADT Path C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC data Example for Solaris Directories ADT Path temp The following entries influence the behavior of the communications via FoxCom modem for PC20 only In the Settings section the following e
284. programs See page 48 Connect to Device Save To Device Connects to a device directly or using I A Series Pass Through See page 41 Transfers configuration database to a device Workshop Environment Ctrl P Print Enables faster communication with optimized timing Prints the active document Print Preview Displays full pages Print Setup Changes the printer and printing options Print Font Changes the print font Print Full Database Specifies printing the full database File Names Shows most recently accessed files for quick access Exit Quits the application prompts to save documents Edit Configure Edits the configuration database Compare Against Database Compares the current configuration against a stored database See page 50 Against Device Compares the current configuration against the values in the device See page 50 Comments Allows you to view edit comments regarding your device configuration The comments are stored in the database file only They are not stored in the device See page 50 43 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Table 7 Device Top Level Menu Description of Functions Continued Top Level Menu Pick Submenu Pick Description View Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar See page 24 Device Toolbar Enables you to go to the configuration various calibration or status
285. pulse Total Test pulses at the maximum represents a larger volume rate but falling behind the actual total Total Rollover Total exceeds limit of Reconfigure total format if necessary and reset totals Test configured format AtoD Electronics problem Service is required Calibration Test Alarms High Flow Flow above configured Make process change or reconfigure alarm setpoint high flow rate Low Flow Flow below configured low flow rate High Forward Total above configured Make process change or reconfigure Tot Alm Setpt and Total 1 High Fwd Tot 1 reset totals High Forward Total above configured Total 2 High Fwd Tot 2 Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an IMT96 transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurator mA Output Reset Totals Zero Flow Restore Zero Flow Default mA Output As your device was accurately calibrated at the factory this function is not normally required However the mA output can be trimmed with this procedure if it is necessary to match the output to the output of a specific receiving device The procedure to perform a mA Output Calibration is 1 Insert an accurate mA meter or digital voltmeter and precision resistor in the loop wiring 2 Select mA Output from the Calibration menu 3 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 4 Select 4 mA Output MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix O IM
286. put Step Size 0 5 H m C 20m4 Output Cumulative Change 0 m Apply Help Cancel Figure J 5 Sample 870ITPH mA Calibration Screen 5 Set the Step Size from the menu 0 5 0 05 0 005 0 005 0 05 0 5 and select Apply 6 Repeat Step 4 until you are satisfied with the output The cumulative change is shown in the screen Select 20 mA Output Repeat Steps 4 and 5 9 The screen then displays the adjustments To accept this change select Continue 10 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements 219 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORPASE Transmitters Configuration Identifier Tab Screen 870PH Transmitter Configuration Sensor Output Measurement Diagnose Penan 870PH Figure J 6 Sample 870ITPH Identifier Tab Screen Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 12 characters The first 8 characters become the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only Device Name Enter maximum of 6 characters NOTE To disable enhanced protocol name checking with T A Series Versions 3 0 or later enter DevNam Location Enter maximum of 14 characters Optional used for reference only 220 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORPASE Transmitters Sensor Tab Screen 870PH Transmitter Configuration Fi
287. put Tab Screen Field Entry Lower Range Limit Shows value of Lower Range Limit of device Upper Range Limit Shows value of Upper Range Limit of device Lower Range Value LRV Enter value at which device outputs 4 mA Upper Range Value URV Enter value at which device outputs 20 mA Output Damping Enter damping value from 0 to 32 seconds Transfer Function Select from menu of selections Most often Linear or Square Root 308 Appendix N Non Foxboro Devices Using HART Communication Protocol MI 024 495 October 2010 HART Tab Screen Generic HART Device Figure N 5 Generic HART Screen Field Entry Polling Address Enter the polling address for the HART device Number of Preambles Enter the number of preambles Universal Command Revision Shows the revision of the universal commands Device Command Revision Shows the revision of the device commands 309 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix N Non Foxboro Devices Using HART Commands Dialog Box Tag Number TAG Tag Name PE PPERL FUCHS Tag Date 11 06 01 Universal Identifier Primary Variable Current ZRange Dynamic Variables Poll Address Message Tag PY Sensor Output Final Assembly El Common Usage Tamia St msm Bens mid Figure N 6 Generic HART Commands Dialog Box to Execute Universal and Common Practice Commands Only the Universal and Common Usage
288. q upper range value in flow units A CAUTION Always check the calculation of your conversion The PV Unit is centrally assigned for the complete device and is automatically displayed in the Output screen according to the defined values When a different pressure unit is selected a recalculation of the corresponding values in the Output Tab screen fields for Lower Range Value Upper Range Value and Upper Range Limit is also done For the Profibus Level device the recalculation is only done between the length or volume units The Profibus device has the following additional features For commissioning and test purposes it is possible for the Profibus device to simulate the PV value and status If simulation is enabled by checking the Enable check box the Transducer block and the Analog Input Function block AI FB will be disconnected within the device Then the input and status values from the Transducer block in the AI FB can be modified After checking the Enable box enter the PV Value and Status for simulation Characterization Tab Screen This screen enables a selection of a transformation function of the input signal The choices are Linear Range 110 Square Root and Custom Curve Square Root is intended for flow measurements It includes a suppressed zero range of 7 of the output range Flow can be represented in flow units Custom Curve allows a specified characteristic consisting of up to 32 points X Y pairs
289. r LPT2 or a network accessible printer must be provided Reports can also be saved to text files and printed later Hardware Installation for Profibus Device To connect your PC to a Profibus PA device for example SRD991 140 Series the following components are needed 1 A Profibus interface card from Softing AG with the PAPI software interface For a desktop PC the following interface cards could be used PROFIboard ISA Master Slave PB IF 03 PROFIboard PCI Master Slave PB IF 1MS PROFIboard PCI with 1xMaster and 1xMaster Slave PB IF 2MS 2 Installation MI 024 495 October 2010 For a laptop it could be a PC card PCMCIA for Type II slots PROFIcard Master PB PCcard 2 A segment coupler for Profibus PA for example from Pepperl Fuchs KFD2 BR Ex1 2PA 93 This coupler is needed to couple the Profibus DP side supported by the Softing interface cards with the Profibus PA devices in the Profibus PA segment PC20 Software Installation Perform installation while running the standard Windows based installation program Close all other running programs before starting your installation Install the CD ROM in your computer and select Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs Then follow instructions to install the PC20 program using A Setup as the command The installation procedure is automatic and prompts you for necessary information The installation program verifies that the PC has the hard
290. r Range Value 2 50 00000 GPM UriDir gt Upper Range Value 1 20000 00000 GPM E Upper Range Value 3 15 00000 GPM Mode Pulse Output Upper Range Value bd Rate Max Frequency GPM Total Max Frequency fi 0 gt Hz Cancel EPpy Help Figure E 6 Sample IMT25 Flow Tab Screen Field Entry Flow Settings Engineering Units Flow Direction Select from menu of choices or Custom Select Positive Reverse BiDir Positive or BiDir Reverse Analog and Pulse Rate Output Damp Enter damping response time from 0 0 to 99 9 seconds Flow Rate Format Select from menu of eight choices Meter Factor Enter IMT25 Cal Fact or Cal Fact factor See IMT25 VA Series Magflow Transmitters MI 021 390 Output Mode Digital Select UniDirectional or BiDirectional flow not applicable to HART device Analog Select UniDirectional Unidirectional Multi Range BiDirectional Dual Range or BiDirectional Split Range Upper Range Values Enter Upper Range Values in units shown Pulse Output Mode Select Off Pulse Rate or Pulse Total 139 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Field Entry Upper Range Value If Pulse Rate mode enter Pulse Out URV between minimum and maximum URV of the flowtube not greater than 999999 Rate Max If Pulse Rate mode select Rate Max Frequency of
291. ransmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Error Error diagnostic error Messages to determine problem and corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the Status Error secondary status screen display Secondary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Bad Message Transmitter received a Select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear Received bad message problem contact the CSC Electronics Internal device tests have Replace electronics Error failed Sensor Sensor input out of Message disappears when input returns to within Out of Rng range acceptable limits Temp Senl Transmitter Transmitter can be configured to continue operating Out of Rng temperature out of and use a default temperature for measurement range compensation Message disappears when temperature returns to within acceptable limits Temp Sen2 Transmitter Transmitter can be configured to continue operating Out of Rng temperature out of and use a default temperature for measurement compensation Message disappears when temperature returns to within acceptable limits 820 and 860 Transmitters only Diagnostic Error
292. ransmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the RTT10 Temperature Transmitters in regard to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Device Error Messages Calibration Configuration Database Report Device Data Screen E Device Data Figure B 1 Sample RTT10 Device Data Screen 89 MI 024 495 October 2010 Error Messages Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters Table 15 Transmitter Status Error Messages Status Error secondary status Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required Transmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem contact the CSC Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Codes to Error diagnostic error determine problem and corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the screen display Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an RTT 10 transmitter using the Secondary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC B
293. re Temperature Sensor Select 2 wire 100 2 wire 1000 3 wire 100 o 3 wire 1000 Q or Balco 3K Stability Indicators Measurement Stability y Instrument Stability Measurement Feature On Blank Instrument Stability Measurement Feature Off Stability Time If on enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5 second increments Stability Variant If on enter variant between 1 and 9 Temperature Stability y Instrument Stability Temperature Feature On Blank Instrument Stability Temperature Feature Off Stability Time If on enter time between 5 and 60 seconds in 5 second increments Stability Variant If on enter variant between 1 and 9 Diagnostic Tab Screen 870PH Transmitter Configuration x Identifier Sensor Output Measurement Diagnostic Diagnostics TT Leakage FT Pre Amp l Glass I ATCShot M Aging MV Measurement Range FT ATCOpen JT 4 20m4 Range TP Compensation Range Glass Limit 300 kohm y Glass Cutoff 50 E Coat Limit 80kohm y Enable All Disable All Low Slope Limit eo Cancel Apply Help Figure J 13 Sample 870ITPH Diagnostic Tab Screen 225 MI 024 495 October 2010 226 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORPASE Transmitters Field Entry Diagnostics Leakage Pre Amp Glass Coat Low Slope ATC Short ATC Open Aging 4 20 mA Range Measurement Range Compen
294. re Type RTD Sensor mi Input Dna El pwe El ThermoCouple Special Input 3 Wire Dual Measurement Type Single Input Output Mode C Digital 4 20 m Noise Rejection r m Output Failsafe Damping 0 0 seconds y C Upscale Downscale Cancel Apply Help Figure B 8 Sample RTT10 Transmitter Parameters Tab Screen Field Entry Measurement Units Select from menu of units Lower Range Limit Shows value of the Lower Range Limit of transmitter Upper Range Limit Shows value of the Upper Range Limit of transmitter Lower Range Value Enter the value at which transmitter outputs 4 mA Upper Range Value Enter the value at which transmitter outputs 20 mA Input Type Select RTD Sensor ThermoCouple mV Input or Special Input Input Mode Select from menu of inputs Wire Type For RTD select 2 Wire Single 3 Wire Dual 3 Wire or 4 Wire Measurement Type Shows Dual for Dual 3 Wire Single Input for all other wire types 3 Wire Dual For Dual 3 Wire RTD select Average Redundant or Difference Output Mode Select Digital or 4 20 mA mA Output Failsafe Select Upscale or Downscale Configures output to go upscale or downscale if a transmitter failure occurs Noise Rejection Enter filter value in seconds during which noise in the transmitter output signal is rejected A low value decreases filtering
295. rement Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Calibration You can perform the following calibration procedures on an 870ITCR transmitter using the Intelligent Field Device Configurator Bench Calibration Calibration Pure H2O Solution 1 Point Offset Solution 1 Point Span Solution 2 Point 287 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters 288 Temperature Sensor mA Calibration Bench Calibration You can perform a bench calibration for either conductivity or resistivity measurements by connecting your own discrete components to the transmitter 1 Sy E DA N 10 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor screen in the Configuration function See page 295 Select Bench Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Enter the calibrator s initials and select Continue Wait while the device is reinitializing Follow the prompt to connect Resistor 1 between terminals 1B and 1E and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating Follow the prompt to connect Resistor 2 or the specified capacitor in place of Resistor 1 and select Continue Wait while the device is calibrating The current calibration date is automatically updated Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume d
296. ries Magnetic Flow IMT10 IMT20 IMT25 IMT25L and IMT96 Series Mass Flow CFT 10 and CFT15 Series Vortex 83 Series Electrochemical 870ITEC 870ITPH and 870ITCR Series Buoyancy 140 Series Intelligent Positioner SRD991 SRD960 SRD970 and NAF LinkIT Pressure 130 140 Foxboro I A Series system Pressure Invensys I A Series system Pressure and Viatran I A Series system Pressure Temperature RTT10 RTT20 and T120 Series Magnetic Flow IMT25 and IMT25L Series Vortex 83 Series Buoyancy 130 and 140 Series Intelligent Positioner SRD991 SRD960 SRD970 and NAF LinkIT Non Foxboro Devices Universal and Common Practice commands only Profibus Buoyancy 140 Series Profibus PA Intelligent Positioner SRD991 SRD960 SRD970 an NAF LinkIT all Profibus PA 1 Introduction MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 2 Devices Supported Continued Version Protocol Devices Supported IFDC FoxCom Pressure 140 820 860 and I A Series system Pressure Temperature RTT10 RTT20 and T120 Series Magnetic Flow IMT10 IMT20 IMT25 IMT25L and IMT96 Series Mass Flow CFT 10 Series Vortex 83 Series Electrochemical 870ITEC 870ITPH and 870ITCR Series Buoyancy 140 Series Intelligent Positioner SRD991 SRD960 SRD970 and NAF LinkIT Hydrostatic Tank Gauging HTG Solaris only using ITMW Intelligent Transmitter Maintenance Workbench HART Pressure 130 140 Foxbor
297. rization Travel Alarms Turina Options Position Temperature Units High High Alarm fg A Celsius Fahrenheit High Alarm 110 Temperature Low lam f1 Low Low Alarm 10 ic Lowertina 20 Upper Limit feo gt e Alarm Deadband il se m Travel Sum 3 1 2 Control Difference Deadband Limit 15 Time t Full Strokes Limit soooo000 Full Strokes ean Cycle Count Limit soooo000 Cycles Cancel Apply Help Figure K 8 Sample SRD991 Alarms Tab Screen Field Entry Position Allows setting position limits at which alarms are triggered High High Alarm Enter high high full alarm position in percent of stroke High Alarm Enter high warning alarm position in percent of stroke Low Alarm Enter low warning alarm position in percent of stroke Low Low Alarm Alarm Deadband Enter low low full alarm position in percent of stroke Enter alarm deadband in percent of travel Control Difference Limit Allows setting an alarm when the actual position varies from the setpoint by a specified amount for a specified time Enter the amount in percent of travel Time Enter the time in seconds Temperature Units Select Celsius or Fahrenheit Temperature Lower Limit Upper Limit Displays temperature limits of the positioner in units specified on the Units T
298. rom the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Set the transmitter flow to zero and select Continue The Startup Zero screen is similar to the ReZero Calibration screen shown in Figure G 2 4 Wait for the first phase of three of the Startup Zero calibration to occur When phase 1 has been completed select Continue to resume the procedure 5 Wait for the second phase of the Startup Zero calibration to occur When phase 2 has been completed select Continue to resume the procedure 6 Wait for the third phase of the Startup Zero calibration to occur When phase 3 has been completed the zero flow offset value is shown Save this calibration to the transmitter by selecting Continue 7 Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Zero Total This function sets the transmitter total measurement to zero The procedure follows 1 Select Zero Total from the Calibration menu or the Zero Total icon from the device toolbar Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select Continue again to reset the transmitter total measurement to zero Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Configuration Identifier Tab Screen CFT15 Transmitter Configuration TEST TAG NU
299. rrors when attached to a device digitally integrated to an I A Series system Beginning a New Configuration Database 36 To begin a new configuration database without a connection to a device select New from the File menu The IFDC PC20 presents the New dialog box This selection dialog box shows in a tree view all the supported protocols and devices see Figure 14 Select the device with which you wish to work If a device supports multiple model codes a secondary model selection screen see Figure 15 is displayed Select the model with which you wish to work The IFDC PC20 then presents the device top level menu screen for the device and the configuration pages for the model you selected The displayed default values in the Configuration pages are stored in the Default database files The default database files are stored in the subdirectory tables under the installation path for example C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC Tables It is possible to change these default values for the preconfiguration of a device To get new default values do a preconfiguration of a device or connect to a device with the desired parameter settings and select Options gt Save as Default This function stores the selected device database as the default database 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 140 Series 820 860 870CR 870EC 870PH CFT10 CFT15 1 4 Series Pressure IMT20 IMT25 IMT96 MYP Series RTT10 RTT20 SAD960 SAD991
300. rsion factor from USGPM to the Custom unit Lining Material Select Ceramic or ptfe Teflon Meter Factor Enter Cal Factor from flowtube data plate Display Meas Config Select from menu of choices Display Upper Range Enter Upper Range Value of display Flow Upper Range Enter Upper Range Value in units shown Upper Range Limit Shows Upper Range Limit of device Damping Select Auto or any one of eight specific values from 0 20 to 32 seconds Damping on Power Up Enabled Blank Disabled Comm Baud Rate Select from menu of choices Signal Lock Alarm Shows Enabled or Disabled Pulse Output Select High 2000 Hz or Low Variable 125 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Field Entry Pulse Scale Enter value between 0 1 and 9 999 Hz if Pulse Output is Low Variable This is the output in pps when the flow rate through the tube is equal to the Flow Upper Range value Database Report NOTE If a parameter in the report is UNUSED the corresponding value shown has no meaning for that device Table 22 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 2a UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tag Number FT102A UNUSED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tag Name B
301. rt Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Raw Rate Format 06 Contact In 1 Operati 01 Rate Damping 3 Contact In 2 Functio 00 Totalizer On Off 00 Contact In 2 Operati 00 Rate EGU M2 00 Noise Reduction On 01 Total Rate Units M2 Gal TON Count 20 mA 26102 EGU Totals Slope 1 TON Count 4 mA 5113 Tot Net Format 04 Meter Factor Use 12 19999 Grand Total Format 04 Cal Date 01 25 00 Output Mode 01 Cal Name JB Digital Mode 01 mA Hold Value 0 Analog Mode 00 Pulse Hold 0 Upper Range Limit 1 200 Kernal Major Revisio 00 Upper Range Limit 2 25 Kernal Minor Revisio 00 Upper Range Limit 3 5 SREVMAJ 00 Pulse Output Mode 00 SREVMIN 00 Pulse Out URV 100 Display Major Revisi 00 Rate Max Freq 02 Display Minor Revisi 00 Tot Max Freq 00 Parameter Table Offs 00 00 Rate Out Damp 1 1 Parameter Table CRC 3e 5a Relay 1 Function 00 Parameter Table Type 49 Relay 1 Alarm 01 Parameter Table Size 45 56 Relay 1 Operation 01 Reserved 49 4e 47 Relay 1 Suppression 00 REV_INFO c0 Relay 2 Function 00 UNUSED 1 25 00 Relay 2 Alarm 01 Sensor Minor Revisio 03 Relay 2 Operation 01 Sensor Major Revisio 01 Relay 2 Suppression 00 UNUSED 49649 Alarms On 00 UNUSED 49649 High Alarm On 00 UNUSED 11 High Alarm Set Point 200 M1 Offset 0 High Alarm Deadband 10 Subtype 01 Low Alarm On 00 Database Change Count ce Low Alarm Set Point 0 Low Alarm Deadband O 0 Tot 1 Alarm On 00
302. s FOX_XMTR Application Help Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for AAA K 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display 860 870EC 870PH Application Calibrate Calibration CFT CFT10 CFT15 Codes Communication Configuration Configure Custom Cut ln Diagnostic ha Eint Cancel Figure 24 Help Topics Index Screen Index Tab Previewing or Printing a Device Database Report This function permits you to preview a device database report or output it to a printer To perform this function first access the data by connecting to the device or accessing the database via Open in the File menu Then use the Print Preview or Print option in the File menu To preview or print the full database rather than just the configuration parameters specify Print Full Database in the File menu prior to specifying Print Preview or Print IFDC Printing on Station with Solaris Operating System Print Setup The I A Series system is shipped with a default WIND U file which is read by WIND U applications This file is used to store printer settings as well as other user preferences The default print settings must be supplied to the WIND U XPrinter application before any WIND U 56 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 application can use Print Preview or perform any printing Therefore you must invoke the application s Print Setup to provide the default printer
303. s triggered Options Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration x Identifier Parameters Configuration Characterization Travel Alarms Tuning Options Option Board No External Option Extemal Position Transmission External Binary Input C External Binary Output Extemal Analog Sensor Cancel Apply Help Figure K 11 Sample SRD991 Options Tab Screen Field Entry Option Board Select from the following No External Option External Position Transmission External Binary Input External Binary Output External Analog Sensor Internal Pressure Sensors Select or deselect internal pressure sensors 249 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and 250 Bin In Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration Figure K 12 Sample SRD991 Bin In Tab Screen The Binary Input option features two independent binary inputs with internal supply for connection of sensors A connected switch is loaded with 3 5 V and 0 15 mA Using the Bin In Tab screen you can configure an active signal to activate an alarm or force the actuator to go to 0 or 100 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Bin Out Tab Screen SRD991 Valve Configuration nm M mi m Ej m M E Figure K 13 Sample SRD991 Bin Out Tab Screen The Binary Output option enables you to define whi
304. s 116 Dat base Report carinii re itot t dice teeta att ale ate teat tee ck he oes ce ee E EE 117 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters oooooononcnnrnnrnninnononnanicnnnnn ns 119 Device Data SGreen E ey Sebald A A a ida 119 Err r Messages tddi diia 120 St t s Error Messages dada 120 Diagnostic Error Messages a A A seat A AR 120 Calibration sees o a O O cas 121 AAA A O A A pases 122 mA Calibration teenie eee GE o o tutos espe teo poa he NENTS I Se Ae 122 Configuration A ETSALAR ESATEA E 124 Identifier Tab Screen eeeeeeecscccccececesssssnsccccecececsesssencceccescsesssenaceecsescecsssentaceeeeeecnensneaaees 124 Transmitter Parameters IMT Tab Screen eeeeccccccccececesssneccccecececsessssnccccecccecssssntnaceeeeeeens 125 Dita O E 126 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters omoooococcocnnnnnnninnannnnonncnnaninnncnnnnanonccnncnos 129 Device Data ren ai o a Leen den 129 Error A O Nr O A e a a e aa aeaa pasty cates 130 FoxCom DEVICE vita E EE E E 130 HARD Vit ts 132 Cal iban E A eck A A e ed et Pe A 134 Empty Pipe a A Gaede eer adal N 134 MA Duplicadda ads 134 FoxCom D LENA Te E iaa 135 HARI D Vte isis 135 A TN 136 Pulsar lados ce Ad eo 137 Resta AA A 137 Mistress A de Eo DIE A NO A 137 Acknowledge Alarms a tia 137 Acknowledge Prior Diagnostic sr a ta ds LL 138 CONSTIPATION st tas 138 Identifier Tab Screen eceeeescssccccccecesssssscccccecececsessssnccecececesseseaceecseceseessentcaceeceeces
305. s all alarms off Contacts Tab Screen IMT Device Configuration Ea Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer Contacts Contact 1 Function Jack Alarm Contact 1 Operation Normally Open y Contact 2 Function off y Contact 2 Operation Normally Close y Relay 1 Relay Function Off z Relay Operation Normally Open y Relay Alarm Low Rate y Suppress Relay O Yes No r Relay 2 Relay Function v Relay Operation Normally Open y Relay Alarm Low Rate y Suppress Relay C Yes No Cancel Apply Help Figure O 7 Sample IMT96 Contacts Tab Screen Field Entry Contacts Contact 1 Function Select Off Ack Alarm Reset Net Total Reset Gr Total Reset All Total Multi range or Signal Lock Contact 1 Operation If Contact 1 Function is not off select Normally Open or Normally Closed Contact 2 Function Similar to Contact 1 Function Contact 2 Operation Similar to Contact 1 Operation Relay 1 321 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Field Entry Relay Function Select Off Alarm Alarm amp Diag Diagnostics Flow Direction or Test Mode Relay Alarm If Relay Function is not off select High Rate Low Rate High Forward Total 1 High Forward Total 2 Empty Pipe or Any Alarm Relay Operation If Relay Function is not off select
306. s enabled 94 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 4 Enable Custorm Curve x This will enable the custom calibration curve Continue if this is desired Calibrated 7 15 98 Cancel Help Figure B 5 RTT10 Enable Custom Curve Screen Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Restore Factory Calibration This function overwrites any existing 1 Point 2 Point or Custom Curve calibration and restores the Factory Calibration curve to the transmitter The procedure follows 1 2 3 Select Restore Factory Cal from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue To reconfirm that you want to overwrite your present N Point or Custom Calibration and restore the Factory Calibration select Continue The factory calibration is restored Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Restore Factory mA This function restores the mA calibration factory settings The procedure to do this is as follows l 2 3 Select Restore Factory mA from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue To reconfirm that you want to restore the mA calibration factory settings select Continue The factory calibration is restored and calibration date
307. s x Comment comments are not saved to a device Comments are saved to a file Cancel Help Figure 20 Comments Screen Calibration Function The Calibration function is accessed via the Calibrate menu from the device top level menu The Calibrate menu contains those calibration operations applicable to the specific device you are calibrating Therefore it differs from product to product Information on each calibration operation and how to accomplish it is given in the appropriate product appendix Field Device Status Function The Field Device Status function interrogates the connected device and displays Pass Fail status messages on the Primary and Secondary Status Fields and an alphanumeric indication of any diagnostic errors The function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu A sample Field Device Status screen is shown in Figure 21 51 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Field Device Status Figure 21 Sample Field Device Status Screen The Field Device Status screen is only applicable to the specific product to which you are connected Therefore it differs from product to product The list of device status messages their explanations and recommended actions are given in the appropriate product appendix Selecting Codes at the bottom of the display causes the various diagnostic codes to be displayed in decimal and hex form with no text translation A sample Diagnostic Codes
308. safe Value 0 0125 Meas 1 Units pH Electrode 00 Meas 2 Units F Temp Compensation 02 User In 0 Temp Decimal Point 00 Number Temp Points 02 Reference Temp 25 Temp Compens Temp 1 0 Temperature Units 01 Temp Compens Val 1 226 92 Temperature Mode 01 Temp Compens Temp 2 0 Temp Failure Value 77 Temp Compens Val 2 226 92 Manual Temperature 86 Temp Compens Temp 3 0 Temp Sensor Type 03 Temp Compens Val 3 226 92 Damping 02 Temp Compens Temp 4 0 Chemical Compens 01 Temp Compens Val 4 25 5 Chem Decimal Point 00 Temp Compens Temp 5 0 Meas Stability 00 Temp Compens Val 5 227 Meas Stable Time Oa Temp Compens Temp 6 0 Meas Stable Var 09 Temp Compens Val 6 227 Temp Stability 00 Temp Compens Temp 7 0 Temp Stable Time 0a Temp Compens Val 7 227 Temp Stable Var 09 Temp Compens Temp 8 0 ISO Value 7 Temp Compens Val 8 227 Display Time Out 600 Temp Compens Temp 9 0 Buffers 00 Temp Compens Val 9 226 92 Major Passcode 0 Temp Compens Temp 10 0 Minor Passcode 0 Temp Compens Val 10 226 92 AC Frequency 32 Temp Compens Temp 11 0 Coat Limit 08 Temp Compens Val 11 226 92 227 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORP SE Transmitters Table 38 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Glass Limit 09 Temp Compens Temp 12 0 Glass CutOff Temp 50 Temp Compens Val 12 226 92
309. sation Range y Enable error messages Blank Disable error messages Enable All Enables all messages listed above Disable All Disables all messages listed above Glass Limit Select from menu of values between 0 and 1100 kQ Glass Cutoff Enter value between 0 and 100 degrees Coat Limit Select from menu of values between 0 and 100 kQ Low Slope Limit Enter value between 0 and 100 Appendix J 870ITPH pH ORPASE Transmitters Database Report Table 38 Sample Database Report MI 024 495 October 2010 Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 2b pH Cal Point ASYMM 0 1040039 Tag Number FT106 History Slope 1 0 Tag Name 870ITPH History Slope 2 0 Device Name DevNam History Slope 3 0 Geo Location myloc History Slope 4 0 Model Code 870ITPH History Slope 5 0 Sales Order Number 95f0000000010001 Temperature Offset 234 3723 Software Version VVV YY YY Y Low mV Cal Point 421724 Calibrator s Initial GTF High mV Cal Point 0 004747301 Calibration Date 4 16 98 Temp 100 Ohm Cal 138 6425 Sensor Type 00 Temp not 100 Ohm Cal 1959 046 Resolution Scale 00 Glass Low Calib Pt 0 Meas 2 Display 02 Glass High Calib Pt 0 mA Output 01 Ref Low Calib Pt 2 657 Output Range Max 14 Ref High Calib Pt 25 Output Range Min 0 TON Count 20 mA 26526 Failsafe Mode 00 TON Count 4 mA 5310 Fail
310. security level Restore Factory Settings only allowed at workshop security level Autostart Calibration This function determines valve travel limits zero span and tuning parameters It does this in four stages Determining the limits of actuator travel A series of ramps to determine the control system parameters A series of steps to determine the control parameters Determining the positioning speeds A CAUTION In performing this function the valve is stroked several times and ramps are applied to the input signal If the process cannot be disturbed then Autostart should not be executed The procedure to perform an Autostart calibration is 1 Select Autostart from the Calibration menu 2 Acknowledge the warning 235 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and 3 Enter the calibration data or suitable message upon successful completion If Autostart is not successful it may terminate before reaching the last step This means that the positioner is not properly calibrated To check whether Autostart has been successfully completed or not select Valve Status from Test in the device top level menu Potential reasons for Autostart not completing include Positioner mounting problem Feedback lever or coupling is in the wrong orientation Refer to Section 1 of SRD991 Intelligent Positioner MI EVE 0105 A on getting started Inadequate suppl
311. sensccecececesssenaececececsssssenaceccececssnssenanaceseceecnsseaecs 10 22 ristallatio miss rior 13 PC20 Hardware Installation eeecesccccccecseseseneccececececessesecccecececsesenenacescceecssssseacceceeecnessnenaces 13 Attaching the Modem to the Serial Port ci si cara eta 13 Connecting the Modem to a Field Device sas ias 14 Co nne ting a Printeren aid aid a a Ra aa iia aa a RENAE 16 Hardware Installation for Profibus Device eeecesssssccccecececesecsccececececsessseaceeceescessssenaee 16 PC20 Software Installaties a a a a A h 17 Software Installation for Profibus Cards ooooococcconococononocnnoncnnnnonanncnnnnccnononnnnononnnncnnnnnanno nenas 17 IFDC Software Installation eeeeeescscccecececeesssecccecececseseccccecececsesssenaccecececessessneneceseseeenesaees 17 PC20 Instruction Book CD ROM Installation ccocococononoconnncnnnonnonnonononcnnnonannononnnncncnnnanno conos 18 Bs OPE rn AAA A Aia 19 R nning the PC 20 Prom dll dae 19 Runningsthe LEDC Program sunset atiendan 19 General Information ccccccccceesssesensccececececssssseccececececssssnecaccecececessesenaccecececesssencceceescnenensnaes 20 Database Files crenata het e etre ce ante te ae cee Area et 20 File Management sere aaa na ra de ah ine i cea deed oe coeds Can suger 21 MI 024 495 October 2010 Contents Pile Location tor POL pr sina de caren tact alesis eds adn lack ee edo 21 Darabase Bile Compatibility atado der desd 21 PC20 to POZO ad
312. sessesseseeeeseeeceeseeeeeeeseeeeeees Analog FoxCom or HART Device with Remote Power oooooncnocnnnncnonocnnnnnnconcanannnnanonoons FoxCom Device with Optional Power Supply viii id dla HART Device with Optional Power Supply aii acct eens Analog FoxCom or HART Device Connected to I A Series System FBM01 or FBM04 Digital FoxCom Device Connected to I A Series System EBM 8 395 495 44 4G 243 OF 246 antonia nidad Analog or Digital FoxCom Device Connected to I A Series System FBM43 44 or 243 with Remote Power ccccccccscscscececececececececececscececececececcescncneccnence Toolbar CONS rin riada Communications Toolbar Icons dedo danita Info Window adi ai A A aa aa Top Level Ment A O e aE E Es Sample Password Security Options Screen tdci Sample Startup Options Screen viii a Device Type Selection Dialog Box nds ir taa Model Selection Dialog Box iii ta IEDC Device Selection Screen la os ala TUD s simple Device Toolbars dt tas escort ee ae tetera hese Sample Device Top Level Menu and Data Screens dd Sample Compare del e COMMERCE A AA Sample Field Device Status Screen td li sample Diagnostic Codes arenisca fieras Sample sermal Pulse Screen uo dad ao eds Help Topics Index Screen Index Tab a ce cieldes tas Sasc sacs Sass ina dards tec eee eaa tae Sample Profibus Master Configuration Screen sesecesesseesesecreeseeecseeseeecseeseeeeseeeeeeeeees sample Profibus Slave Configuration Screen ii lene Ge cede ites PC20 Fault Analysis Repeated Co
313. sor Temperature 3 Mode EM Y For Help press F1 Sensor Temperature HART MODEM RETRIEVII ya Figure L 7 Sample Device Data Screen 262 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Device Status Screen The Device Status screen shows the actual and historical status of the transmitter It is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu or the Status icon on the device toolbar The Historical status is a list of status information which was set at least once in the past The Historical status information can be acknowledged reset by selecting the menu item Reset Changed Flag MI 024 495 October 2010 Figure L 8 shows a sample status screen for a HART device The layout of the status screen for a FoxCom device is different Field Device Status x HART Status Device Busy Device Malfunction Configuration Changed Cold Start Dutput Current Fixed Analog Output Saturated Primary Yariable out of Limits Y Oe Y Internal Calibration failed wf Y Y Sensor signal exceeded e Write EEPROM impossible Y P out of sensor limits Y Y vd Sensor temperature out of limits Y Y Y Electronic temperature out of limits e Y Variable not Primary out of Limits e Measuring range configuration invalid Y Y Device Specific Status Current Historical Codes Figure L 8 Sample Device Status Screen Table 41 HART Transmitter Status Mess
314. st workshop 1 1 communication x 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 Meaning PC20 will always start with fast communication switched on Do not include this entry on PCs that are used to configure devices that are digitally connected to I A Series FBMs This will cause communication errors B Communication problems in Workshop Environment using FoxCom protocol Entries to be typed in the Settings x for x for section Windows 95 Windows NT gap Time FoxCom WS x 14 14 receive Time FoxCom WS x 20 20 delay Time FoxCom WS x 2 2 wait Time FoxCom WS x 20 20 Meaning These are the default values depending upon the computer used with PC20 Changing the x values per the instruction below can greatly reduce communication failures when PC20 is configured for the Workshop Environment and communicates with FoxCom devices If you receive a lot of communication errors with the workshop environment turned on increase the gapTime by one or two digits and check for communication errors If you still have communication problems increase the waitTime by one or two digits and check for communication errors The wait Time must always be larger than the gapTime If you still have communication errors repeat steps by increasing the gapTime and then the wait Time C Communication problems with devices digitally integrated to an I A Series system using FoxCom protocol
315. stations cannot configure the CFT15 The PC20 does support configuration and calibration of the CFT 15 SRD991 Setpoint Source output mode is not configurable from IFDC The PC20 does allow configuration of the setpoint source HTG HTG configuration is possible only with IFDC on the primary display of AW WP51 stations The ECB13 default display for the standard I A Series system Display Manager and for FoxView has the incorrect command behind the IT Maint button For this reason the IFDC upgrade CD for the Solaris operating system installs new versions of the ECB13 default displays You must have FoxView Version 6 0e or later in order to have the ECB13 FoxView display work correctly If an older version of FoxView is installed and IFDC is installed the ECB13 default display does not work correctly and provides erroneous information Also after IFDC is installed installation of any upgrade of FoxView prior to I A Series system Version 6 2 overwrites the corrected FoxView ECB13 default display IFDC HTG configuration is not possible from AW WP70 stations In order to maintain commonality between FoxView default displays on Solaris and Windows based stations the ECB 13 default display on Windows based I A Series system stations continues to have an IT Maint button However do not attempt to invoke IFDC on a Windows based I A Series system from the ECB13 default display IT Maint button as unpredictable results may occur PC20 Vers
316. sts contact the CSC 03 EEPROM Chksum Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while viewing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persists contact the CSC 13 1F4 1F5 EEPROM Write Error Analog Supply Low Analog Supply High Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while viewing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persists contact the CSC Analog power supply voltage is low Contact the CSC Analog power supply voltage is high Contact the CSC 1F6 Drive Supply Low Drive power supply voltage is low Contact the CSC 1F7 Drive Supply High Drive power supply voltage is high Contact the CSC 258 259 Proc Brd Temp Low Proc Brd Temp High The processor PWA temperature is too low Measurements are invalid Relocate the transmitter or adjust the temperature The processor PWA temperature is too high Measurements are invalid Relocate the transmitter or adjust the temperature 25A 25B Cur Brd Temp Low Cur Brd Temp High The current PWA temperature is too low Measurements are invalid Relocate the transmitter or adjust the temperature The current PWA temperature is too high Measurements are invalid Relocate the transmitter or adjust the temperature 2BC Sensor Stalled Signal received from flowtube sensors is below minimum required lev
317. t that condition If the device communication system and computer are OK check the IFDC software Verify that all files reside in the specified directories If this does not identify the problem try reloading the IFDC software and or restoring database files from your backup If all else fails contact the Customer Satisfaction Center CSC at 1 866 746 6477 When calling please have available all pertinent information about your PC processor type speed RAM disk size and so forth your module software version and a description of your problem It is also helpful if your PC is running IFDC at the time you call If Invensys Foxboro service asks you to send a trace file generate a trace file as described below and send it to Invensys Foxboro service per e mail Device Status Error Messages Status error messages explanations and recommended actions for various device types are located in the applicable appendix 65 MI 024 495 October 2010 4 Troubleshooting Device Diagnostic Error Messages Diagnostic error codes error messages and recommended actions for various device types are located in the applicable appendix PC20 Trace Function PC20 has a trace function which helps Foxboro service locate any problems After a normal installation the trace function is switched off If you are asked to enable tracing do the following l Select Start gt Run and enter the program name of the registry editor regedi
318. t Protection If a selected function modifies the device output the caution shown below is displayed The device s output is modified during this procedure Leaving the control loop in automatic may cause a process upset Press Continue when the control loop is in manual mode or Cancel to abort Toolbar The program is equipped with a toolbar at the top of the screen It can be shown or hidden at any time by using the View menu The icons on the toolbar are shown in Figure 8 A listing of the features and descriptions for the toolbar is given in Table 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Dl alm All en Figure 8 Toolbar Icons Table 4 Toolbar Features and Descriptions Item Feature Description 1 Preconfigure Creates a preconfiguration database using a default database as a template New 2 Database Edit Edits an existing stored configuration database 3 Save Saves the active configuration database to a file 4 Print Prints the active configuration database 5 FoxDoc Executes the FoxDoc application 6 MI Displays the instruction manual T About Displays the software version number 8 Help Enables user to click on any item so that help for that item is displayed An additional communication toolbar is also displayed at the top of the screen It can be shown or hidden at any time by using the View menu The icons on the toolbar are shown in Figure 9 A listing of the features and descriptions for the t
319. t X12 0 Damping 0 Cal Point Y12 0 URV 850 Cal Point X13 0 LRV 200 Cal Point Y13 0 Factory Info FACTORY INFO Cal Point X14 0 Line Freq Filter 02 Cal Point Y14 0 Sens Fault Detect 00 Cal Point X15 0 Display Label FOXBORO Cal Point Y15 0 Serial Number 9472 Cal Point X16 0 Linearization Mode 00 Cal Point Y16 0 Manufacturing Date 5 21 96 Cal Point X17 0 Cal Date 7 14 98 Cal Point Y17 0 Characterization 00 Cal Point X18 0 Calib Initials STD Cal Point Y18 0 Device Type 00 Cal Point X19 0 Unused Parameter 11 8 95 Cal Point Y19 0 Unused Parameter 00 Cal Point X20 0 Major Revision Code 01 Cal Point Y20 0 Unused Parameter 18 Cal Point X21 0 Unused Parameter 18 Cal Point Y21 0 Unused Parameter 00 Cal Point X22 0 Primary and Sec EGU C Cal Point Y22 0 Secondary Meas Units 20 Cal Offset 4 ma 3133 Number Cal Points 03 Cal Offset 20 ma 3133 Cal Point X1 0 TON Count 4 ma 284 9344 117 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix C RTT20 T120 Temperature Transmitters Table 19 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Cal Point Y1 10 TON Count 20 ma 4525 617 Cal Point X2 15 Diag Error Code 00 00 Cal Point Y2 25 Cold Junction Config 00 Cold Junction Fixed 0 Database Change Coun 5e FoxCom Turn around 00 118 Appendix D IMT10 IMT20 Magnetic Flow Transmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the IMT10 20 Magnetic Flow transmitters in regards to the Inte
320. t does not work if IFDC is running on the secondary display in a dual display system Preconfiguring a Device 40 The IFDC PC20 enables you to preconfigure a device and save the configuration in your database for later downloading to a device You can do this by beginning a new file New in the File menu or opening an existing file Open in the File menu When you begin a new file you access a default database of the selected type of device When you open an existing file you access the database of a specific device which has been previously saved to this data directory In either case you can modify the database and then save it with the Save As function in the File menu You can also then or later download the database to a device To send a database to a device the 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 database must be first saved to a file Then you must connect to the device and select File and Open and then select the proper override Connecting to a Device To connect to a device first hardwire your device For PC20 if this is done prior to startup the configurator automatically connects to the device upon startup if the device is connected after startup select Connect to Device in the File menu For IFDC you must specify the device via the Device Select dialog box The IFDC PC20 presents the Device Data screen see Figure 18 and device top level menu Figure 18 for the connected device Also displayed is the device
321. t or regedt32 Select the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Foxboro FoxIFDC 3 Select the entry ITCDEBUG 4 With the right mouse click you are able to modify the value Set the value for 5 ITCDEBUG on 2 Trace Debug 2 No Debug 0 Now start PC20 reproduce the problem and exit PC20 PC20 generates a file output txt in the directory C Program Files Foxboro FoxIFDC IF DC Trace Function IFDC has a trace function which helps Foxboro service locate any problems After a normal installation the trace function is switched off If you are asked to enable tracing do the following 66 On stations with the Solaris operating system 1 2 Open a VT100 window or cmdtool Move to the IFDC directory cd opt fox ciocfg ifdenv Create a file named IFDC_Trace Is las gt IFDC_Trace On stations with the Windows operating system 1 Ze Select Start gt Programs gt Command Prompt In the command prompt window move to the IEDC directory d cd opt fox ciocfg ifdenv Type Sh and press the return key to enter a NuTCRACKER Korn Shell Create a file named IFDC_Trace Is las gt IFDC_Trace Invoke IFDC the same way as before Run IFDC and reproduce any problem you want to trace The trace function generates logfiles which are all written into the directory opt fox ciocfg ifdenv ifdc_startup log pt_api log om_api log and output txt Send these trace files and the IFDC_Trace file to Invensys Foxbor
322. tScript Printer If that does not work you must install the printer specific description file Printer description files PPD files are available from the printer manufacturer and some printer manufacturers allow the printer description files to be downloaded from their web page For example Hewlett Packard provides all their printer description files on their Customer Service web page http www hp com cposupportleschrome html 11 Select Printers from the pull down menu click on Next and follow the directions provided on the screen The Windows version of the PPD file is the correct one Adobe also provides a number of printer description files for a number of different printers Attp www adobe com prodindex printerdrivers installwinppd html To install a new printer PPD file 1 Exit any running IFDC FoxDraw or I A Series SFC application 57 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 2 Rename the PPD file The PPD filename must be lowercase For example HP1600C1 PPD must be renamed hp1600c1 ppd 3 Change the file extension If the printer is a PostScript printer the filename must be lt filename gt ps If the printer is a PCL printer the filename must be lt file name gt pcl 4 Install the file in the opt windu xprinter ppds directory Once the new printer driver file is installed XPrinter reads the file and the Print Setup Printer Type list now includes the new printer type Print Font This selection al
323. ta screen may be opened to display additional Profibus specific parameters For viewing the Profibus data select View gt Profibus Data This function opens a modeless dialog box The displayed information is updated approximately once every two seconds Profibus Data Figure K 2 Standard Profibus Data Screen Fields Description Readback The actual position of the actuator valve within the travel span in units of PV SCALE Position D The current position of the actuator valve discrete Possible values are NOT INITIALIZED before an autostart has been performed CLOSED OPENED and INTERMEDIATE FB Mode Actual Mode of the Function Block SP Setpoint SP in units of PV SCALE This setpoint is used as desired value when the function block is in Mode AUTO and the status of SP is OK for example Good Non Cascade 0x80 232 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Fields Description RCAS_IN Setpoint RCAS_IN in units of PV SCALE This setpoint is normally transmitted by a DCS system This setpoint is used as desired value when the function block is in Mode RCAS and the status of RCAS_IN is OK for example Good Cascade 0xCO RCAS_OUT Setpoint RCAS_OUT in units of PV SCALE with status which is used as input for the function block algorithm Depending on the mode of the function block contains the setpoi
324. talizer Units If Totalizer On is checked y select Gal Lit or Custom Format for Grand Total If Totalizer On is checked y select from menu of eight choices Format for Forward Reverse and Net Totals If Totalizer On is checked y select from menu of eight choices Database Report NOTE If a parameter in the report is UNUSED the corresponding value shown has no meaning for that device Table 48 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 28 Tot 1 Alarm Set Poin 100000 Tag Number REV B 1 Tot 2 Alarm On 00 Tag Name IMT96 Tot 2 Alarm Set Poin 1000000 Device Name DevNam Rate Response Alarm 01 Geo Location lab Display Response Ala 00 Date of Manufacture 01 25 00 Alarm Clear 01 Transmitter MS Code IMT96 PEADB10Z A Rate Response Diag 00 Transmitter Serial N 99420443 Display Response Dia 01 Tube MS Code 1 TUBEMS Tube Serial Number TUBES N Tube MS Code 2 Passcode 1 On 00 Write Protect 00 Pass 1 Protect 00 Default Display 00 Passcode 1 0 Dual Display On Off 00 Passcode 2 On 00 Dual Display Line 1 00 Pass 2 Protect 01 Dual Display Line 2 00 Passcode 2 2 Rate EGU M1 00 Line Frequency 3c Flow Rate Units M1 GPM Flow Direction 00 EGU Rate Factor 1 Contact In 1 Functio 00 324 Appendix O IMT96 Magnetic Flow Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 48 Sample Database Repo
325. tance between each wire and ground It should be infinite If the resistance values are correct the transmitter power supply or electronics module may be defective If the fault cannot be determined and the transmitter is integrally mounted to the flowtube the flowtube coils are probably defective If the transmitter is remotely mounted from the flowtube verify that the coil drive wires are securely connected If the fault cannot be determined disconnect the coil wires from the terminals and measure the resistance between the terminals It should be between 1 and 100 Q Then verify that the resistance between each terminal and ground is infinite If any resistance is incorrect the flowtube coil is probably defective If the resistances are correct install new coil drive wires between the flowtube and transmitter For installation details refer to M720 with 8000A and 8300 Transmitters Installation MI 021 382 1B External RAM Bad Install a new electronics module 20 Under Range Fill the flowtube with process liquid Verify that the conductivity is gt 5 uS cm 21 Over Range Verify that the correct flowtube is being used for the process flow range If correct rerange the transmitter for greater flow rate 22 Over Range Verify that the correct flowtube is being used for the process flow range If correct rerange the transmitter for greater flow rate 30 Factory Data Lost Install a new e
326. tation time The user must engineer this Rotation 16777 defines the anticipated time bus parameter Note 4 Time 215 for one token round on the Profibus including allowances for high and low priority transactions errors and GAP maintenance Gap Update 1 255 The Gap update factor The user must engineer this Factor specifies the number of token bus parameter rounds between GAP maintenance update cycles Highest 1 125 Highest slave device address The user must engineer this Station bus parameter Addr Retry Limit 0 7 Max retry limit The user must engineer this bus parameter NOTE 1 If you press the Calculate button the system calculates suggestions for those parameters which depend on the selected baud rate Of course you need to adapt the suggested parameter values to your needs 2 The unit for the times calculated is TBit Bit Time which means a time based on one bit to transmit with a certain baud rate for example 1 TBit at 12 Mbaud 1 12 000 000 bit sec 83 nsec 3 Refer to the Profibus Specification TSL max TSL1 TSL2 TSL1 2 TTD maxTSDR 11 bit TSM TSL2 2 TTD maxTID1 11 bit TSM Transmission Delay Time TTD tTD tBit 4 Refer to the Profibus Specification min TTR na TTC high TMC k low TMC mt RET TMC where na number of master stations k estimated number of low priority message cycles per token rotation TTC token cycle time TMC message cycle time depending o
327. tatus Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Device Severe problem Check the other status bits Malfunction Configuration The configuration of the This flag can be reset with the menu item Changed transmitter has been changed Reset Changed Flag Cold Start Device rebooted Check power supply Output The output current is fixed The Device Specific Status may show the reason Current Fixed The reason might be that it is in the fail safe state This flag is also set when the HART device is in multidrop mode for the fail safe state Analog Output Saturated Analog Output out of 4 to 20 mA range The Primary Value PV exceeds the configured range Check range limits Nonprimary Variable Out of Limits Primary Variable Out of Limits Not applicable to the IMT25 transmitter Sensor signal out of limits Check device specific status and applied process value Device Specific Status Active Tells whether an active Check Additional Status 1 and 2 Diagnostic diagnostic condition exists or not Prior Tells whether a prior Using the transmitter key pad to obtain Diagnostic diagnostic condition existed additional information about the diagnostic Use the Test menu to clear Alarm Hi Flow Flow above configured high Make process change or reconfigure alarm Flag
328. tions a little differently If the Points field is 0 then the transmitter is using the factory installed calibration If the number of points is 2 to 22 the transmitter uses the calibration data entered into the custom curve table NOTE Since it is not possible to leave the input calibration values in memory when performing a Custom Input Curve calibration it is strongly recommended that the transmitter database be stored to a file prior to making drastic changes in the calibration data The procedure to input a custom curve is as follows 1 Select Custom Input Curve from Calibration menu 105 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix C RTT20 TI20 Temperature Transmitters 106 2 Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 3 Select the number of points you want in your custom curve 2 22 Custom Curve Ed Set the number of points in the custom calibration curve Enter the observed Measured value and the Desired reading The entered Measured values must be in ascending order Press Continue to validate and save the changes E Paints in the Custom Calibration Curve Calibrator s Initials ST D Measured Desired Measured Desired Measured Desired Tm TTT a ofj oO Sl m he TTT THT In Degrees C Calibrated 11 4 97 Cancel Help Figure C 3 Sample RTT20 Custom Input Curve Screen Ta DI ee a E A 4 CAUTION CC
329. to be entered The input values X Values are sorted in increasing order A customized characteristic which is stored in the device can be activated by selecting Custom Curve or deactivated by switching to Linear or Square Root 270 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 141GP A XWale YWalwe Figure L 14 Sample Characterization Tab Screen Output Tab Screen The Output tab screen allows the configuration of the output signal This includes the selection of The transfer function for the output linear or square root Reranging by selecting the Lower and Upper Range Values The output damping value o The output mode 271 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters 272 E 141GP A Identifier Input Characterization Output Density Failsave Handling Device Measurement Square root Low Flow Mode C Substtute Function Lower Range Value fo 00000 mbar OP LOH Crete of Eley Upper Range Value 250 00000 mbar Upper Range Lirnit 250 0000 mbar Dutput Mode Dutput Damping 0 00000 sec Analog 4 20 mE Cmos Polling Address fi OK Cancel Apply Help Figure L 15 Sample Output Tab Screen Square Root Mode The transfer function of the analog output can either be linear or square root If the Square root mode check box is activated the transfer fun
330. to on line mode if necessary The Go On Line function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu Go Off Line Function Normally the device should remain on line However this function enables you to force the device off line if necessary The Go Off line function is accessed via the Test menu from the device top level menu Help Function Help Menu In the Help menu you can choose to display a list of Help topics Index display overview instructions IFDC PC20 Using Help or display the version number of the configurator About If you choose Index you can select information on a specific menu To search for a topic or choose from the list of available topics select the Index tab from this screen see Figure 24 To search for a word or phrase that may be contained in a Help topic select the Find tab from this screen Help Via the Toolbar The icon on the toolbar provides an easy way of accessing the About Help described above The N icon can be used to get information on the subject you designate with the indicator To do this 1 Click on the R2 icon 2 Move the mouse pointer to the area in which you want Help 55 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation 3 Click again to display the Help message for that particular item Help Via the F1 Function Key Help is also available on any subject identified by the placement of your cursor when pressing the F1 function key Help Topic
331. toolbar which enables you to go to the configuration various calibration or status functions directly These functions vary with each device See Figure 17 Device Functions xj STATUS REZERO CONFIGURATION POINT CALIBRATION RERANGE Figure 17 Sample Device Toolbar Device Top Level Menu Screen The device top level menu screen shown in Figure 18 is displayed when connected to a device or when preconfiguration data is loaded onto a window This screen also has pull down menus for selecting the various functions Explanations of the menus and functions that are common to most types of devices appear in Table 7 41 MI 024 495 October 2010 3 Operation Intelligent Field Device Configurator Device Data E Device Data Device Functions Figure 18 Sample Device Top Level Menu and Data Screen 42 3 Operation MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 7 Device Top Level Menu Description of Functions Top Level Menu Pick Submenu Pick Description File New Ctrl N Creates a preconfiguration database using a default database as a template Open Ctrl O Edits an existing configuration database Close Closes the current configuration field Save Ctrl S Saves the active document Save As Saves the configuration to a file Import Imports the ASCII files generated by IFDC PC20 See page 48 Export Writes all the device parameters to an ASCII file which then can be imported into other
332. ular database programs Improved functionality FoxCom and HART protocol Improved communications with devices integrated to I A Series system Improved information and layout on database printing Software Version 2 2 Enhancements Software version 2 2 includes the following enhancements Full configuration for Multi range Pressure Transmitter IxP25 Full configuration for Premium Multi range Pressure Transmitter IxP50 Full configuration for Invensys and Viatran Transmitters using the HART Protocol 1 Introduction MI 024 495 October 2010 Full configuration for the FoxCom and HART Intelligent Positioners SRD960 SRD970 and NAF LinkIT New and improved functionality Starting IFDC PC20 is now independent of the protocol It is possible to connect to one device with FoxCom protocol and afterwards connect to another with HART protocol without the need to leave and restart IFDC PC20 Pre Configuration for devices with different protocols HART FoxCom could be done in parallel There is a new File gt New dialog This selection dialog shows in a tree view all supported protocols and devices Enhanced Generic HART configuration dialog boxes PC20 Software Version 2 2 includes the following enhancements Full configuration for the Profibus PA Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 SRD970 and NAF LinkIT Full configuration for the 140 Series Profibus PA Buoyancy Transmitter IFDC So
333. upply The option is not required to power the modem because the power for the modem is obtained through the serial port connection to the PC The power supply option cannot be used with ac line powered devices such as mass flowmeters and magnetic flow transmitters It can only be used with the SRD991 Intelligent Positioner when the positioner is configured for FoxCom digital output CAUTION EA You can potentially damage an SRD991 Intelligent Positioner by attaching a dc power supply to its 4 to 20 mA input terminals The positioner input is a mA source not a voltage source Therefore the power supply option must not be used with any HART protocol positioner or any FoxCom protocol positioner configured for 4 to 20 mA input 1 Introduction MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Device Restrictions IFDC The Intelligent Field Device Configurator for I A Series system AW WP51 Solaris and AW WP70 Windows based PCs stations supports all Intelligent Field Devices listed in Table 2 For some devices there are restrictions in the device support as described below Non Foxboro Devices HART Protocol Only the Universal and Common Practice commands are supported Device specific commands are not supported CFT10 Component Tag parameters for the Solids Configuration cannot be configured using IFDC The PC20 does allow component tag configuration CFT15 The CFT15 is a Modbus device Therefore IFDC running on I A Series system
334. ut Control Oe Current Out Control 07 Alarm 1 Control 02 Alarm 2 Control 04 Gen Func Cntrl 1 00 Gen Func Cntrl 2 00 Pulse Out Preset 0 5 Current Out Preset 0 5 Alarm 1 Level 300 Alarm 2 Level 30 Alarm 1 Hysteresis 50 161 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix F CFT10 Mass Flowmeters Table 28 Sample Database Report Continued Parameter Value Parameter Value Alarm 2 Hysteresis 5 Flow Zero Offset 0 Tube Serial No 1 Dens Coef 1 0 Dens Coef 2 10000 Dens Coef 3 0 Dens Coef 4 0 Nominal Capacity 1000 Flow Coef 1 0 Flow Coef 2 1 Flow Coef 3 0 Flow Coef 4 1 Dens Coef 5 0 Dens Coef 6 0 Temp Cor Slope 1 Temp Cor Offset 0 Phase In Cal 1 0 Phase In Cal 2 1 Phase In Cal 3 0 Phase In Cal 4 0 Neg Phase Cal 1 0 Neg Phase Cal 2 1 162 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the CFT15 Mass Flowmeters in regard to the Intelligent Field Device Configurators It contains information on Device Data Screen Error Messages Calibration Configuration Database Report NOTE The CFT15 transmitter is a Modbus device which is not supported by IFDC running on I A Series stations The PC20 does support configuration and calibration of the CFT15 Device Data Screen olx Device Data Tag Number TEST TAG NUM Device Type CFT15 Rev 01 00 024
335. ut the device in Manual mode and select Continue At the prompt select Continue again Select Continue when ready to set input to 0 00 equivalent When the displayed measurement is stable select Continue The final ReZero value is shown Select Continue again to accept this value and save the calibration to the transmitter Follow the prompt to put the transmitter back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements N Point Calibration This function enables you to perform a 1 or 2 Point Calibration For a 1 Point Calibration a constant offset is computed and utilized over the entire sensor curve and for a 2 Point Calibration the resulting offsets are straightline calculated to the LRV and URV The procedure to do an N Point Calibration is as follows 1 2 Select N Point Calibration from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Select 1 or 2 Point calibration Enter the Lower and Upper Range Values and the desired reading you want to see reported for each calibration point Select Continue 91 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix B RTT10 Temperature Transmitters N Point Calibration Figure B 2 Sample RTT10 N Point Calibration Screen 4 Select Continue again when you are ready to set the input for Calibration Point 1 5 When the displayed measurement is stable for Calibration Point 1 select Continue 6 At the prompt select Conti
336. utostart No Autostart was done Ensure proper mounting of positioner and adequate Done or Autostart was run supply pressure Refer to on line Help for other and did not complete potential causes Rerun Autostart Calibration successfully procedure Position High Position above High Monitor situation or correct cause Alarm Alarm Set Point Position Low Alarm Position below Low Alarm Set Point Monitor situation or correct cause Position High Position above High Monitor situation or correct cause High Alarm High Alarm Set Point Position Low Position below Low Monitor situation or correct cause Low Alarm Low Alarm Set Point Control Diff Difference between set Check to ensure that there is adequate supply pressure OOL point requested and Verify tuning parameters Refer to troubleshooting current position section of SRD991 Intelligent Positioner exceeds allowed limit MI EVE 0105A for a user specified time Binary Input The Binary Input signal Monitor situation or correct cause 1 or 2 is active Air Supply The air supply pressure Check to ensure that there is adequate supply Pressure Alarm fell below the pressure configured lower limit Output Pressure Alarm The positioner cannot regulate the output pressure Check the pneumatics RAM Error writing Replace failed item or positioner positioner memory EEPROM Error writing Replace failed item or positioner positioner EEPROM ROM Err
337. vice Data OF x Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters Tag Number TEST34 VORTEX Device Type TagName YORTEX01 Model Code 83W T04H1KCRJA Flow Measurement Total Measurement m Equivalent Figure H 2 Sample Vortex Device Data Screen HART Device Error Messages Status Error Messages Table 32 Status Error Messages Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On line If this does not clear problem cycle power and if necessary replace the electronic module Init Required Transmitter is re If problem persists select Test gt Go On line If this initializing on reset does not clear problem cycle power and if necessary replace the electronic module Diagnostic Indicates an active See Secondary Status Fields and Diagnostic Error Error diagnostic error Messages to determine problem and corrective action Secondary Indicates an error in The secondary status error is shown in Column 2 of the Status Error secondary status screen display Secondary Status Fields Device Busy Set if EEPROM If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this write is in progress does not clear problem cycle power and if necessary and pending replace the electronic module 180 Appendix H 83 Series Vortex Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Table 32 Status Error Messag
338. ware and memory necessary to load and run PC20 After installation is complete reboot your computer Software Installation for Profibus Cards For the PROFIboard or PROFIcard the appropriate driver and Profibus Control Panel from Softing must be installed Please refer to the user manual from Softing for detailed installation description Before you start PC20 for Profibus Devices check to see if the Profibus interface card is working correctly Goto Control Panel gt Profibus The Profibus Control Panel software from Softing should show a green mark at the chosen interface card node Ifyou have any problems installing the Softing interface please contact Softing AG Phone 49 0 89 4 56 56 0 Email support communication Osofting com IFDC Software Installation For IFDC software installation refer to Intelligent Field Device Configurator IFDC Release Notes B0400QL MI 024 495 October 2010 2 Installation PC20 Instruction Book CD ROM Installation The PC20 instruction book for the Intelligent Field Device Configurator is provided on CD ROM Put the CD ROM into the CD ROM tray and install per the instruction on the CD ROM label After installation launch the PC20 program Then select Options gt Settings from the toolbar In the Directories tab screen the following run command in the MI dialog box might be displayed C Acrobat3 Reader AcroRd32 exe D PC20 ENTRY PDF PC20 tries to find the executable for the Acr
339. wer saving adjustments Note 2 The 250 ohms are built into the PC20 optional power supply Note 3 Optional Foxboro power supply cannot be used with 120 V ac powered Transmitters Also cannot be used with SRD991 Intelligent Valve Positioner with HART protocol Figure 28 PC20 Fault Analysis Repeated Communication Failures HART Protocol 70 Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters This appendix provides information that is exclusive to the 820 860 and I A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitters in regards to the Intelligent Field Device Configurator It contains information on Device Data Screen Device Error Messages Calibration Configuration o Database Report NOTE This appendix applies to Foxboro I A Series Pressure Transmitters with both FoxCom and HART protocol The text applies to both devices unless specifically identified as pertaining to one or the other Device Data Screen Device Data Figure A 1 Sample Device Data Screen 71 MI 024 495 October 2010 Error Messages Status Er ror Messages Appendix A 820 860 and I A Series Pressure Transmitters Table 12 Transmitter Status Error Messages range Message Explanation Recommended Action Primary Status Fields Device Busy Transmitter is busy If problem persists select Test gt Go On Line If this does not clear problem contact the CSC Init Required T
340. wing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persists contact the CSC Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while viewing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persists contact the CSC Press O on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while viewing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persists contact the CSC 14 EOP EEPROM Write Press 0 on transmitter integral keypad display if so equipped while viewing fault from Device Status menu to attempt to clear message If message persists contact the CSC 1F4 Analog Supply Low Analog power supply voltage is low Contact the CSC 1F5 Analog Supply High Analog power supply voltage is high Contact the CSC 1F6 Drive Supply Low Drive power supply voltage is low Contact the CSC 1F7 258 Drive Supply High Proc Brd Temp Low Drive power supply voltage is high Contact the CSC The processor PWA temperature is too low Measurements are invalid Relocate the transmitter or adjust the temperature 259 25A Proc Brd Temp High Cur Brd Temp Low The processor PWA temperature is too high Measurements are invalid Relocate the transmitter or adjust the temperature The current PWA temperature is too low Measurements are invalid Relocate the transmitter or adjust the temperature
341. xport Data it is possible to store the measured trending data collected since the Trend dialog box is displayed and the Monitor checkbox is checked into an ASCII text file You are asked for the path and filename to store the trending database The default filename is composed of the Tag Number _TRD txt However you can choose any other name The trend file has a header part and the trend data part with the curve values The header part contains information such as the tagname number of curves as well as ranges and descriptions of the curves The trend data part lists in each line the measured values for each curve Each measurement shows the sequence number date Month Day Year and time Hour Minutes Seconds Milliseconds of measurement and the values for each curve To import the trend data into other programs select the appropriate ASCII import function within the other program Example for Microsoft Excel In Microsoft Excel choose File gt Open For the file type select Text Files to list all files and select the desired file with the ending _TRD txt The Excel Import Assistant will guide you through the definition of the import format Start the import with the headings for the curves line number 13 The fields are separated by tabs Select General for all columns Import the file It is now possible to use the Excel functions and store this file in the Excel format The imported information will be displayed in several columns
342. y Enable Blank Disable If enabled select Setup Totals Reset Setup amp Totals Test Mode Test Mode amp Setup Test Mode and Totals or Test Mode Setup amp Totals Then enter 4 digit passcode Enable Passcode 2 Similar to Enable Passcode 1 Noise Reduction y On Blank Off Empty Pipe Detection J On Blank Off Line Frequency Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz Empty Pipe Effect Select No Effect or Auto Signal Lock Display Totalizer Tab Screen IMT25 Device Configuration x Identifier Flow Alarms Contacts Options Display Totalizer m Display Preferences Dual Display On IV Display Line 1 Rate EGU y Display Line 2 Forward Total y Default Display On Power Up Forward Total y 3 1 Sec Flow Display Dampina Totals Totals On M Accumulate totals and display them Totalizer Units Gai Custom Format for Grand Total CN y Total Flow Needed to Trigger a Pulse 0 1 Format for Forward Reverse and Net Totals ESE y Gal Cancel Help Apply Figure E 10 Sample IMT25 Display Totalizer Tab Screen Field Entry Display Preferences Dual Display On y On Blank Off 143 MI 024 495 October 2010 Appendix E IMT25 Magnetic Flow Transmitters Field Entry Display Line 1 If Dual Display On is checked y select from menu of six choices
343. y Coef 2 Density Coef 3 Density Coef 4 Nominal Capacity Flow Coef 1 Flow Coef 2 Flow Coef 3 Flow Coef 4 174 Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters MI 024 495 October 2010 Modbus Tab Screen CFT15 Transmitter Configuration 247 9 6 kb sec v Figure G 9 Sample CFT15 Modbus Tab Screen Field Entry Address Enter address from 1 to 247 Baud Rate Select 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 or 19 2 kb second Delay Select 0 20 50 150 or 300 Parity Select Odd Even or None 175 MI 024 495 October 2010 Database Report Appendix G CFT15 Mass Flowmeters Table 31 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 21 Curr 1 l Pulse 3 0 Tag Number TEST TAG NUM Curr 1 l Pulse 4 0 Tag Name CORIOLIS METER Curr 2 l Pulse 1 0 Device Name CORO01 Curr 2 l Pulse 2 1 Geo Location DEFAULT LOCAT Curr 2 l Pulse 3 0 Mass Flow Units kg s Curr 2 l Pulse 4 0 Density Units kg m3 Curr 3 l Pulse 1 0 Temperature Units K Curr 3 l Pulse 2 1 Total Units kg Curr 3 l Pulse 3 0 Vol Flow Units l s Curr 3 l Pulse 4 0 Comp A Label COMP A Clock Calibration 5e 007 Comp B Label COMP B Xmtr Serial Num 1 Slug Flow 10 06 Xmtr Manuf Plant 00 Pulse Out Slope 1 Dbase Chng Count ff Pulse Out Offset 0 Init Required 00 Mass Flow Slope 1 Pro
344. y Display Select Temp Absolute or mA mA Output Output If Analog Output Mode on sensor screen specify Absolute Measurement or Temperature Max Enter 20 mA range value Min Enter 4 mA range value Failsafe Mode Specify Off On or Pulse 298 Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Field Entry Value If on enter dc mA output between 3 8 and 20 5 mA Application Switch Triggers Enter value of Low and High triggers Database Report Table 44 Sample Database Report Parameter Value Parameter Value Transmitter Type 30 Reference Temp 3 0 Tag Number FT102 Temp Size App 1 02 Tag Name 870ITCR Temp Size App 2 02 Device Name DevNam Temp Size App 3 02 Geo Location Office Chem Units 1 06 Application Select 00 Chem Units 2 01 Probe 00 Chem Units 3 01 Cell Factor 0 1 Absolute Scale 1 02 Primary Units 1 02 Absolute Scale 2 00 Primary Units 2 02 Absolute Scale 3 00 Primary Units 3 02 Custom Chem Scale 1 103 Custom Units 1 04 Custom Chem Scale 2 200 Custom Units 2 00 Custom Chem Scale 3 300 Custom Units 3 00 Meas 1 Units kohms Primary Scale 1 09 Measurement Mapping 00 00 00 00 Primary Scale 2 09 Output Range Max 1000 Primary Scale 3 09 Output Range Min 0 Prim Scale CMCP 1 00 TON Count 20 mA 26533 Prim Scale CMCP 2 02 TON Count 4
345. y allowed at workshop security level The procedure to perform an Analog Setpoint calibration is 1 Take the positioner out of the process loop and connect it to a current source 2 Select Analog Setpoint from the Calibration menu 3 Set input current to 4 mA 236 Appendix K Intelligent Positioners SRD991 SRD960 and Others MI 024 495 October 2010 Acknowledge by entering this value 4 mA in the edit box on the display Set the input current to 20 mA Acknowledge by entering this value 20 mA in the edit box on the display PAGS a e The screen responds with the message that the Analog Setpoint Calibration has finished Angle Calibration Angle calibration is needed whenever the printed wiring board or the potentiometer is replaced This operation is typically done on the bench and may require special tools and removal of the positioner from the valve Refer to SRD991 Intelligent Positioner M1 EVE 0105 A for more information NOTE This function is only allowed at workshop security level The procedure to perform an Angle calibration is 1 Select Angle from the Calibration menu 2 The feedback lever is rotated to the lower angle value typically 45 down from horizontal 3 Acknowledge by entering the lower angle value into the edit box on the display 4 The feedback lever is rotated to the upper angle value typically 45 up from horizontal 5 Acknowledge by entering the upper angle value into t
346. y configuration parameter and write the change to the transmitter the Configuration Changed flag is set Identifier Tab Screen The factory installed information on the transmitter including the Device type Serial Number Sensor ID Firmware and Hardware Version Manufacturer and Electronic ID is not modifiable Only Tag Number Tag Name Tag Date and Message can be changed 141GP A Input Characterization Output Density Faisave Handing Device ace W278 MESSAGE Figure L 11 Sample Identifier Tab Screen for a HART Transmitter 266 Appendix L 140 130 Series Pressure and Level Transmitters Field Entry Tag Number Enter maximum of 8 characters The Tag Number becomes the transmitter filename Tag Name Enter maximum of 16 characters Optional used for reference only Tag Date Enter a date It is possible to enter any valid future or past date This field may be used for storing the last calibration or maintenance date Message Enter maximum of 32 characters Optional used for company internal designations device numbers for material industry business final alignment of the device startup of the device or any other purpose NOTE Only capital letters can be used No special symbols can be used Input Tab Screen Profibus PV Tab Screen The Input tab screen see Figure L 13 and Profibus PV tab screen see Figure L 12 are very MI 024 495 October 2010
347. y pressure Large actuator Use Endpoint Calibration and tune manually Employ boosters to increase output capacity Hardware problem Endpoints Calibration Endpoints calibration automatically detects the valve end points It does this by using only the first of the four Autostart steps This process determines the valve mechanical travel stops zero and span but not the tuning set Accordingly it requires much less time than a full Autostart calibration If the tuning parameters are available for the control valve from previous testing or existing data then performing Endpoints calibration and manually entering the tuning set shortens the positioner setup time significantly The procedure to perform an Endpoints calibration is 1 Select Endpoints from the Calibration menu 2 Acknowledge the warning 3 Enter the calibration data or suitable message upon successful completion Analog Setpoint Calibration Analog setpoint calibration enables you to calibrate the upper and lower limits of the current input 4 mA and 20 mA if the positioner is being used in analog mode Using the positioner in the analog mode requires jumper selection on the printed wiring board Refer to SRD99J Intelligent Positioner MI EVE 0105 A for the correct jumper location A CAUTION zoe When in analog mode the positioner cannot be connected to a voltage source To do so causes permanent damage to the instrument NOTE This function is onl
348. ynamic measurements Calibration Pure H2O If you are measuring purity of water by checking the conductivity in uS cm or resistivity in MQecm with an 871CR A or 871CR B sensor you can use this calibration 1 Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the Configuration function See page 295 Select Calibration Pure H20 from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue 4 Enter the temperature cell factor tCF and cell factor CF found on your sensor Also enter the calibrator s initials and select Continue Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Solution 1 Point Offset This option permits you to set a 1 point offset for up to three applications and is normally used to correct for zero shift This should be used only if you have previously performed a 2 point calibration Appendix M 870ITCR Conductivity Resistivity Transmitters MI 024 495 October 2010 Se ee Select the application to be calibrated from the Sensor Tab screen in the Configuration function See page 295 Select Solution 1 Point Offset from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue One Point Offset Calibration ES Enter the solution value and the calibrator s initials then press Continue r Calibrate Application Number application 1
349. zero offset is shown Save this calibration to the device by selecting Continue Follow the prompt to put the device back into Automatic mode Select Continue to resume dynamic measurements Startup Zero This function is used to set the zero only on initial installation of the transmitter After the initial installation is complete use This function permits you to reset the zero point for the transmitter To set the zero on initial installation of your transmitter see Startup Zero on page 151 The procedure to perform the ReZero function follows on page 150 to reset the zero The procedure to set the zero on initial installation of your transmitter is as follows 1 2 3 Select Startup Zero from the Calibration menu Follow the prompt to put the device in Manual mode and select Continue Set the transmitter flow to zero and select Continue The Startup Zero screen is similar to the ReZero Calibration screen shown in Figure F 2 Wait for the first of three phases of the Startup Zero calibration to occur When the first phase has been completed select Continue to resume the procedure Wait for the second phase of the Startup Zero calibration to occur When the second phase has been completed select Continue to resume the procedure Wait for the third phase of the Startup Zero calibration to occur When the third phase has been completed the zero flow offset value is shown Save this calibration to the transmitter by se

[MI 020-495] Intelligent Field Device Configurator (IFDC

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents